Yamaha RX-A1050 El manual del propietario
- Categoría
- Receptores AV
- Tipo
- El manual del propietario
English
AV Receiver
Owner’s Manual
Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit.
En 2
CONTENTS
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
FEATURES 6
What you can do with the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Useful applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Front display (indicators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
PREPARATIONS 15
General setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Basic speaker configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Advanced speaker configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Input/output jacks and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3 Connecting playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Connecting to the jacks on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
5 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna . . . . 35
Connecting the network cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Preparing the wireless antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
6 Connecting other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
7 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
8 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
9 Configuring the necessary speaker settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . 39
Measuring at one listening position (single measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Checking the measurement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
11 Connecting to a network device wirelessly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Selecting the connection method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Connecting the unit to a wireless network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
PLAYBACK 56
Basic playback procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Selecting an HDMI output jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch
(SCENE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Configuring scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Selecting setting items to be included as scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Selecting the sound mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Enjoying unprocessed playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Listening to FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Setting the frequency steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Registering favorite radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Operating the radio on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
En 3
Playing back music via Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Playing back Bluetooth device music on the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Playing back iPod music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Playback of iPod content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Media sharing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Playback of PC music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Playback of Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Playing back music with AirPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Multi-zone configuration examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Preparing Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Controlling Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Registering favorite items (shortcut) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Registering an item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Recalling a registered item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control) . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Viewing the current status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Switching information on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Viewing the status information on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources
(Option menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
CONFIGURATIONS 101
Configuring input sources (Input menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Input menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Scene menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Configuring sound programs/surround decoders
(DSP Program menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
DSP Program menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Setup menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Speaker (Manual Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Multi Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) . . . . . . . . . 129
Types of information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . 131
ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Turning on/off the remote control sensor (REMOTE SENSOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TUNER FRQ STEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MONITOR CHECK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
En 4
APPENDIX 136
Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Power, system and remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
USB and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
HDMI and video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Network information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Yamaha technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Supported devices and file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Multi-zone output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Audio Return Channel (ARC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Reference diagram (rear panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
En 5
Accessories
Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product.
Remote control Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2)
AM antenna FM antenna
*One of the above is supplied depending on the region
of purchase.
YPAO microphone Power cable
*The supplied power cable varies depending on the region
of purchase.
CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual)
Easy Setup Guide
Safety Brochure
Insert the batteries the right
way round.
Operating range of the remote control
• Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range
shown below.
• The illustrations of the main unit and remote control used in this manual are of the U.S.A. model,
unless otherwise specified.
• In this manual, illustrations of English menu screens are used as examples.
• (China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only)
For information on how to control external devices with the remote control, refer to “Supplement for
Remote Control” on the supplied CD-ROM.
• Some features are not available in certain regions.
• Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice.
• This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control.
• This manual describes all the “iPod” and “iPhone” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to both “iPod” and
“iPhone” unless otherwise specified.
• indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations.
• indicates supplementary explanations for better use.
30° 30°
Within
6 m (20 ft)
En 6
FEATURES
What you can do with the unit
Speakers
BD/DVD player
HDMI Control
Audio/Video
TV remote control
Audio
HDMI Control
Audio
Audio/Video
TV
Sequential operation of a TV,
AV receiver, and BD/DVD
player (HDMI Control)
. p.152
Supports 2- to 7-channel (plus front presence) speaker
system and up to 2 subwoofer connections. Allows
you to enjoy favorite acoustic spaces in various styles.
• Automatically optimizing the speaker
settings to suit your room (YPAO)
. p.39
• Reproducing stereo or multichannel
sounds with the sound fields like
actual movie theaters and concert halls
(CINEMA DSP)
. p.60
• Enjoying compressed music with
enhanced sound (Compressed Music
Enhancer)
. p.64
• Bi-amp connections, channel
expansion (with external power-amp)
and multi-zone configurations to
enhance your system
. p.22
USB device
Audio
Network contents
Wide variety of supported content
•Bluetooth
. p.69
• iPod/iPhone
. p.70
•USB
. p.73
• Media server (PC/NAS)
. p.76
• Internet radio
. p.80
•AirPlay
. p.83
AV receiver (the unit)
Change the input source and favorite
settings with one touch (SCENE)
. p.57
Control
4K Ultra HD signals and
HDCP 2.2 supported
Playback of Dolby Atmos contents
supported
. p.17
iPod/iPhone/
Bluetooth device
En 7
Full of useful functions!
❑ Connecting various devices (p.30)
A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks
on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as
BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players),
game consoles, camcorders, and other devices.
❑ Playing back TV audio in surround sound
with a single HDMI cable connection
(Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.28)
When using an ARC-compatible TV, you only need one
HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio
input from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control
signals.
❑ Various wireless connection methods
(p.47)
The unit supports the Wi-Fi feature that allows the unit to
connect to your wireless router (access point) without a
network cable connection. In addition, Wireless Direct
enables connecting a mobile device to the unit directly
without router.
❑ Creating 3-dimensional sound fields (p.60)
Connecting front presence speakers allows you to
create a natural 3-dimensional sound field in your own
room (CINEMA DSP 3D). Even when no front presence
speakers are connected, the Virtual Presence Speaker
(VPS) function produces 3D surround sound. In
addition, the unit creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker
(VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of
depth to the rear sound field even when no surround
back speakers are connected.
❑ Surround playback with 5 speakers placed
in front (p.62)
If you have surround speakers but there is no space to
place them in the rear of your room, you can place them in
the front and enjoy multichannel surround sound with the 5
speakers placed in the front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT).
❑ Low power consumption (p.128)
The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the
unit’s power consumption.
HDMI Control
TV audio
Video from
external device
Wi-Fi or
Wireless Direct
VSBS
Useful tips
I want to connect a playback device using HDMI for
video and non-HDMI for audio...
Use “Audio Select” in the “Option” menu to specify the
type of an audio input jack to be used for the
corresponding input source (p.100).
Video and audio are not synchronized...
Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay
between video and audio output (p.117).
I want to hear audio from the TV speakers...
Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the
output destination of signals input into the unit (p.120).
Your TV speakers may be selected as an output
destination.
I want to get more bass sounds…
Set “Extra Bass” in the “Option” menu to “On” to enjoy
enhanced bass sounds (p.99).
I want to change the on-screen menu language...
Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a
language from English, Japanese, French, German,
Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese (p.37).
I want to update the firmware...
Use “FIRM UPDATE” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu
to update the unit’s firmware (p.134). If the unit is
connected to the Internet, a message will be displayed
on the TV when a firmware update is available (p.135).
Many other settings are available that let you to
customize the unit. For details, see the following pages.
• Input settings (p.101)
• SCENE settings (p.103)
• Sound program and surround decoder settings
(p.106)
• Various function settings (p.110)
• Information view (such as audio signal and video
signal) (p.129)
• System settings (p.131)
En 8
Useful applications
■ AV CONTROLLER
“AV CONTROLLER” will turn your smartphone/tablet into
a Wi-Fi enabled remote control for your Yamaha network
products. This application provides you the flexibility to
control the available inputs, volume, mute, power
commands and playback source.
Functions
• Power on/off and volume adjustment
• Input, scene and sound mode selection
• DSP Parameter adjustment
• Playback control (including music selection for some
sources)
• For details, search for “AV CONTROLLER” on the App Store or
Google Play.
■ AV SETUP GUIDE (for tablet)
“AV SETUP GUIDE” is an application that assists you
with cable connections between AV receiver and source
devices as well as AV receiver setup. This application
guides you through the various settings such as
speaker connections, TV and video/audio device
connections and selecting the speaker system.
Functions
• Connection guide (speakers, TV and video/audio
devices)
• Setup guide (YPAO settings and various setup
assistance with illustrations)
• Viewing owner’s manual
• For details, search for “AV SETUP GUIDE” on the App Store or
Google Play.
En 9
Front panel
1 MAIN ZONE z key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
2 Standby indicator
Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the
following conditions.
• HDMI Control is enabled (p.120)
• Standby Through is enabled (p.121)
• Network Standby is enabled (p.122)
• Bluetooth Standby is enabled (p.123)
• An iPod is being charged (p.70)
3 Front display
Displays information (p.11).
4 Remote control sensor
Receives remote control signals (p.5).
5 PURE DIRECT key
Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.64).
6 INPUT knob
Selects an input source.
7 Front panel door
For protecting controls and jacks (p.10).
8 VOLUME knob
Adjusts the volume.
Part names and functions
INPUT
MAIN ZONE
VOLUME
PURE DIRECT
52 3 41
6
8
7
Opening the front panel door
• To use controls or jacks behind the front panel door, gently
press the bottom of the door to open it. Keep the door closed
when not using controls or jacks behind the front panel door.
(Be careful not to trap your fingers.)
En 10
■ Inside of the front panel door
9 ON SCREEN key
Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.
0 Menu operations keys
Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.
ENTER Confirms a selected item.
RETURN Returns to the previous screen.
A OPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.97).
B DISPLAY key
Displays status information on the TV (p.96).
C TONE/BALANCE key
Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range
of output sounds (p.98).
Adjusts the left/right channel volume balance for Zone2
(p.91).
D STRAIGHT key
Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.63).
E PROGRAM keys
Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.59).
F SCENE keys
Select the registered input source, sound program, and
various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when
it is in standby mode (p.57).
G MULTI ZONE keys
ZONE 2 Enables/disables the audio output to
Zone2 (p.90).
ZONE CONTROL Changes the zone (main zone or Zone2)
that is controlled by the keys and knobs
on the front panel (p.90).
H INFO (WPS) key
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.96).
Enters the wireless network connection setup (WPS push
button configuration) by holding down for 3 seconds (p.50).
I MEMORY key
Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.66).
Registers USB/network contents as shortcuts (p.92).
J FM and AM keys
Switch between FM and AM (p.65).
K PRESET keys
Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.66).
Selects a USB/network content from shortcuts (p.92).
L TUNING keys
Select the radio frequency (p.65).
M USB jack
For connecting a USB storage device (p.73) or an iPod
(p.70).
N YPAO MIC jack
For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.39).
O PHONES jack
For connecting headphones.
P VIDEO AUX jacks
For connecting a device, such as a camcorder and a game
console (p.33).
OPTION
ON SCREEN
DISPLAY
RETURN
MULTI ZONE
VIDEO AUX
ZONE 2
ZONE CONTROL
YPAO MIC
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
VIDEO
TONE/BALANCE
STRAIGHT
(
CONNECT
)
PROGRAM
SCENE
123 4
HDMI IN
RLAUDIO
INFO(WPS)
MEMORY
FM AM
TUNING
PRESET
ENTER
5V 1A
9 A C D H I KE J LB0
M N O
FG
P
En 11
Front display (indicators)
1 HDMI
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output.
IN
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input.
OUT1/OUT2
Indicates the HDMI OUT jacks currently outputting an HDMI
signal.
2 ECO
Lights up when the unit is in the eco mode (p.128).
3 Signal strength indicator
Indicates the strength of the wireless network signal (p.47).
4 ZONE2
Lights up when Zone2 is enabled (p.90).
5 SLEEP
Lights up when the sleep timer is on.
6 Information display
Displays the current status (such as input name and sound
mode name). You can switch the information by pressing
INFO (p.96).
7 MUTE
Blinks when audio is muted.
8 Volume indicator
Indicates the current volume.
9 VIRTUAL
Lights up when the Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) or Virtual
Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) (p.60), or the virtual
surround processing (p.62) is working.
0 Bluetooth indicator
Lights up when the unit is connecting to a
Bluetooth
device
(p.69).
A ENHANCER
Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.64) is
working.
B CINEMA DSP
Lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.60) is working. “CINEMA
DSP n” lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D (p.60) is activated.
C STEREO
Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal.
TUNED
Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station
signal.
D PA RT Y
Lights up when the unit is in the party mode. (p.91)
E Cursor indicators
Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational.
F ADAPTIVE DRC
Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.98) is working.
G Speaker indicators
Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.
A Front speaker (L)
S Front speaker (R)
D Center speaker
F Surround speaker (L)
G Surround speaker (R)
H Surround back speaker (L)
J Surround back speaker (R)
K Surround back speaker
B Front presence speaker (L)
N Front presence speaker (R)
L Subwoofer
OUT
21 3
IN
VOLUME
MUTE
ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL
3
ZONE
ECO
2
SBL SBRSB
SL
SW
SR
FPL
CL R
FPR
ENHANCER
PARTY
STEREO TUNED
SLEEP
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
987
B
0 EGED
1
6
5423
FCA
En 12
Rear panel
1 PHONO jacks
For connecting to a turntable (p.32).
2 AUDIO 1–3 jacks
For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting
audio signals (p.32).
3 AV 1–4 jacks
For connecting to video/audio playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.30).
4 HDMI OUT 1 jack
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting
video/audio signals (p.28). When using ARC, TV audio signal
can also be input through the HDMI OUT 1 jack.
HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting
video/audio signals (p.30), or for connecting to an
HDMI-compatible device used in Zone2 (p.88).
5 MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
component/composite video jacks
For connecting to a TV that supports component or
composite video and outputting video signals (p.29) or for
connecting to a Zone2 video monitor (p.87).
6 HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks
For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.30).
7 COMPONENT VIDEO (AV 1–3) jacks
For connecting to video playback devices that support
component video and inputting video signals (p.31).
8 TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks
For connecting to devices that support the trigger function
(p.36).
9 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that
allows you to operate the unit and other devices from another
room (p.89).
0 NETWORK jack
For connecting to a network with a network cable (p.35).
A Wireless antenna
For connecting to a network device wirelessly (p.47).
B RS-232C terminal
This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation.
Consult your dealer for details.
C VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(General model only)
Selects the switch position according to your local voltage
(p.36).
D AC IN jack
For connecting the supplied power cable (p.36).
HDMI OUT
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
1
2
HDMI
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
(HDCP2.2)
AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
IN OUT
REMOTE
R
L
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
(2 TV)
(1 BD/DVD)
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
3
COAXIAL COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
1
PHONO
GND
AC IN
FM
75Ω
ANTENNA
(
4 RADIO
)
OPTICAL
1
2
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2
SPEAKERS
CENTER FRONTSURROUND BACKSURROUND
BI–AMP
ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/
R
5
6
L R R RL L L
SINGLE
AM
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
FRONT
SURROUND SUR. BACK
(SINGLE)
EXTRA SP
RS-232C
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
NETWORK
( 3
NET
)
Y
P
B
P
R
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
YP
R
P
B
AV 1
COMPONENT VIDEO
A
AV 3
C
AV 2
B
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
Y
WIRELESS
(HDCP2.2)
1 4 :3 5 D8 9 B762
CA
* The area around the video/audio output jacks is
marked in white on the actual product to
prevent improper connections.
(U.S.A. model)
En 13
E ANTENNA jacks
For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.34).
F ZONE OUT jacks
For connecting to the external amplifier used in Zone2 and
for outputting audio (p.87).
G SPEAKERS terminals
For connecting to speakers (p.16).
H PRE OUT jacks
For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.20) or
to an external power amplifier (p.26).
HDMI OUT
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
1
2
HDMI
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
(HDCP2.2)
AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
IN OUT
REMOTE
R
L
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
(2 TV)
(1 BD/DVD)
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
3
COAXIAL COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
1
PHONO
GND
AC IN
FM
75Ω
ANTENNA
(
4 RADIO
)
OPTICAL
1
2
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2
SPEAKERS
CENTER FRONTSURROUND BACKSURROUND
BI–AMP
ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/
R
5
6
L R R RL L L
SINGLE
AM
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
FRONT
SURROUND SUR. BACK
(SINGLE)
EXTRA SP
RS-232C
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
NETWORK
( 3
NET
)
Y
P
B
P
R
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
YP
R
P
B
AV 1
COMPONENT VIDEO
A
AV 3
C
AV 2
B
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
Y
WIRELESS
(HDCP2.2)
GE HF
* The area around the video/audio output jacks is
marked in white on the actual product to
prevent improper connections.
(U.S.A. model)
En 14
Remote control
1 Remote control signal transmitter
Transmits infrared signals.
2 z (receiver power) key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
3 Input selection keys
Select an input source for playback.
AV 1–7 AV 1–7 jacks
V-AUX VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)
AUDIO 1–3 AUDIO 1–3 jacks
PHONO PHONO jacks
TUNER FM/AM radio
BLUETOOTH
Bluetooth
connection
(the unit as a
Bluetooth
receiver)
USB USB jack (on the front panel)
NET NETWORK sources (press repeatedly to select
a desired network source)
4 MAIN/ZONE2 switch
Changes the zone (main zone or Zone2) that is controlled by
the remote control (p.90).
5 SCENE keys
Select the registered input source, sound program, and
various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when
it is in standby mode (p.57).
6 PROGRAM keys
Select a sound program (p.59).
7 External device operation keys
Displays menus for the HDMI Control-compatible playback
device (p.152).
8 ON SCREEN key
Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.
9 Menu operation keys
Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.
ENTER Confirms a selected item.
RETURN Returns to the previous screen.
0 MODE key
Switches the iPod operation modes (p.72).
A Radio keys
Operate the FM/AM radio when “TUNER” is selected as the
input source (p.65).
BAND Switches between FM and AM radio.
PRESET Select a preset station.
TUNING Select the radio frequency.
External device operation keys
Let you perform playback operations when “USB” or “NET” is
selected as the input source, or control playback of the
HDMI Control-compatible playback device (p.152).
B Sound mode keys
Select a sound mode (p.59).
C INFO key
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.96).
D SLEEP key
Switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a
specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press
repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off).
E Numeric keys
Let you enter numerical values, such as radio frequencies.
MEMORY key
Registers FM/AM radio stations as presets (p.66).
F HDMI OUT key
Selects HDMI OUT jacks to be used for video/audio output
(p.56).
G PA RT Y k e y
Turns on/off the party mode (p.91).
H VOLUME keys
Adjust the volume.
I MUTE key
Mutes the audio output.
J OPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.97).
K DISPLAY key
Displays status information on the TV (p.96).
• (China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only)
For information on the keys other than those above, refer to
“Supplement for Remote Control” on the supplied CD-ROM.
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
6 87
123 4
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
123 4
123
PHONO
SUR. DECODE
USB
NET
G
I
F
J
K
1
3
2
5
4
6
H
7
E
D
8
A
B
:
C
9
(U.S.A. model)
En 15
PREPARATIONS
This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit!
General setup procedure
1 Connecting speakers (p.16)
Basic speaker configuration (p.17)
Select the speaker layout and connect the speakers to the unit.
Advanced speaker configuration (p.22)
Apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone
configurations to enhance the system.
2 Connecting a TV (p.28)
Connect a TV to the unit.
3 Connecting playback devices (p.30)
Connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players) and audio devices (such as CD players) to the unit.
4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas (p.34)
Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.
5
Connecting a network cable or preparing
the wireless antenna (p.35)
Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or prepare the wireless antenna for
establishing a wireless network connection.
6 Connecting other devices (p.36)
Connect external devices such as devices compatible with the trigger function.
7 Connecting the power cable (p.36)
After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.
8
Selecting an on-screen menu language (p.37)
Select the desired on-screen menu language (default: English).
9
Configuring the necessary speaker settings
(p.38)
According to your speaker configuration, you need to configure some speaker settings manually before
performing YPAO.
10
Optimizing the speaker settings
automatically (YPAO) (p.39)
Optimize the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room
(YPAO).
11
Connecting to a network device wirelessly
(p.47)
Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a wireless connection.
En 16
The unit has 7 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 9 speakers and up to 2 subwoofers to create the favorite acoustic space in your room.
You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system (p.22).
Functions of each speaker
• We recommend using front presence speakers to have a full effect of the 3-dimensional sound fields.
However, the unit creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to
produce 3-dimensional sound fields even when no front presence speakers are connected (p.60).
• Use “Ideal speaker layout” (diagram on the right) as reference. You do not need to exactly adjust the
speaker layout to this diagram since the YPAO function of the unit will automatically optimize the speaker
settings (such as distances) to suit the speaker layout.
• When using only one surround back speaker, place it straight behind the listening position (middle of “SBL”
and “SBR” in the diagram).
Ideal speaker layout
1 Connecting speakers
Caution
• Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6 MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.20).
Speaker type Abbr. Function
Front (L) 1
Produce front left/right channel sounds (stereo sounds).
Front (R) 2
Center 3 Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogues and vocals).
Surround (L) 4 Produce surround left/right channel sounds. Surround speakers also
produce surround back channel sounds when no surround back
speakers are connected.
Surround (R) 5
Surround
back (L)
6
Produce surround back left/right channel sounds.
Surround
back (R)
7
Front
presence (L)
E
Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds. In combination with CINEMA DSP
3D (p.60), the front presence speakers create a natural 3-dimensional
sound field in your room.
Front
presence (R)
R
Subwoofer 9
Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces
bass parts of other channels.
This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect 2 subwoofers to the
unit and place them on the left/right (or front/rear) sides of the room.
E
12
3
9
4
67
5
9
R
0.3 m (1 ft) or more
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)
10°~30°10°~30°
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 17
Basic speaker configuration
■ Placing speakers in your room
Depending on the number of speakers, place the speakers and subwoofer in your
room. This section describes the representative speaker layout examples.
• To play back Dolby Atmos contents, apply a speaker system with a ★ mark.
• (About the number of channels) For example, “5.1.2” denotes “standard 5.1-channel plus 2 for overhead
speaker channels”. For details on how to place overhead speakers (presence speakers), see “Presence
speaker layout” (p.19).
❑ 7.1+2-channel system [★5.1.2]
(using both surround back and front presence speakers)
This speaker system brings out the full performance of the unit and allows you to enjoy
a highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field with any contents.
• The surround back speakers and front presence speakers do not produce sounds simultaneously. The unit
automatically changes the speakers to be used, depending on the selected CINEMA DSP (p.60).
❑ 7.1-channel system [★5.1.2] (using front presence speakers)
This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural
3-dimensional sound field, and also creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS)
using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. This
system is suited for enjoying not only 5.1-channel but also for 7.1-channel contents.
❑ 7.1-channel system [★7.1.0] (using surround back speakers)
This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and
surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to
enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 18
❑ 5.1-channel system
This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and
surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also creates Virtual
Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to
the rear sound field. This system is suited for enjoying not only 5.1-channel but also for
7.1-channel contents.
❑ Front 5.1-channel system (using surround speakers)
Even when surround speakers are placed in the front side, the unit creates the virtual
surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound (Virtual
CINEMA FRONT) when “Layout (Surround)” (p.115) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”.
• You can enjoy surround sound even without the center speaker (front 4.1-channel system).
❑ Front 5.1-channel system (using front presence speakers)
This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural
3-dimensional sound field, and creates the virtual surround speakers using the front
speakers to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA DSP).
❑ 2.1-channel system
Even when no surround speakers are connected, the unit creates the virtual surround
speakers using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound
(Virtual CINEMA DSP).
• Add the center speaker to configure a 3.1-channel system.
45
12
39
1
2
39
ER
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 19
❑ Presence speaker layout
The unit provides three layout patterns for presence speakers (Front Height, Overhead
and Dolby Enabled SP). Choose a layout pattern that suits your listening environment.
• You can enjoy Dolby Atmos or Cinema DSP 3D with any layout pattern.
Front Height
Install the presence speakers on the front side wall.
It delivers a natural sound field with excellent linkage of left, right, top and bottom
sound spaces, and sound extensity effectively.
Overhead
Install the presence speakers to the ceiling above the listening position.
It delivers realistic overhead sound effects and sound field with excellent linkage of
front and rear sound spaces effectively.
• For details on the installation position of ceiling speakers, see “Notes on installation of ceiling speakers”
(p.19).
Dolby Enabled SP
Use the Dolby Enabled speakers as the presence speakers.
It utilizes sounds reflected from ceiling and lets you enjoy overhead sounds only from
speakers that are placed at the same level as traditional speakers.
• Place the Dolby Enabled speakers on top of or near the traditional front speakers. A Dolby Enabled
speaker unit may be integrated into a traditional speaker. For details, refer to the instruction manual of the
Dolby Enabled speakers.
Notes on installation of ceiling speakers
When installing presence speakers to a ceiling, install them just above the listening
position, or the ceiling between the extensions of the front speakers and listening
position.
SBR
SBL
SL
SRFPR
FPL
FR
FL
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 20
■ Setting the speaker impedance
Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When using a
6-ohm speaker for any channel, set the speaker impedance to “6 MIN”. In this case,
you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
1
Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall
outlet.
2
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press
MAIN ZONE z.
3
Check that “SPEAKER IMP.” is displayed on the front display.
4
Press STRAIGHT to select “6 MIN”.
5
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and remove the
power cable from the AC wall outlet.
You are now ready to connect the speakers.
■ Connecting speakers
Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit.
Speakers to be connected
If you have seven speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers (*1) or front
presence speakers (*2).
If you have five speakers, use two of them as surround speakers (*3) or front presence
speakers (*4).
• You can also connect up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit.
• To use an external power amplifier (Hi-Fi amplifier, etc.) to enhance speaker output, see “Connecting an
external power amplifier” (p.26).
Caution
• Be sure to use speakers that are made for ceiling use and take anti-drop measures. Ask a qualified
contractor or dealer personnel for installation works.
MAIN ZONE z STRAIGHT
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
ENHANCER
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡8¬MIN
¡SPEAKER¡IMP.
Caution
• Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn off the subwoofer before connecting the
speakers.
• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the
unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit,
“Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.
Room Speaker type Abbr.
Speaker system
(the number of channels)
Power Amp
Assign
(p.113)
7+2 7 5 2
Main zone
Front (L) 1 ●●●●
Basic (default)
Front (R) 2 ●●●●
Center 3 ●●●
Surround (L) 4 ●●*3
Surround (R) 5 ●●*3
Surround
back (L)
6 ● *1
Surround
back (R)
7 ● *1
Front
presence (L)
E ● *2 *4
Front
presence (R)
R ● *2 *4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 21
Cables necessary for connection (commercially available)
Speaker cables (x the number of speakers)
Audio pin cable (two for connecting two subwoofers)
Connection diagram
Refer to the following diagram and connect the speakers to the unit.
• When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side).
❑ Connecting speaker cables
Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting the negative (-) terminal of the
unit and the speaker, and the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are
colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to the negative and the other wire
to the positive terminal.
a Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the ends of the speaker cable, and
twist the bare wires of the cable firmly together.
b Loosen the speaker terminal.
c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side (upper right or bottom left) of the
terminal.
d Tighten the terminal.
Using a banana plug
(U.S.A., Canada, China, Australia and General models only)
a Tighten the speaker terminal.
b Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal.
❑ Connecting the subwoofer (with built-in amplifier)
Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer.
–
+
–
+
1
2
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2
SPEAKERS
CENTER FRONTSURROUND BACKSURROUND
BI–AMP
ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/
R L R R RL L L
SINGLE
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
FRONT
SURROUND SUR. BACK
(SINGLE)
EXTRA SP
1
67
2
3
45
9
9
ER
The unit (rear)
FRONT
-
+
aa
b
d
c
+ (red)
– (black)
FRONT
+
a
b
Banana plug
(
SINGLE
)
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
CENTER
SUR. BACKSURRUND
1
2
SURROUND BACK
Audio pin cable
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 22
Advanced speaker configuration
In addition to the basic speaker configuration (p.17), the unit also allows you to apply the following speaker configurations to enhance your system.
Using the four internal
amplifiers for front speakers to
have more high-quality sounds
(Example) (Example) (Example)
Bi-amp
connection
Combining with an external
power amplifier (Hi-Fi
amplifier, etc.) to build an
extended system
Using the excess internal
amplifiers for stereo speakers
in another room
External power
amplifier
Main zone
Zone2
Bi-amp connection Power-amp channel expansion Multi-zone configuration
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 23
■ Available speaker configurations
• When applying one of these configurations, you need to configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting in the
“Setup” menu (p.38).
❑ 5ch BI-AMP
Main zone
Multi-zone
Power Amp Assign
(p.113)
Page
Output
channel
(max)
Bi-amp
External
power
amplifier
(required)
5 5ch BI-AMP 23
7
Surround
back
5ch BI-AMP +SB 24
7 +1 (Zone2) 7ch +1ZONE 24
1
3
45
99
2
Bi-amp
Speaker Connect to
12 FRONT and EXTRA SP (bi-amp connection)
3 CENTER
45 SURROUND
67 (not used)
ER (not used)
9 SUBWOOFER 1–2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 24
❑ 5ch BI-AMP +SB ❑ 7ch +1ZONE
1
3
45
6
99
7
2
Bi-amp
via external amp
Speaker Connect to
12 FRONT and EXTRA SP (bi-amp connection)
3 CENTER
45 SURROUND
67 SUR.BACK (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier
ER (not used)
9 SUBWOOFER 1–2
21
12
3
4
6
99
7
5
Main zone
Zone2
• When Zone2 output is enabled (p.90), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound.
Speaker Connect to
12 FRONT
3 CENTER
45 SURROUND
67 SURROUND BACK
ER (not used)
9 SUBWOOFER 1–2
Zone2 speakers EXTRA SP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 25
■
Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections
When using front speakers that support bi-amp connections, connect them to the
FRONT terminals and EXTRA SP terminals.
To enable the bi-amp function, configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting in the “Setup”
menu after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet (p.38).
• The FRONT terminals and EXTRA SP terminals output the same signals.
■ Connecting Zone2 speakers
When using Zone2 speakers, connect them to the EXTRA SP terminals.
To utilize the EXTRA SP terminals for Zone2 speakers, configure the “Power Amp
Assign” setting in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC wall
outlet (p.38).
• You can also connect Zone2 speakers using an external amplifier (p.87).
Caution
• Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a
tweeter. Refer to the instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not making bi-amp
connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker
cables.
SPEAKERS
CENTER FRONTSURROUND BACKSURROUND
BI–AMP
ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/
R L R R RL L L
SINGLE
EXTRA SP
12
3
9
45
9
The unit (rear)
SPEAKERS
CENTER FRONTSURROUND BACKSURROUND
BI–AMP
ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/
R L R R RL L L
SINGLE
EXTRA SP
12
3
45
76
99
The unit (rear)
Main zone
Zone2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 26
■ Connecting an external power amplifier
When connecting an external power amplifier to enhance speaker output, connect the
input jacks of the power amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit. The same channel
signals are output from the PRE OUT jacks as from their corresponding SPEAKERS
terminals.
1 FRONT jacks
Output front channel sounds.
2 SURROUND jacks
Output surround channel sounds.
3 SUR. BACK jacks
Output surround back channel sounds. When using only one surround back speaker, connect
the external amplifier to the SINGLE jack (L side).
4 CENTER jack
Outputs center channel sounds.
(Example)
Connecting front speakers via an external power amplifier
About external power amplifiers
We recommend using power amplifiers that meet the following conditions.
• With unbalanced inputs
• With volume control bypass (or without volume control circuit)
• Output power: 100 W or more (6 to 8 )
Caution
• To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure the followings before making
connections.
– Remove the power cable of the unit and turn off the external power amplifier before connecting them.
– When using the PRE OUT jacks, do not connect speakers to the corresponding SPEAKERS
terminals.
– When using a pre-main amplifier that does not have the volume control bypass, turn up the volume of
the pre-main amplifier enough and fix it. In this case, do not connect other devices (except the unit) to
the pre-main amplifier.
HDMI
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
(HDCP2.2)
AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
IN OUT
REMOTE
AC IN
1
2
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2
SPEAKERS
CENTER FRONTSURROUND BACKSURROUND
BI–AMP
ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/
R L R R RL L L
SINGLE
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
FRONT
SURROUND SUR. BACK
(SINGLE)
EXTRA SP
RS-232C
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
NETWORK
( 3
NET
)
Y
P
B PR
PRPB
Y
P
RPB
YPRPB
AV 1
COMPONENT VIDEO
A
AV 3
C
AV 2
B
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
Y
WIRELESS
1 2 34
The unit (rear)
HDMI
V
2 AV 3 AV 4
(HDCP2.2)
AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
IN OUT
REMOTE
1
2
SPEAKERS
CENTER FRONTSURROUND BACK
R
OUND
BI–AMP
ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/
L R R RL L L
SINGLE
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
FRONT
SURROUND SUR. BACK
(SINGLE)
EXTRA SP
RS-232C
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
NETWORK
( 3
NET
)
Y
P
B PR
PRPB
Y
P
RPB
YPRPB
AV 1
COMPONENT VIDEO
A
AV 3
C
AV 2
B
R
OUT/
O
UT
Y
WIRELESS
MAIN IN
PR
SU
R
FRONT
L
R
L
R
The unit (rear)
PRE OUT (FRONT) jacks
Main input jack
Amplifier with
volume control
bypass
(such as A-S3000)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 27
■ Video/audio jacks
❑ HDMI jacks
Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single
jack. Use an HDMI cable.
• Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using
a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality
degradation.
• The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return
Channel (ARC), and 3D and 4K Ultra HD video transmission
features.
• Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K Ultra HD videos.
■ Video jacks
❑ COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
Transmit video signals separated into three
components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (P
B),
and chrominance red (P
R). Use a component video
cable with three plugs.
❑ VIDEO jacks
Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable.
■ Audio jacks
❑ OPTICAL jacks
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical
cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before
using the cable.
❑ COAXIAL jacks
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial
cable.
❑ AUDIO jacks
Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin
cable (RCA cable).
Input/output jacks and cables
AV 1
HDMI cable
Y
P
R
P
B
AV 1
A
Component video cable
AV 1
Video pin cable
Digital optical cable
Digital coaxial cable
Stereo pin cable
En 28
Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV.
You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit.
To maximize the performance of the unit, we recommend connecting a TV with an HDMI
cable.
■ HDMI connection
Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an audio cable (digital optical or
stereo pin cable).
• You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.30).
• You do not make an audio cable connection between the TV and the unit in the following cases:
– If your TV supports Audio Return Channel (ARC)
– If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box
• If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s
power and volume with the TV’s remote control.
To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the HDMI settings on the unit. For
details on the settings, see “Information on HDMI” (p.152).
■ Component/composite video connection
When connecting any video device with a component video cable, connect the TV to
the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks.
When connecting any video device with a video pin cable, connect the TV to the
MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack.
• If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be
output to the TV.
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.
• If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box, you do not need to make an audio cable
connection between the TV and the unit.
2 Connecting a TV
HDMI OUT
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
1
2
HD
M
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3
R
L
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
(2 TV)
(1 BD/DVD)
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
3
COAXIAL COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
1
PHONO
GND
FM
75Ω
ANTENNA
(
4 RADIO
)
OPTICAL
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2
SURROUND
R
5
6
L R
AM
PRE OUT
FRONT
SURROUND S
U
(
S
Y
P
B
PB
AV 1
A
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
Y
(HDCP2.2)
HDMI
OPTICAL
AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
1
AUDIO
OPTICAL
R
L
HDMI OUT
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
(HDCP2.2)
12
HDMI
HDMI
O O
L
R
L
R
The unit (rear)
HDMI OUT jack
AUDIO 1
(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks
Audio output
(digital optical or analog stereo)
TV
HDMI input
About Audio Return Channel (ARC)
• ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways. If you connect a TV that supports ARC to the unit with a
single HDMI cable, you can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit.
• When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 29
❑ COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component video cable)
❑ VIDEO (composite video) connection (with a video pin cable)
HDMI OUT
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
1
2
HDMI
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
(HDCP2.2)
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
(2 TV)
(1 BD/DVD)
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
3
COAXIAL COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
1
H
ONO
GND
FM
75Ω
ANTENNA
(
4 RADIO
)
OPTICAL
1
2
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2
SURROUND BACKSURROUND
R
5
6
L R
SIN
G
AM
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
SURROUND SUR. BACK
(SINGLE)
Y
P
B PR
PRPB
Y
Y
AV 1
COM
A
A
V
C
A
V
B
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
Y
(HDCP2.2)
OPTICAL
AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
1
AUDIO
OPTICAL
R
L
YPB PR
COMPONENT VIDEO
PB PR
Y
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
O O
L
R
L
R
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
The unit (rear)
MONITOR OUT
(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks
Video input
(component video)
AUDIO 1
(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks
Audio output
(digital optical or analog stereo)
TV
HDMI OUT
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
1
2
HDMI
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV
4
(HDCP
2
R
L
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
(2 TV)
(1 BD/DVD)
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
3
COAXIAL COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
1
PHONO
GND
FM
75Ω
ANTENNA
(
4 RADIO
)
OPTICAL
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2
SURRO
U
SURROUND
R
5
6
L R
AM
PRE OUT
FRONT
SURROUND SUR. BACK
(SINGLE)
Y
P
B PR
PRPB
AV 1
A
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
Y
(HDCP2.2)
OPTICAL
AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
1
AUDIO
OPTICAL
R
L
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
OO
L
R
L
R
V
V
The unit (rear)
MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack
Video input (composite video)
AUDIO 1
(OPTICAL or AUDIO)
jacks
Audio output
(digital optical or analog stereo)
TV
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 30
■ Connecting another TV or a projector
The unit has two HDMI output jacks. If you connect another TV or a projector to the unit
with an HDMI cable, you can switch the TV (or projector) to be used for watching
videos with the remote control (p.56).
• HDMI Control is not available on the HDMI OUT 2 jack.
• If you set “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.125) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2”, you can connect a video monitor for
Zone2 to the HDMI OUT 2 jack and enjoy videos and audio using the video monitor (p.88).
The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow
you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect
an iPod or a USB storage device, see the following pages.
• Connecting an iPod (p.70)
• Connecting a USB storage device (p.73)
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)
Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game
consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video
device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI
connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack.
• Videos input to the unit via HDMI cannot be output to a TV connected to the unit with a cable other than
HDMI. For details, refer to “Video signal flow” (p.151).
• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment”
setting (p.126) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COMPONENT VIDEO (A , B , C ),
COAXIAL (c, d, e) and OPTICAL (a, b, f) jacks to another input source.
• If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit
will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.100) in the “Option” menu.
■ HDMI connection
Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable.
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–7 on the remote control, the video/audio
played back on the video device will be output from the unit.
HDMI OUT
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
1
2
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 1 AV 2
R
L
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
(2 TV)
(1 BD/DVD)
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
3
COAXIAL COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
1
PHONO
GND
FM
75Ω
ANTENNA
(
4 RADIO
)
OPTICAL
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2
SURROUND
R
5
6
L
AM
FRONT
Y
AV
A
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
Y
(HDCP2.2)
HDMI
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
12
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
HDMI
HDMI
The unit
(rear)
HDMI OUT 2 jack
HDMI input
Projector
TV (already connected)
TV
3 Connecting playback devices
I OUT
ARC
1
HDMI
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
(HDCP2.2)
AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
IN OUT
REMOTE
AV 3 AV 4
OPTICAL
1
2
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2
SPEAKERS
CENTERSURROUND BACKSURROUND
BI–AMP
ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/
R
6
L R RL L
SINGLE
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
FRONT
SURROUND SUR. BACK
(SINGLE)
EXTRA SP
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
N
Y
P
B PR
PRPB
Y
P
RPB
YPRPB
AV 1
COMPONENT VIDEO
A
AV 3
C
AV 2
B
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
Y
C
P2.2)
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
The unit (rear)
HDMI output
Video device
HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 31
■ Component video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable
(digital coaxial, digital optical or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the
unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–3 on the remote control, the video/audio
played back on the video device will be output from the unit.
■ Composite video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital
coaxial, digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit)
depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio
played back on the video device will be output from the unit.
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Video Audio
Component video
Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL)
Digital optical AV 3 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL)
Analog stereo AV 1–3 (COMPONENT VIDEO + AUDIO)
HDMI OUT
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
1
2
HDMI
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
(HDCP2.2)
AV 5 AV 6
R
L
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
(2 TV)
(1 BD/DVD)
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
3
COAXIAL COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
1
PHONO
GND
FM
75Ω
ANTENNA
(
4 RADIO
)
OPTICAL
1
2
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2
SPEAKERS
SURROUND BACKSURROUND
BI–AMP
ZONE 2/F.PRESE
N
R
5
6
L R RL
SINGLE
AM
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
FRONT
SURROUND SUR. BACK
(SINGLE)
EXTRA SP
TRIGG
E
OU
T
1
2
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
Y
P
B PR
PRPB
Y
P
RPB
YPRPB
AV 1
COMPONENT VIDEO
A
AV 3
C
AV 2
B
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
Y
(HDCP2.2)
YP
B
P
R
YP
B
P
R
R
L
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
L
R
L
R
C C
OO
P
R
P
B
Y
Y
P
B
PR
The unit (rear)
AV 1–3
(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks
Video output
(component video)
Video device
Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)
Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL),
AV 3 (OPTICAL),
AV 1–3 (AUDIO) jacks
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Video Audio
Composite video
Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (VIDEO + COAXIAL)
Digital optical AV 3 (VIDEO + OPTICAL)
Analog stereo AV 1–4 (VIDEO + AUDIO)
HDMI OUT
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
1
2
(1 BD/DV
D
AV 1
R
L
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
(2 TV)
(1 BD/DVD)
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
3
COAXIAL COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
1
PHONO
GND
FM
75Ω
ANTENNA
(
4 RADIO
)
OPTICAL
ZON
E
ZONE 2
R
5
6
AM
(HDCP2.2)
R
L
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
VIDEO
V
V
L
R
L
R
C C
OO
The unit (rear)
AV 1–4 (VIDEO) jacks
Video output
(composite video)
Video device
Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)
Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL),
AV 3 (OPTICAL),
AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 32
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players)
Connect audio devices such as CD players, MD players, and a turntable to the unit.
Depending on the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the
following connections.
• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment”
setting (p.126) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COAXIAL (c, d, e) and OPTICAL
(a, b, f) jacks to another input source.
• If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit
will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.100) in the “Option” menu.
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–3 or PHONO on the remote
control, the audio played back on the audio device will be output from the unit.
Audio output jacks on audio device Audio output jacks on the unit
Digital coaxial
AV 1–2 (COAXIAL)
AUDIO 3 (COAXIAL)
Digital optical
AV 3 (OPTICAL)
AUDIO 1–2 (OPTICAL)
Analog stereo
AV 1–4 (AUDIO)
AUDIO 1–3 (AUDIO)
Turntable (PHONO) PHONO
When connecting a turntable
• The PHONO jack of the unit is compatible with an MM cartridge. To connect a turntable with a
low-output MC cartridge, use a boosting transformer.
• Connecting the turntable to the GND terminal of the unit may reduce noise in the signal.
HDMI OUT
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
1
2
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 1 AV 2
R
L
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
(2 TV)
(1 BD/DVD)
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
3
COAXIAL COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
1
PHONO
GND
FM
75Ω
ANTENNA
(
4 RADIO
)
OPTICAL
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2
SURROUND
R
5
6
L
AM
FRONT
Y
A
V
A
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
Y
(HDCP2.2)
R
L
PHONO
GND
R
L
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
R
L
PHONO
GND
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
C C
OO
Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)
Any of AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–3
(COAXIAL, OPTICAL, AUDIO) jacks
The unit
(rear)
Audio device
PHONO jacks
Audio output
(PHONO)
Turntable
Ground lead
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 33
Connecting to the jacks on the front panel
Use the VIDEO AUX jack to temporarily connect a playback device to the unit.
Use the USB jack to connect an iPod or a USB storage device. For details, see
“Connecting an iPod” (p.70) or “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.73).
Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on the unit.
❑ HDMI connection
Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the
unit with an HDMI cable.
If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX on the remote control, the
video/audio played back on the device will be output from the unit.
• To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT
jack of the unit (p.28).
• You need to prepare an HDMI cable that matches the output jacks on your device.
• The VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack does not support HDCP 2.2.
❑ Composite video/analog stereo connection
Connect a playback device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the unit with a
video pin cable and a stereo pin cable.
If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played
back on the device will be output from the unit.
• If you connect video devices to both the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack and VIDEO AUX (VIDEO/AUDIO)
jacks, the unit outputs video/audio input through the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack.
DISPLAY
RETURN
MULTI ZONE
VIDEO AUX
ZONE 2
ZONE CONTROL
YPAO MIC
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
VIDEO
(
CONNECT
)
PROGRAM
HDMI IN
RLAUDIO
FM AM
TUNING
ENTER
5V 1A
HDMI
Game console
Camcorder
The unit (front)
DISPLAY
RETURN
MULTI ZONE
VIDEO AUX
ZONE 2
ZONE CONTROL
YPAO MIC
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
VIDEO
(
CONNECT
)
PROGRAM
HDMI IN
RLAUDIO
FM AM
TUNING
ENTER
5V 1A
V RL
Game console
Camcorder
The unit (front)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 34
Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.
Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface.
Assembling the AM antenna
Connecting the AM antenna
• Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit.
• The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.
4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas
HDMI OUT
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
1
2
HDMI
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
(HDCP2.2)
AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
IN
R
E
R
L
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
(2 TV)
(1 BD/DVD)
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
3
COAXIAL COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
1
PHONO
GND
FM
75Ω
ANTENNA
(
4 RADIO
)
OPTICAL
1
2
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2
SPEAKERS
SURROUND BACKSURROUND
BI–AMP
ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/
R
5
6
L R RL L
SINGLE
AM
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
FRONT
SURROUND SUR. BACK
(SINGLE)
EXTRA SP
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
Y
P
B PR
PRPB
Y
P
RPB
YPRPB
AV 1
COMPONENT VIDEO
A
AV 3
C
AV 2
B
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
Y
(HDCP2.2)
FM antenna
AM antenna
The unit (rear)
Hold down Insert Release
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 35
Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or prepare the wireless
antenna for establishing a wireless network connection.
You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and
Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit.
Connecting the network cable
Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5
or higher straight cable).
• If you want to use a wired (network cable) connection when a wireless connection has been made, set
“Network Connection” (p.121) in the “Setup” menu to “Wired”.
• If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit,
as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to
configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network
parameters manually (p.121).
• You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in
“Network” (p.130) in the “Information” menu.
• Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router)
may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the
security software or firewall settings appropriately.
• Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit.
• To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended.
Preparing the wireless antenna
If you want to establish a wireless network connection, stand the wireless antenna up
straight.
For information on how to connect the unit to a network device wirelessly, see
“Connecting to a network device wirelessly” (p.47).
• Do not apply excessive force on the antenna. Doing so may damage it.
5 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna
AV 6 AV 7
IN OUT
REMOTE
AC IN
RS-232C
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
NETWORK
( 3
NET
)
PR
WIRELESS
LAN
WAN
Network Attached Storage
(NAS)
Internet
Modem
Router
Network cable
PC
The unit (rear)
Mobile device
(such as iPod touch
and iPhone)
WIRELESS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 36
Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function
The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operating the
unit (such as powering on/off and input selection). If you have a Yamaha subwoofer that
supports a system connection or a device with a trigger input jack, you can use the
trigger function by connecting the external device to one of the TRIGGER OUT jacks
with a monaural mini-plug cable.
• You can configure the trigger function settings in “Trigger Output1” and “Trigger Output2” (p.127) in the
“Setup” menu.
After all the connections are complete, connect the supplied power cable to the unit
and then to an AC wall outlet.
6 Connecting other devices
HDMI
3
AV 4
(HDCP2.2)
AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
IN OUT
REMOTE
1
2
SPEAKERS
CENTER FRONTSURROUND BACK
BI–AMP
ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/
R R RL L L
SINGLE
E
OUT
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
R
OUND SUR. BACK
(SINGLE)
EXTRA SP
RS-232C
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
NETWORK
( 3
NET
)
P
B PR
PRPB
Y
P
RPB
YPRPB
COMPONENT VIDEO
AV 3
C
AV 2
B
WIRE
L
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
The unit (rear)
TRIGGER OUT
1–2 jacks
System connector
jack
Yamaha subwoofer that
supports a system connection
7 Connecting the power cable
Before connecting the power cable (General model only)
Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage.
Voltages are AC 110–120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz.
• Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC
wall outlet. Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a
potential fire hazard.
AV 7
IN OUT
REMOTE
AC IN
CENTER FRONT
CE/
RL L
RS-232C
ER
NETWORK
( 3
NET
)
WIRELESS
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
220V-
240V
110V-
120V
The unit (rear)
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
OUT
OTE
AC IN
CENTER FRONT
R L
RS-232C
NETWORK
( 3
NET
)
WIRELESS
To an AC wall outlet
The unit (rear)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 37
Select the desired on-screen menu language from English
(default), Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and
Chinese.
1
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
• If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network
setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.
3
Press ON SCREEN.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press
ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Language” and
the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired
language.
6
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
7
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
• The information on the front display is provided in English only.
8 Selecting an on-screen menu language
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
123
PHONO
SUR. DECODE
USB
NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
T
U
NER
BL
U
ET
OO
T
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE
2
M
O
D
E
SCEN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
AV
AUDIO
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
PH
ON
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
USB
NET
ON SCREEN
ENTER
RETURN
z
Cursor keys
En 38
If you use any of the following speaker configurations, follow the
procedure below to configure the corresponding speaker settings
manually before performing YPAO.
• Advanced speaker configuration (p.22)
• Using the surround speakers for front 5.1-channel system (Virtual
CINEMA FRONT) (p.18)
• Using the presence speakers for Dolby Atmos playback (p.19)
1
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
• If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network
setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.
3
Press ON SCREEN.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press
ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select “Speaker”
and then “Manual Setup”.
6
Configure the corresponding speaker settings.
When using any of advanced speaker configurations
a Use the cursor keys to select “Power Amp Assign” (p.113) and
press ENTER.
b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select your speaker system and
press ENTER.
When using the surround speakers for front 5.1-channel
system (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)
a Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select “Configuration”
“Layout” “Surround” (p.114).
b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Front” and press ENTER.
When using the presence speakers for Dolby Atmos
playback
a Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select “Configuration”
“Layout” “Front Presence” (p.114).
b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select your front presence
speaker layout and press ENTER.
7
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
9 Configuring the necessary speaker settings
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
123
PHONO
SUR. DECODE
USB
NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
T
U
NER
BL
U
ET
OO
T
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE
2
M
O
D
E
SCEN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
AV
AUDIO
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
PH
ON
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
USB
NET
ON SCREEN
ENTER
RETURN
z
Cursor keys
En 39
The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function
detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to
your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the
speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic
parameters, to suit your room.
• The YPAO function of the unit adopts the YPAO-R.S.C. (Reflected Sound Control)
technology that enables to create natural sound fields like a room specifically
designed for acoustic perfection.
• Note the following regarding YPAO measurement.
– Test tones are output at high volume and may surprise or frighten small children.
– Test tone volume cannot be adjusted.
– Keep the room as quiet as possible.
– Stay in a corner of the room behind the listening position so that you do not
become an obstacle between speakers and the YPAO microphone.
– Do not connect headphones.
1
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
• If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network
setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.
3
Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If
the crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to
maximum.
4
Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position
and connect it to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel.
• Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your
ears). We recommend the use of a tripod as a microphone stand. You can
use the tripod screws to stabilize the microphone.
10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
VOLUME HIGH CUT
CROSSOVER/
MIN MAXMIN MAX
9
YPAO MIC
9
12
3
45
The unit (front)
YPAO
microphone
Ear height
YPAO MIC
jack
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
123
PHONO
SUR. DECODE
USB
NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
ENTE
R
ON
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
BL
U
ET
OO
T
H
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
PH
ON
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
USB
NET
RETURN
z
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 40
The following screen appears on the TV.
• To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting
the measurement.
5
If desired, change the measuring method
(multi/single).
a Use the cursor keys to select “Multi Position” and press ENTER.
b Use the cursor keys to select a setting and then press ENTER.
Settings
• If you perform the multi measure, the speaker settings will be optimized for you to
enjoy surround sound in a wider space.
• If you perform the multi measure, first place the YPAO microphone at the listening
position you will be seated most frequently.
This completes the preparations. See the following page to start the
measurement.
When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”:
“Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure)” (p.42)
When “Multi Position” is set to “No”:
“Measuring at one listening position (single measure)” (p.41)
Yes
Select this option if you will have several listening
positions or if you want others to enjoy surround sound.
You can take measurements at up to 8 different positions
in the room. The speaker settings will be optimized to suit
the area defined by those positions (multi measure).
No (default)
Select this option if your listening position will always be
fixed. Take the measurements at only one position. The
speaker settings will be optimized to suit that position
(single measure).
a b
a
a
b
c
d
e
c
d
de
bac
Multi measure
(5 listening positions)
Multi measure
(2 listening positions + front/back)
Multi measure
(1 listening position + front/back/left/right)
Single measure
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
123
PHONO
SUR. DECODE
USB
NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
ON
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
BL
U
ET
OO
T
H
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
PH
ON
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
USB
NET
ENTER
Cursor keys
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 41
Measuring at one listening position
(single measure)
When “Multi Position” is set to “No”, follow the procedure below for
measurement. It takes about 3 minutes to perform the
measurement.
1
To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Measure” and press ENTER.
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER
again to start the measurement immediately.
• To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.
The following screen appears on the TV when the
measurement finishes.
• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1)
appears, see “Error messages” (p.45) or “Warning messages” (p.46).
• To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see
“Checking the measurement results” (p.44).
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and
press ENTER.
3
To save the measurement results, use the cursor
keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
The adjusted speaker settings are applied.
• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.
4
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO”
to enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER.
• If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are
automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy
natural sounds even at low volume.
• You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.98) in the
“Option” menu.
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
123
PHONO
SUR. DECODE
USB
NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
ON
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
BL
U
ET
OO
T
H
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
PH
ON
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
USB
NET
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 42
5
Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
Measuring at multiple listening positions
(multi measure)
When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”, follow the procedure below for
measurement. It takes about 10 minutes to measure 8 listening
positions.
• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears,
see “Error messages” (p.45) or “Warning messages” (p.46).
1
To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Measure” and press ENTER.
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER
again to start the measurement immediately.
• To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.
The following screen appears on the TV when the
measurement at the first position finishes.
2
Move the YPAO microphone to the next listening
position and press ENTER.
Repeat step 2 until measurements at all listening positions
(up to 8) have been taken.
Caution
• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
123
PHONO
SUR. DECODE
USB
NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
ON
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
BL
U
ET
OO
T
H
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
PH
ON
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
USB
NET
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 43
3
When the measurements at the positions you want
to measure are completed, use the cursor keys to
select “CANCEL” and press ENTER.
When you have taken measurements at 8 listening
positions, the following screen appears automatically.
• To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see
“Checking the measurement results” (p.44).
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and
press ENTER.
5
To save the measurement result, use the cursor
keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
The adjusted speaker settings are applied.
• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.
6
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO”
to enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER.
• If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are
automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy
natural sounds even at low volume.
• You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.98) in the
“Option” menu.
7
Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
Caution
• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
123
PHONO
SUR. DECODE
USB
NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
ON
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
BL
U
ET
OO
T
H
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
PH
ON
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
USB
NET
ENTER
Cursor keys
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 44
Checking the measurement results
You can check the YPAO measurement results.
1
After the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Result” and press ENTER.
• You can also select “Result” from “Auto Setup” (p.110) in the “Setup” menu,
which displays the previous measurement results.
The following screen appears.
1 Measurement result items
2 Measurement result details
3 The number of measured positions (when multi
measure is performed)
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item.
3
To finish checking the results and return to the
previous screen, press RETURN.
Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments
When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not
suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings
and reload the previous YPAO adjustments.
1
In the “Setup” menu, select “Speaker”, “Auto
Setup”, and then “Result” (p.109).
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and
press ENTER.
3
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Wiring
Polarity of each speaker
Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with the
reverse polarity (+/-).
Size
Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the
subwoofer)
Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency signals
effectively.
Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively.
Distance Distance from the listening position to each speaker
Level Output level adjustment for each speaker
1
2
3
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
123
PHONO
SUR. DECODE
USB
NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
BL
U
ET
OO
T
H
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
PH
ON
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
USB
NET
ON SCREEN
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 45
Error messages
If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again.
Error message Cause Remedy
E-1:No Front SP Front speakers are not detected.
Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections.E-2:No Sur. SP One of the surround speakers cannot be detected.
E-3:No F.PRNS SP One of the front presence speakers cannot be detected.
E-4:SBR → SBL A surround back speaker is connected to the R side only.
When using only one surround back speaker, you need to connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Follow the
on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speaker.
E-5:Noisy The noise is too loud.
Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If you select
“PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected.
E-6:Check Sur.
Surround back speakers are connected, but no surround
speakers are connected.
Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use surround back speakers. Follow the on-screen
instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speakers.
E-7:No MIC The YPAO microphone has been removed.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
measurement again.
E-8:No Signal The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
measurement again. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service
center.
E-9:User Cancel The measurement has been canceled. Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To cancel the measurement, select “EXIT”.
E-10:Internal Err. An internal error has occurred.
Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact
the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 46
Warning messages
If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions.
However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings.
Warning message Cause Remedy
W-1:Out of Phase
A speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity
(+/-).
Select “Wiring” in “Result” (p.44) and check the cable connections (+/-) of the speaker identified by
“Reverse”.
If the speaker is connected incorrectly:
Turn off the unit and then reconnect the speaker cable.
If the speaker is connected correctly:
Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are
connected correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message.
W-2:Over Distance
A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the listening
position.
Select “Distance” in “Result” (p.44) and move the speaker identified by “>24.00m (>80.0ft)” within 24 m
(80 ft) of the listening position.
W-3:Level Error
There are significant volume differences between the
speakers.
Select “Level” in “Result” (p.44) and check the speaker identified by “Over ±10.0dB”, then check the usage
environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the subwoofer. We recommend
using the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as possible.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 47
Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a
wireless connection.
Selecting the connection method
Select a connection method according to your network environment.
■ Connecting with a wireless router (access point)
Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point).
You can enjoy Internet radio, AirPlay, or music files stored on media servers (PC/NAS)
on the unit.
For details on connection, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.48).
• You cannot use the wireless network connection simultaneously with the wired (network cable) connection
(p.35) or Wireless Direct (p.54).
• If the unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart, the unit may not connect to a wireless
router (access point). In such case, place them close to each other.
■ Connecting without a wireless router (access point)
Connect a mobile device to the unit directly.
You can use the application for smartphone / tablet “AV CONTROLLER” to control the
unit from mobiles devices or enjoy music files stored on mobiles devices on the unit.
For details on connection, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly
(Wireless Direct)” (p.54).
• You cannot use Wireless Direct simultaneously with the wired (network cable) connection (p.35) or the
wireless network connection (p.48).
• When Wireless Direct is enabled, the following functions are not available.
– Internet radio
–Network services
– Playback of music stored on media servers (PC/NAS)
• For details on “AV CONTROLLER”, visit the Yamaha website.
11 Connecting to a network device wirelessly
The unit
Wireless router
Mobile device
(such as iPhone)
Internet
Modem
The unit
Mobile device
(such as iPhone)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 48
Connecting the unit to a wireless network
There are several methods to connect the unit to a wireless
network.
Select a connection method according to your environment.
■ A: Sharing the iOS device setting
You can easily setup a wireless connection by applying the
connection settings on iOS devices (iPhone/iPod touch).
Before proceeding, confirm that your iOS device is connected to a
wireless router.
1
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to
the unit via HDMI.
3
Press ON SCREEN.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press
ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.
6
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network
Connection” and press ENTER.
7
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check
“Wireless (Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”.
• The checkmark indicates the current setting.
8
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check
“Share Wi-Fi Settings (iOS)” and select “NEXT”.
Yes
Do you own iOS devices
(iPhone/iPod touch)?
Yes
A (p.48)
B (p.50)
Does your wireless router
(access point) have a WPS
button?
C (p.51)
No
No
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
123
PHONO
SUR. DECODE
USB
NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
T
U
NER
BL
U
ET
OO
T
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE
2
M
O
D
E
SCEN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
AV
AUDIO
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
PH
ON
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
USB
NET
ON SCREEN
ENTER
z
Cursor keys
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 49
9
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to select the
desired connection method and select “NEXT”.
The following connection methods are available.
❑ Sharing the iOS device setting wirelessly
If you select “Wireless (WAC)” as the connection method, perform
the network setting sharing operation on your iOS device. (The
following procedure is a setup example for iOS 8.)
1
On the iOS device, select the unit as the AirPlay
speaker in the Wi-Fi screen.
2
Check the network currently selected and tap
“Next”.
When the sharing process finishes, the unit is automatically
connected to the selected network (access point).
Wireless (WAC)
You can apply the connection settings on the iOS device
to the unit using a wireless connection. For details, see
“Sharing the iOS device setting wirelessly”.
(You need iOS device with iOS 7 or later.)
USB Cable
You can apply the connection settings on the iOS device
to the unit using a USB cable. For details, see “Sharing
the iOS device setting using a USB cable”.
(You need iOS device with iOS 5 or later.)
The name of the unit
Tap here to start setup
The network currently selected
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
123
PHONO
SUR. DECODE
USB
NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
ON
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
BL
U
ET
OO
T
H
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
PH
ON
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
USB
NET
ENTER
Cursor keys
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 50
❑ Sharing the iOS device setting using a USB cable
If you select “USB Cable” as the connection method, follow the
procedure below to share the iOS device setting with the unit.
1
Connect the iOS device to the USB jack, and disable
the screen lock on the iOS device.
2
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “NEXT” and
press ENTER.
3
Tap “Allow” in the message appeared on the iOS
device.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the TV screen.
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ B: Using the WPS push button
configuration
You can easily set up a wireless connection with one push of the
WPS button.
• This configuration does not work if the security method of your wireless router
(access point) is WEP. In this case, use other connection method.
1
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2
Hold down INFO (WPS) on the front panel for
3 seconds.
“Press WPS button on Access Point” appears on the front
display.
3
Push the WPS button on the wireless router (access
point).
When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the front display.
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try
another connection method.
DISPLAY
RETURN
VIDEO AUX
ZONE
2
ZONE
CONTROL
YPAO MIC
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
VIDEO
RLAUDIO
5V 1A
The unit (front)
About WPS
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance,
which allows easy establishment of a wireless home network.
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
123
PHONO
SUR. DECODE
USB
NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
BL
U
ET
OO
T
H
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
PH
ON
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
USB
NET
ON SCREEN
ENTER
z
Cursor keys
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 51
■ C: Using other connection methods
If your wireless router (access point) does not support WPS push
button configuration method, follow the procedure below to
configure the wireless network settings.
1
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to
the unit via HDMI.
3
Press ON SCREEN.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press
ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.
6
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network
Connection” and press ENTER.
7
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check
“Wireless (Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”.
• The checkmark indicates the current setting.
8
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to select the
desired connection method and select “NEXT”.
The following connection methods are available.
WPS Button
You can set up a wireless connection with the WPS
button while viewing the TV screen. Follow the
instructions displayed on the TV screen.
Share Wi-Fi
Settings (iOS)
See “Sharing the iOS device setting” (p.48).
Access Point
Scan
You can set up a wireless connection by searching
for an access point. For details on settings, see
“Searching for an access point” (p.52).
Manual Setting
You can set up a wireless connection by entering
the required information (such as SSID)
manually. For details on settings, see “Setting up
the wireless connection manually” (p.52).
PIN Code
You can set up a wireless connection by entering
the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router (access
point). The method is available if the wireless
router (access point) supports the WPS PIN code
method. For details on settings, see “Using the PIN
code” (p.53).
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
123
PHONO
SUR. DECODE
USB
NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
T
U
NER
BL
U
ET
OO
T
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE
2
M
O
D
E
SCEN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
AV
AUDIO
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
PH
ON
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
USB
NET
ON SCREEN
ENTER
z
Cursor keys
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 52
❑ Searching for an access point
If you select “Access Point Scan” as the connection method, the
unit starts searching for access points. After a while, the list of
available access points appears on the TV screen.
1
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the
desired access point and select “NEXT”.
The wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV.
2
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the
security key and select “NEXT”.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT”
and press ENTER to start the connection process.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the TV screen.
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try
another connection method.
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
❑ Setting up the wireless connection manually
If you select “Manual Setting” as the connection method, the
wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV.
You need to setup the SSID (network name), encryption method
and security key for your network.
1
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the SSID of
the access point and select “NEXT”.
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the
security method of the access point and select
“NEXT”.
Settings
None, WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
123
PHONO
SUR. DECODE
USB
NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
BL
U
ET
OO
T
H
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
PH
ON
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
USB
NET
ON SCREEN
ENTER
Cursor keys
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 53
3
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the
security key and select “NEXT”.
If you select “None” in Step 2, this setting is not available.
Proceed to Step 4.
If you select “WEP”, enter either 5 or 13 character string, or
10 or 26 hexadecimal digits.
If you select other method, enter either 8 to 63 character
string, or 64 hexadecimal digits.
4
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT”
and press ENTER to start the connection process.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the TV screen.
If “Not connected” appears, check that all the information is
entered correctly, and repeat from Step 1.
5
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
❑ Using the PIN code
If you select “PIN Code” as the connection method, the list of
available access points appears on the TV screen.
1
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the
desired access point and select “NEXT”.
The PIN code of the unit appears on the TV screen.
2
Enter the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router
(access point).
For details on settings, refer to the instruction manual of the
wireless router (access point).
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT”
and press ENTER to start the connection process.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the TV screen.
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try
another connection method.
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
123
PHONO
SUR. DECODE
USB
NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
BL
U
ET
OO
T
H
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
PH
ON
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
USB
NET
ON SCREEN
ENTER
Cursor keys
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 54
Connecting a mobile device to the unit
directly (Wireless Direct)
Follow the procedure below to connect a mobile device to the unit
directly.
• Wireless Direct connection may be insecure since the communication is not
strongly encrypted. The unit may operate by playback operation on wireless
devices connected to the unit without permission.
1
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to
the unit via HDMI.
3
Press ON SCREEN.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press
ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.
6
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network
Connection” and press ENTER.
7
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check
“Wireless Direct” and select “OK”.
• The checkmark indicates the current setting.
8
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the
desired security method and select “NEXT”.
Settings
None, WPA2-PSK (AES)
• If you select “None”, the connection may be insecure since the
communication is not encrypted.
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
123
PHONO
SUR. DECODE
USB
NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
T
U
NER
BL
U
ET
OO
T
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE
2
M
O
D
E
SCEN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
AV
AUDIO
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
PH
ON
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
USB
NET
ON SCREEN
ENTER
z
Cursor keys
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 55
9
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the
security key and select “NEXT”.
If you select “None” in Step 8, this setting is not available.
Proceed to Step 10.
Otherwise, either 8 to 63 character string, or 64
hexadecimal digits.
10
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “OK” and press
ENTER to save the setting.
The settings made appear on the TV screen.
The SSID and security key information is required for setup
of a mobile device.
11
Configure the Wi-Fi settings of a mobile device.
For details on settings of your mobile device, refer to the
instruction manual of the mobile device.
a Enable the Wi-Fi function on the mobile device.
b Select the SSID displayed in Step 10 from the list of available
access points.
c When you are prompted for a password, enter the security key
displayed in Step 10.
12
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
123
PHONO
SUR. DECODE
USB
NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
BL
U
ET
OO
T
H
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
PH
ON
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
USB
NET
ON SCREEN
ENTER
Cursor keys
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
En 56
PLAYBACK
1
Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or
BD/DVD player) connected to the unit.
2
Use the input selection keys to select an input
source.
3
Start playback on the external device or select a
radio station.
Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
For details on the following operations, see the
corresponding pages.
• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.65)
• Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.69)
• Playing back iPod music (p.70)
• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.73)
• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
(p.76)
• Listening to Internet radio (p.80)
• Playing back music with AirPlay (p.83)
4
Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.
• To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute.
• To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or
TONE/BALANCE on the front panel (p.98).
On-screen input selection
a Press ON SCREEN.
b Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.
c Use the cursor keys to select the desired input source and
press ENTER.
Selecting an HDMI output jack
1
Press HDMI OUT to select an HDMI OUT jack.
Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be
used for signal output changes.
• You can also select an HDMI output jack by selecting a scene (p.57).
• When “OUT 1+2” is selected, the unit outputs video signals at the highest
resolution supported by both TVs (or projectors) connected to the unit. (For
example, if you have connected a 1080p TV to the HDMI OUT 1 jack and a 720p
TV to the HDMI OUT 2 jack, the unit outputs 720p video signals.)
• If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2 (“HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.125)), you
can turn on/off each zone by pressing HDMI OUT repeatedly.
Basic playback procedure
OUT 1+2
Outputs the same signal at both the HDMI OUT 1
and HDMI OUT 2 jacks.
OUT 1
Output the signals at the selected HDMI OUT jack.
OUT 2
Off Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jacks.
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
ENHANCER
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
OUT1+2
HDMIOUTSel.
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
123
PHONO
SUR. DECODE
USB
NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
PR
OG
RAM
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PARTY
MAIN
Z
O
NE
2
M
O
D
E
SCEN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ON SCREEN
ENTER
VOLUME
MUTE
HDMI OUT
Cursor keys
Input selection keys
En 57
The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source, sound program, HDMI output and various settings with just one touch.
You can use up to 12 scenes to register your favorite settings and switch them depending on a playback source.
1
Press SCENE.
The input source and settings registered to the
corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on
automatically when it is in standby mode.
By default, the following settings are registered for each scene.
• You can select SCENE 1–4 by pressing SCENE on the remote control.
Additionally, you can create 8 scenes (SCENE 5–12) and select those scenes
from the “Scene” menu (p.103).
On-screen scene selection
a Press ON SCREEN.
b Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.
c Use the cursor keys to select a desired scene and press
ENTER.
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)
SCENE (SCENE key)
Input
Input (p.56) AV 1 AUDIO 1 NET RADIO TUNER
Audio Select (p.100) Auto Auto — —
HDMI Output HDMI Output (p.56) OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2
Mode
DSP Program (p.59) Sci-Fi STRAIGHT 7ch Stereo 7ch Stereo
Pure Direct Mode (p.118) Auto Auto Auto Auto
Enhancer (p.64) Off On On On
Enhancer Hi-Res Mode (p.100) On On On On
1
BD/DVD
2
TV
3
NET
4
RADIO
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
6 87
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
123
PHONO
SUR. DECODE
USB
NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
BL
U
ET
OO
T
H
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
TV
BD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
PH
ON
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
USB
NET
ON SCREEN
ENTER
SCENE
Cursor keys
En 58
Configuring scene assignments
1
Set the unit to the condition (such as input source
and sound program) that you want to assign to a
scene.
2
Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET
Complete” appears on the front display.
• The SCENE link playback function allows you to start playback of an external
device connected to the unit via HDMI. To enable SCENE link playback, specify
the device type in “Device Control” (p.104) in the “Scene” menu.
• (China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only)
To control your playback device after selecting a scene with the remote control of
the unit, change the external device assigned to the SCENE keys. For details,
refer to “Supplement for Remote Control” in the supplied CD-ROM.
Selecting setting items to be included as
scene assignments
In addition to the default scene assignments (Input, HDMI Output
and Mode), you can also include the following setting items as the
scene assignments in “Detail” (p.104) in the “Scene” menu.
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
ENHANCER
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
SETComplete
SCENE1
Sound
Tone Control, YPAO Volume, Adaptive DRC,
Extra Bass
Surround
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode, Dialogue Lift, Dialogue
Level, Subwoofer Trim
Video Video Mode
Volume Master Volume
Lipsync Lipsync, Delay
Speaker Setup Setting Pattern, PEQ Select
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
123
PHONO
SUR. DECODE
USB
NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
BL
U
ET
OO
T
H
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
TV
BD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
PH
ON
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
USB
NET
SCENE
En 59
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and
surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with
your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo
playback).
❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for movies
• Press MOVIE repeatedly.
This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for viewing
video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games (p.60).
❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for music or
stereo playback
• Press MUSIC repeatedly.
This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for listening
music sources or stereo playback (p.61).
❑ Selecting a surround decoder
• Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly.
This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed multichannel playback from
2-channel sources (p.63).
❑ Switching to the straight decode mode
• Press STRAIGHT.
This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed sounds in original channels
(p.63).
❑ Switching to the Pure Direct mode
• Press PURE DIRECT.
This mode lets you enjoy pure high fidelity sound by reducing the
electrical noise from other circuitry (p.64).
❑ Enabling Compressed Music Enhancer
• Press ENHANCER.
This mode lets you enjoy compressed music with additional depth
and breadth (p.64).
On-screen sound program/surround decoder selection
a Press ON SCREEN.
b Use the cursor keys to select “DSP Program” and press ENTER.
c Use the cursor keys to select a sound program/surround
decoder and press ENTER.
• You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing
PROGRAM.
• You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in
the “DSP Program” menu (p.105).
• The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.
• You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the
speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.11) or at the “Audio Signal” screen in
the “Information” menu (p.129).
Selecting the sound mode
About Dolby Atmos
®
• Dolby Atmos contents are decoded as Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus or
multichannel PCM format in the following situations.
– Any of CINEMA DSP programs is selected.
– Neither surround back nor presence speakers are used.
– Headphones are used (2-channel playback).
• When the Dolby Atmos decoder is working, virtual surround processing (such
as Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.62), YPAO Volume (p.98) or Compressed
Music Enhancer (p.64) does not work.
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
123
PHONO
SUR. DECODE
USB
NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1 2 3
4
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
INF
O
S
LEE
P
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
BL
U
ET
OO
T
H
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TV
BD/DVD
NE
T
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1 2
3
4
1 2
3
PH
ON
O
USB
NET
MOVIE
MUSIC
SUR.DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
PURE DIRECT
ON SCREEN
ENTER
PROGRAM
Cursor keys
En 60
Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D)
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha’s original DSP
technology (CINEMA DSP 3D). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual
movie theaters or concert halls in your room and enjoy natural stereoscopic sound
fields.
• To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu to “Off”.
• We recommend using front presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the stereoscopic
sound fields. However, even when no front presence speakers are connected, the unit creates Virtual
Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce stereoscopic sound
fields.
• If a multichannel source (6.1 channels or more) is input when no surround back speakers are connected,
the unit creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of
depth to the rear sound field.
• When VPS or VSBS is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.
■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE)
The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as
movies, TV programs, and games.
❑ MOVIE THEATER
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSBPR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
ENHANCER
SLEEP
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
HallinVienna
CLASSICAL
MUSIC
“CINEMA DSP n” lights up
Sound program category
Sound program
Standard
This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling
without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio,
such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the
ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful
reverberations from the left, right, and rear.
Spectacle
This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie
productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the
cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing
everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms.
Sci-Fi
This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the
latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically
created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialogue,
sound effects, and background music.
Adventure
This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and
adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but
puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides,
powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth
creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation of
the sounds and the separation of the channels.
Drama
This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of
movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The
reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects and
background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not impinge
on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for long
periods.
Mono Movie
This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies,
in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a
pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate
reverberation to the original audio.
En 61
❑ ENTERTAINMENT
■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback
(MUSIC)
The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources.
You can also select stereo playback.
❑ CLASSICAL
Sports
This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts
and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’
voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the
stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of
the fans in a suitable space.
Action Game
This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting
games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player
feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater
concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music
Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field.
Roleplaying Game
This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This
program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction
of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of
scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer
for a clearer and more spatial sound field.
Music Video
This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as
if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere
thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence sound
field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround sound
field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.
Recital/Opera
This program controls the amount of reverberations at an optimum level and
emphasizes the depth and clarity of human voices to offer the reverberations
of an orchestra box in front the listener at the same time as providing the
acoustic positioning and feeling of presence on the stage. The surround
sound field is relatively moderate, but the data for concert hall effects are
used to represent the inherent beauty of music. The listener will not be
fatigued even after long hours of opera entertainment.
Hall in Munich
This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500
seats that uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful
reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s
virtual seat is at the center left of the arena.
Hall in Vienna
This program simulates a 1,700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a
shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings
create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience,
producing a very full, rich sound.
Hall in Amsterdam
The large, shoe box shaped hall seats about 2,200 around the circle stage.
Reflections are rich and pleasing while the sound travels freely.
Church in Freiburg
Located in the south of Germany, this grand, stone-built church has a
pointed tower at 120 meters in height. Its long and narrow shape and the
high ceiling enable the elongated reverberation time and limited initial
reflection time. Thus, the rich reverberation rather than the sound itself
reproduces the atmosphere of the church.
Church in
Royaumont
This program features the sound field created by the refectory (dining hall)
of a beautiful medieval Gothic monastery located in Royaumont on the
outskirts of Paris.
Chamber
This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an
audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable
for courtly music and chamber music.
En 62
❑ LIVE/CLUB
❑ STEREO
• CINEMA DSP 3D (p.60) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.62) do not work when “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo” is
selected.
■ Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers
(Virtual CINEMA DSP)
If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) when no
surround speakers are connected, the unit utilizes Yamaha’s original virtual surround
technology to reproduce up to 7-channel surround sound and enable you to enjoy the
well-oriented sound field only with the front-side speakers. We recommend using
presence speakers in order to enjoy more effective stereoscopic sound field.
• When Virtual CINEMA DSP is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.
■ Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in
front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)
If you have surround speakers but there is no space to place them in the rear of your
room, you can place them in the front (p.18) and enjoy multichannel surround sound
using Virtual CINEMA FRONT.
When “Layout (Surround)” (p.115) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, the unit creates
the virtual surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multichannel
surround sound with the 5 speakers placed in the front.
• When Virtual CINEMA FRONT is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.
■ Enjoying surround sound with headphones
(SILENT CINEMA)
You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel speaker system, with
stereo headphones by connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting
a sound program or a surround decoder.
Village Vanguard
The Jazz club is on 7th Avenue, New York. This small club with the low
ceiling makes the powerful reflections converge toward the stage located in
the center.
Warehouse Loft
The warehouse resembles some lofts in Soho. Sound reflects off the
concrete walls clearly with a lot of energy.
Cellar Club
This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and
homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds that
make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small stage.
The Roxy Theatre
This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert
venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the
hall.
The Bottom Line
This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a
famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left
and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.
2ch Stereo
Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When
multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and
output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP).
7ch Stereo
Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back
multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and
then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger
sound field and is ideal for background music at parties.
En 63
Enjoying unprocessed playback
You can play back input sources without any sound field effect
processing.
■ Playing back in original channels
(straight decode)
When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces
stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as
CDs, and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for
multichannel sources.
1
Press STRAIGHT.
Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is
enabled or disabled.
• If “Layout (Surround)” (p.115) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, Virtual
CINEMA FRONT (p.62) works when multichannel source is played back.
■ Playing back 2-channel sources in
multichannel (surround decoder)
The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel
playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources.
• Speakers that produce sounds will change depending on your speaker system
and the selected decode type (p.106).
• For details on each decoder, see “Glossary” (p.146).
1
Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder.
Each time you press the key, the surround decoder
changes.
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOL UME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSBPR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
ENHANCER
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
STRAIGHT
bSurround
Use the Dolby Surround decoder suitable for all
sources. A real acoustic space (including
overhead) will be created especially when
object-based audio (such as Dolby Atmos content)
is played.
bPLIIx Movie Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for movies. Sounds will
be output from the surround/surround back
speakers even when 2-channel source is input.
bPLII Movie
bPLIIx Music Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for music. Sounds will
be output from the surround/surround back
speakers even when 2-channel source is input.
bPLII Music
bPLIIx Game Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for games. Sounds will
be output from the surround/surround back
speakers even when 2-channel source is input.
bPLII Game
Neo:6 Cinema
Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix
decoder) suitable for movies. Sounds will be
output from the surround/surround back speakers.
Neo:6 Music
Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix
decoder) suitable for music. Sounds will be output
from the surround/surround back speakers.
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOL UME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSBPR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
ENHANCER
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
†‡PLƒx¡MOVIE
¡SUR.¡DECODE
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
123
PHONO
SUR. DECODE
USB
NET
9
0
E
N
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1 2 3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
BL
U
ET
OO
T
H
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NE
T
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
PH
ON
O
USB
NET
STRAIGHT
SUR.DECODE
En 64
• You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoders when headphones are
connected or when “Surround Back” (p.114) in the “Setup” menu is set to
“None”.
• When the Dolby Surround decoder is selected, virtual surround processing
(such as Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.62), YPAO Volume (p.98) or
Compressed Music Enhancer (p.64) does not work.
• If the Dolby Surround decoder is selected when only one surround back
speaker is used, no sound is output from the surround back speaker (except
when a Dolby Atmos content is played).
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct)
When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays back the
selected source with the least circuitry in order to reduce the
electrical noise from other circuitry (such as the front display). It
allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.
1
Press PURE DIRECT.
Each time you press the key, the Pure Direct mode is
enabled or disabled.
• When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the following functions are not available.
– Some settings for the speakers or sound programs
– Operating the on-screen menu and some items in the “Option” menu
– Using the multi-zone function
– Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation)
Enjoying compressed music with enhanced
sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)
Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the
sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original
sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along
with any other sound modes.
In addition, Compressed Music Enhancer enhances the quality of
uncompressed digital audio (such as 2-channel PCM and FLAC)
when “Hi-Res Mode” (p.100) in the “Option” menu is set to “On”
(default).
1
Press ENHANCER.
Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer
is enabled or disabled.
• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling
rate is over 48 kHz.
• You can also use “Enhancer” (p.99) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable
Compressed Music Enhancer.
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSBPR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
ENHANCER
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
PUREDIRECT
SBL SBRSB
SL
SW
SR
CL R
VOLUME
ENHANCER
EnhancerOn
“ENHANCER” lights up
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
123
PHONO
SUR. DECODE
USB
NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1 2 3
4
M
O
VI
E
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
BL
U
ET
OO
T
H
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NE
T
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1 2
3
4
1 2
3
PH
ON
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
USB
NET
PURE DIRECT
ENHANCER
En 65
You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or
selecting from registered radio stations.
• The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is
being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used
in U.K. and Europe models.
• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM
antennas.
Setting the frequency steps
(Asia and General models only)
At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and
9 kHz for AM. Depending on your country or region, set the
frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM.
1
Set the unit to standby mode.
2
When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel,
press MAIN ZONE z.
3
Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TUNER FRQ
STEP”.
4
Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”.
5
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby
mode and turn it on again.
Selecting a frequency for reception
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2
Press BAND to select a band (FM or AM).
3
Use the following keys to set a frequency.
TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the
key for about a second to search stations automatically.
Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to
select 98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT).
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio
station.
“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.
• “Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of
reception range.
• You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM
radio reception in “FM Mode” (p.100) in the “Option” menu. When the signal
reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may
improve it.
Listening to FM/AM radio
MAIN ZONE z STRAIGHT
PROGRAM
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
3
ZONE
2
STEREO
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
FM50/AM9
TUNERFRQSTEP
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSBPR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CLR
PR
STEREO
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
FM87.50MHz
SBL SBRSB
SL
SW
SR
CL R
VOLUME
TUNEDSTEREO
FM98.50MHz
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
123
PHONO
SUR. DECODE
USB
NET
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
PRE
S
ET
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
BL
U
ET
OO
T
H
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
PH
ON
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
USB
NET
TUNING
BAND
TUNER
Numeric keys
En 66
Registering favorite radio stations (presets)
You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have
registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their
preset numbers.
• You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals by using
“Auto Preset” (p.68).
■ Registering a radio station
Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.
1
Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.65)
to tune into the desired radio station.
2
Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds.
The first time that you do register a station, the selected
radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”.
Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered
to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most
recently registered number.
• To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning
into the desired radio station, use PRESET or numeric keys to select a
preset number, and then press MEMORY again.
■ Selecting a preset station
Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2
Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio
station.
You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by
using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.
• “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.
• “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.
• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.
• To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.68).
SBL SBRSB
SL
SW
SR
CL R
VOLUME
TUNEDSTEREO
PresetOK
Preset
01:FM98.50MHz
Preset number
SBL SBRSB
SL
SW
SR
CL R
VOLUME
TUNEDSTEREO
FM98.50MHz
Preset
01:Empty
“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered
SBL SBRSB
SL
SW
SR
CL R
VOLUME
TUNEDSTEREO
Preset
01:FM98.50MHz
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
123
PHONO
SUR. DECODE
USB
NET
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
BL
U
ET
OO
T
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE
2
M
O
D
E
SCEN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
AV
AUDIO
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
PH
ON
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
USB
NET
MEMORY
PRESET
TUNER
Numeric keys
En 67
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
123
PHONO
SUR. DECODE
USB
NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
ON
SC
REE
N
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
T
U
NER
BL
U
ET
OO
T
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE
2
M
O
D
E
SCEN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
AV
AUDIO
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
PH
ON
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
USB
NET
INFO
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
Radio Data System tuning
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM
stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of
Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program
Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio
Data System broadcasting station.
■
Displaying the Radio Data System information
1
Tune into the desired Radio Data System
broadcasting station.
• We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System
broadcasting stations (p.68).
2
Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for
the displayed item appears.
• “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not
displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System
service.
■ Receiving traffic information
automatically
When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, the unit
automatically receives traffic information. To enable this function,
follow the procedure below to set the traffic information station.
1
When “TUNER” is selected as the input source,
press OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Traffic Program”
(TrafficProgram) and press ENTER.
The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds.
Press ENTER again to start the search immediately.
• To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor
keys (q/w) while “READY” is displayed.
• To cancel the search, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the
search finishes.
• “TP Not Found” appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information
stations are found.
Program Service Program service name
Program Type Current program type
Radio Text Information on the current program
Clock Time Current time
DSP Program Sound mode name
Audio Decoder Decoder name
VOLUME
SBL SBR
SL
SW
SR
CL R
STEREO TUNED
ProgramType
Info
Item name
VOLUME
SBL SBR
SL
SW
SR
CL R
STEREO TUNED
CLASSICS
FM98.50MHz
Information
Frequency (always displayed)
VOLUME
SBL SBR
SL
SW
SR
CL R
STEREO TUNED
TPFM101.30MHz
TrafficProgram
Finished
Traffic information station (frequency)
Cursor keys
En 68
Operating the radio on the TV
You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the
TV.
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
■ Playback screen
1 Radio station information
Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected
band (FM/AM) and frequency.
(U.K. and Europe models only)
When tuning into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.67), the
Radio Data System information (“Program Service”, “Program Type,”
“Radio Text” and “Clock Time”) is also displayed.
2 TUNED/STEREO indicators
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
“STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received.
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
■ Browse screen
1 Preset station list
Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a
preset station and press ENTER to tune into it.
2 Preset number
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
• (U.K. and Europe models only)
Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by “Auto
Preset”.
Menu Function
Browse Moves to the browse screen (preset station list).
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
2
3
Menu Submenu Function
Utility
Memory
Registers the current station to the
preset number selected in the list.
Auto Preset
Automatically registers FM radio
stations with strong signals (up to 40
stations).
Clear Preset
Clear the preset station selected in the
list.
Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations.
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the
list.
1 Page Down
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows
the background. Press one of the
menu operation keys to redisplay it.
3
2
1
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
123
PHONO
SUR. DECODE
USB
NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
ON
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PARTY
HDMI
OUT
BL
U
ET
OO
T
H
MAIN
Z
O
NE
2
M
O
D
E
SCEN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
AV
AUDIO
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
PH
ON
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
USB
NET
ENTER
RETURN
TUNER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
En 69
You can play back music files stored on a
Bluetooth
device (such
as smartphones) on the unit.
• To use the Bluetooth function, set “Bluetooth” (p.123) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
• For details on supported Bluetooth devices, see “Supported devices and file
formats” (p.150).
Playing back
Bluetooth
device music on the
unit
Follow the procedure below to establish a
Bluetooth
connection
between a
Bluetooth
device (such as smartphones) and the unit,
and play back music stored the
Bluetooth
device on the unit.
• The unit does not support video playback via Bluetooth.
1
Press BLUETOOTH to select “Bluetooth” as the
input source.
2
On the Bluetooth device, select the unit (network
name of the unit) from the available device list.
A connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit will
be made.
If the pass key is required, enter the number “0000”.
3
On the Bluetooth device, select a song and start
playback.
The playback screen (artist name, album name and song
title) is displayed on the TV.
• “Not found” appears when no Bluetooth devices are detected.
• If the unit detects the Bluetooth device previously connected, the unit
automatically connects to the Bluetooth device after Step 1. To establish
another Bluetooth connection, first terminate the current Bluetooth
connection.
• To terminate the Bluetooth connection, perform one of the following
operations.
– Perform the disconnect operation on the Bluetooth device.
– Select an input source other than “Bluetooth” on the unit.
– Select “Disconnect” in “Audio Receive” (p.111) in the “Setup” menu.
• You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on
the remote control to control playback.
Playing back music via Bluetooth
The unit
Bluetooth device
(such as smartphones)
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
123
PHONO
SUR. DECODE
USB
NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NE
T
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
PH
ON
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
USB
NET
BLUETOOTH
External device
operation keys
En 70
You can play back iPod music on the unit using a USB cable
supplied with the iPod.
• For details on playable iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats”
(p.150).
• The unit does not support a USB connection for iPad. To play back iPad music on
the unit, use AirPlay (p.83).
Connecting an iPod
Connect your iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the
iPod.
1
Connect the USB cable to the iPod.
2
Connect the USB cable to the USB jack.
• The iPod charges while it is connected to the unit. If you set the unit to standby
mode while the iPod is charging, the iPod continues to charge up to 4 hours. If
“Network Standby” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, it continues to
charge without limit.
• Disconnect the iPod from the USB jack when it is not in use.
Playback of iPod content
Follow the procedure below to operate the iPod contents and start
playback.
You can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
1
Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
• If playback is ongoing on your iPod, the playback screen is displayed.
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• To operate the iPod manually to select content or control playback, switch to the
simple play mode (p.72).
Playing back iPod music
YPAO MIC
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
5V 1A
The unit (front)
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSBPR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
SLEEP
HD
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
Connected
USB
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
123
PHONO
SUR. DECODE
USB
NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
ON
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
BL
U
ET
OO
T
H
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
PH
ON
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
NET
ENTER
RETURN
USB
Cursor keys
En 71
■ Browse screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.72) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 List name
3 Contents list
Displays the list of iPod content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
4 Item number/total
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
■ Playback screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.72) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining
time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
• You can use the external device operation keys on the remote control to control
playback.
Menu Function
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
5
3
2
4
Menu Function
Browse Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
3
2
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
123
PHONO
SUR. DECODE
USB
NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
DI
S
PLA
Y
ON
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
BL
U
ET
OO
T
H
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
PH
ON
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
USB
NET
ENTER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
En 72
■ Operating the iPod itself (simple play)
1
Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode.
The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are
enabled.
To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again.
2
Operate your iPod itself to start playback.
■ Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings of your iPod.
• During simple play, configure the shuffle/repeat settings directly on your iPod or
press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below.
1
When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Item Setting Function
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.
Songs (Songs)
Plays back songs in random order.
“x” appears in the TV screen.
Albums
(Albums)
Plays back albums in random order.
“x” appears in the TV screen.
Repeat
(Repeat)
Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears in the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs repeatedly.
“v” appears in the TV screen.
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
123
PHONO
SUR. DECODE
USB
NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
ON
SC
REE
N
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
BL
U
ET
OO
T
H
MAIN
ZONE
2
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
PH
ON
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
USB
NET
MODE
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
En 73
You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on
the unit.
The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or
FAT32 format).
• For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats”
(p.150).
Connecting a USB storage device
1
Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack.
• If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In
this case, “Loading...” appears in the front display.
• Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack.
• Connect a USB memory device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use
extension cables.
Playback of USB storage device contents
Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device
contents and start playback.
You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed
on the TV screen.
1
Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
• If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is
displayed.
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
RETURN
YPAO MIC
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
TONE/BALANCE
STRAIGHT
(
CONNECT
)
PROGRAM
ENTER
5V 1A
The unit (front)
USB storage device
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSBPR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
SLEEP
HD
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
Connected
USB
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
123
PHONO
SUR. DECODE
USB
NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
BL
U
ET
OO
T
H
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
PH
ON
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
NET
USB
En 74
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden
files) during playback, playback stops automatically.
• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly
by selecting the shortcut numbers (p.92).
■ Browse screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.75) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 List name
3 Contents list
Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys
(q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
4 Item number/total
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu Function
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
5
3
2
4
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
123
PHONO
SUR. DECODE
USB
NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
ON
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
BL
U
ET
OO
T
H
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
PH
ON
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
USB
NET
ENTER
RETURN
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
En 75
■ Playback screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.75) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
• You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the
remote control to control playback.
■ Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of USB
storage device contents.
1
When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Menu Function
Browse Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
3
2
Item Setting Function
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.
On (On)
Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order.
“x” appears on the TV screen.
Repeat
(Repeat)
Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs in the current album
(folder) repeatedly.
“v” appears on the TV screen.
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
123
PHONO
SUR. DECODE
USB
NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
DI
S
PLA
Y
ON
SC
REE
N
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
BL
U
ET
OO
T
H
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
PH
ON
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
USB
NET
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
En 76
You can play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit.
• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router (p.35). You can check
whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network”
(p.130) in the “Information” menu.
• The audio may be interrupted while using the wireless network connection. In this case, use the wired
network connection.
• For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.150).
Media sharing setup
To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS, first you need to
configure the media sharing setting on each music server.
■ For a PC with Windows Media Player installed
❑ For Windows Media Player 12
1
Start Windows Media Player 12 on your PC.
2
Select “Stream”, then “Turn on media streaming”.
3
Click “Turn on media streaming”.
4
Select “Allowed” from the drop-down list next to the unit’s model
name.
5
Click “OK” to exit.
❑ For Windows Media Player 11
1
Start Windows Media Player 11 on your PC.
2
Select “Library”, then “Media Sharing”.
3
Check the “Share my media to” box, select the unit’s icon, and click
“Allow”.
4
Click “OK” to exit.
• For details on media sharing settings, refer to Windows Media Player help.
■ For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server software
installed
Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and configure the media
sharing settings.
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
En 77
Playback of PC music contents
Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and
start playback.
You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV
screen.
1
Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the
input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
• If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the
playback screen is displayed.
2
Use the cursor keys to select a music server and
press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden
files) during playback, playback stops automatically.
• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly
by selecting the shortcut numbers (p.92).
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
123
PHONO
SUR. DECODE
USB
NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
ON
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
BL
U
ET
OO
T
H
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
PH
ON
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
USB
ENTER
RETURN
NET
Cursor keys
En 78
■ Browse screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.79) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 List name
3 Contents list
Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
4 Item number/total
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
■ Playback screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.79) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
• You can use the external device operation keys on the remote control to control
playback (some functions may not work depending on the PC/NAS).
• You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.102).
Menu Function
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
5
3
2
4
Menu Function
Browse Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
3
2
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
123
PHONO
SUR. DECODE
USB
NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
DI
S
PLA
Y
ON
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
BL
U
ET
OO
T
H
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
PH
ON
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
USB
NET
ENTER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
En 79
■ Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for the playback of PC
music content.
1
When “SERVER” is selected as the input source,
press OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Item Setting Function
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.
On (On)
Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order.
“x” appears on the TV screen.
Repeat
(Repeat)
Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs in the current album
(folder) repeatedly.
“v” appears on the TV screen.
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
123
PHONO
SUR. DECODE
USB
NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
ON
SC
REE
N
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
BL
U
ET
OO
T
H
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
PH
ON
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
USB
NET
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
En 80
You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world.
• To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.35). You can
check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly
assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.130) in the “Information” menu.
• You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations.
• The unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service.
• This service may be discontinued without notice.
Playback of Internet radio
1
Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the
input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and
the playback screen is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by
selecting the shortcut numbers (p.92).
Listening to Internet radio
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
123
PHONO
SUR. DECODE
USB
NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
ON
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
BL
U
ET
OO
T
H
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
PH
ON
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
USB
ENTER
RETURN
NET
Cursor keys
En 81
■ Browse screen
1 Playback indicator
2 List name
3 Contents list
Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to
select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
4 Item number/total
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
■ Playback screen
1 Playback indicator
2 Playback information
Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
• You can use the external device operation key (s) on the remote control to stop
playback.
• Some information may not be available depending on the station.
Menu Function
Bookmark On
(Bookmark Off)
Adds/removes the station selected in the list to/from
the “Bookmarks” folder (p.82).
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
5
3
2
4
Menu Function
Bookmark On
Adds the current station to the “Bookmarks” folder
(p.82).
Browse Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
3
2
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
123
PHONO
SUR. DECODE
USB
NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
DI
S
PLA
Y
ON
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
BL
U
ET
OO
T
H
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
PH
ON
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
USB
NET
ENTER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
En 82
Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks)
By registering your favorite Internet radio stations to “Bookmarks”,
you can quickly access to them from the “Bookmarks” folder in the
browse screen.
■ Registering the station on the
browse/playback screen
1
Select the desired Internet radio station in the
browse screen or start playback of it to display the
playback screen.
2
Press the cursor key (r) to select “Bookmark On”
and press ENTER.
The selected station is added to the “Bookmarks” folder.
• To remove stations from the “Bookmarks” folder, select the station in the
“Bookmarks” folder and then “Bookmark Off”.
■ Registering the station on the vTuner
website
1
Select any of Internet radio stations on the unit.
This operation is necessary to register the radio station for
the first time.
2
Check the vTuner ID of the unit.
You can find the vTuner ID in “Network” (p.130) in the
“Information” menu.
3
Access the vTuner website
(http://yradio.vtuner.com/) with the web browser on
your PC and enter the vTuner ID.
• To use this feature, you need to create your personal account. Create your
account using your e-mail address.
4
Register your favorite radio stations.
Click the “Add” icon (
❤
+) next to the station name.
• To remove the station from the “Bookmarks” folder, select “Bookmarks” in
the Home screen, and then click the “Remove” icon (
❤
–) next to the station
name.
You can switch the language.
Enter the vTuner ID in this area.
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
123
PHONO
SUR. DECODE
USB
NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
ON
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
BL
U
ET
OO
T
H
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
PH
ON
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
USB
NET
ENTER
Cursor keys
En 83
The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on the unit via network.
• To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same router. You can check
whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network”
(p.130) in the “Information” menu.
• When using a multiple SSID router, access to the unit might be restricted depending on the SSID to
connect. Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit.
• For details on supported iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.150).
• You can restrict access to the unit using the AirPlay Password (p.95).
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents
Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music contents on the unit.
1
Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or display the playback
screen on the iPod.
If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon ( ) appears.
• If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are connected to the router properly.
2
On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and select the unit
(network name of the unit) as the audio output device.
3
Select a song and start playback.
The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and starts playback.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
Playing back music with AirPlay
PC
iTunes
iPhone/iPad/
iPod touch
Router
(wired or wireless)
The unit
(wired or wireless)
iTunes (example) iPod iOS6 (example)iPod iOS7/iOS8 (example)
iTunes (example) iPod (example)
Network name of the unit
En 84
• You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by
setting “Network Standby” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
• You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on
iTunes/iPod in “Network Name” (p.123) in the “Setup” menu.
• If you select the other input source on the unit during playback, playback on the
iTunes/iPod stops automatically.
• You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable
volume controls from iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.102) in the “Input”
menu to “Off”.
■ Playback screen
1 Playback indicator
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining
time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the
selection.
• You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the
remote control to control playback.
• To control iTunes playback with the remote control of the unit, you need to
configure the iTunes preferences to enable iTunes control from remote speakers
in advance.
Caution
• When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be
unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the
volume suddenly increases during playback, stop playback on the iTunes/iPod
immediately.
Menu Function
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
3
2
iTunes (example of English version)
Check this box
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
123
PHONO
SUR. DECODE
USB
NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
DI
S
PLA
Y
ON
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
BL
U
ET
OO
T
H
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
PH
ON
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
USB
NET
ENTER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
En 85
The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input sources in the room
where the unit is installed (main zone) and in another room (Zone2).
For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (main zone), another person
can listen to radio in the study room (Zone2).
Multi-zone configuration examples
■ Enjoying music in another room
You can enjoy music using speakers placed in another room.
Connections
Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.25
Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.87
■ Enjoying videos/music in another room
You can enjoy videos/music using a TV placed in another room.
❑ Enjoying videos/music using a TV and speakers
Connections
TV (for analog video playback): p.87
TV (for digital video playback): p.88
Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.25
Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.87
Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
• Video/audio signals that can be output to Zone2 vary depending on how you connect the device in
Zone2 to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see “Multi-zone output” (p.152).
• Since there are many possible ways to use the unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that
you consult with your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about the multi-zone
connections that best meet your requirements.
Living room (main zone)
Study room
(Zone2)
Audio (SPEAKERS or ZONE OUT)
Living room (main zone)
Study room
(Zone2)
Audio (SPEAKERS or ZONE OUT)
Video (ZONE OUT or HDMI)
En 86
❑ Enjoying videos/music using only a TV
Connection
TV: p.88
Preparing Zone2
Connect the device that will be used in Zone2 to the unit.
■ Connecting speakers to play back audio
Connect speakers to play back audio in Zone2. The connection method varies
depending on the amplifier being used (the unit or an external amplifier).
❑ Using the unit’s internal amplifier
Connect the speakers placed in Zone2 to the unit with speaker cables. For details, see
“Connecting Zone2 speakers” (p.25).
Living room (main zone)
Study room
(Zone2)
Video/audio (HDMI)
Caution
• Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting speakers or an external
amplifier.
• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the
unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit,
“Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.
En 87
❑ Using an external amplifier
Connect the external amplifier (with volume control) placed in Zone2 to the unit with a
stereo pin cable and connect speakers to the external amplifier.
■ Connecting a video monitor to play back analog videos
Connect a video monitor to watch analog videos at Zone2. Depending on the video
input jacks available on your video monitor, choose one of the video connection
methods.
• The video conversion between the analog video jacks does not work for Zone2 video output. To watch
videos played back on a video device on the Zone2 video monitor, you need to connect the video monitor to
the unit in the same way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from the DVD
player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks with a component video cable.
To assign the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks to the Zone2 video monitor, set “Monitor
Out Assign” (p.125) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2”.
HDMI OUT
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
1
2
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 1 AV 2
R
L
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
(2 TV)
(1 BD/DVD)
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
3
COAXIAL COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
1
PHONO
GND
FM
75Ω
ANTENNA
(
4 RADIO
)
OPTICAL
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2
SURROUND
R
5
6
L
AM
FRONT
Y
AV
A
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
Y
(HDCP2.2)
AUDIO
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2
L
R
L
R
The unit (rear)
ZONE OUT
(ZONE 2) jacks
Zone2
Main zone
External amplifier
Audio input
(analog stereo)
HDMI OUT
ARC
Z
ONE OUT)
1
2
HDMI
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
(HDCP2.2)
AV 5
AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
COAXIAL
NA
O
)
OPTICAL
1
2
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2
SURROUND BACKSURROUND
BI–A
M
ZON
E
R
5
6
L R RL
SINGLE
AM
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
FRONT
SURROUND SUR. BACK
(SINGLE)
Y
P
B PR
PRPB
Y
P
PB
YPRPB
AV 1
COMPONENT VIDEO
A
AV 3
C
AV 2
B
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
Y
(HDCP2.2)
YPB PR
COMPONENT VIDEO
VIDEO
P
B
P
R
Y
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
V
V
PR
PB
Y
Y
PR
PB
The unit (rear)
ZONE OUT jacks
(COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO)
Zone2
Main zone
Video input
(component video or
composite video)
En 88
■ Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back
videos/audio
Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as a TV) to play back videos/audio at
Zone2.
• To watch videos played back on a video device at Zone2, you need to connect the video device to the unit
with an HDMI cable (p.30).
• We recommend that you disable HDMI Control on the playback devices connected to the unit.
• On-screen operations are not available for Zone2.
To assign the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack to Zone2, set “HDMI OUT2 Assign”
(p.125) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2”.
• When the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2, you can enable/disable the audio output
from the HDMI OUT 2 jack by setting “Audio Output” (p.120) in the “Setup” menu to “On” or “Off” (default).
• You can also use speakers placed in Zone2 to output audio (p.25).
HDMI OUT
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
1
2
(1
B
AV 1
R
L
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
(2 TV)
(1 BD/DVD)
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
3
COAXIAL COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
1
PHONO
GND
FM
75Ω
ANTENNA
(
4 RADIO
)
OPTICAL
Z
O
5
6
AM
(HDCP2.2)
HDMI
HDMI OUT
(ZONE OUT)
2
(HDCP2.2)
HDMI
HDMI
The unit (rear)
HDMI OUT 2
(ZONE OUT) jack
Main zone
(Example: using a TV)
HDMI input
Zone2
• Videos/audio interruptions may happen in another zone when any of the following operations is
performed.
– Tuning on/off a TV connected to the unit via HDMI or switching the TV input
– Enabling/disabling a zone output or selecting its input source
– Changing the sound mode or audio settings
En 89
■ Operating the unit from Zone2 (remote connection)
You can operate the unit or external devices from Zone2 using the remote control
supplied with each device if you connect an infrared signal receiver/emitter to the unit’s
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks.
• (China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only)
You can operate external devices with the supplied remote control if you register a remote control code for
each device. For details, refer to “Supplement for Remote Control” on the supplied CD-ROM.
Remote connections between Yamaha products
An infrared signal transmitter is not required if you are using Yamaha products that
support remote connections, as the unit does. You can transmit remote control signals
by connecting the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an
infrared signal receiver.
HDMI
AV 3 AV 4
(HDCP2.2)
AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
IN OUT
REMOTE
1
2
SPEAKERS
CENTERSURROUND BACK
U
ND
BI–AMP
ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/
L R R RL L
SINGLE
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
FRONT
SURROUND SUR. BACK
(SINGLE)
EXTRA SP
RS-23
2
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
NETWORK
( 3
N
Y
P
B PR
PRPB
Y
P
RPB
YPRPB
AV 1
COMPONENT VIDEO
A
AV 3
C
AV 2
B
U
T/
Y
IN OUT
REMOTE
The unit (rear)
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
External device
(such as a CD player)
Remote control
(supplied with each device)
Infrared signal
receiver
Zone2
Main zone
Infrared signal
transmitter
IN
OUT
REMOTE
IN
OUT
REMOTE
Remote control
Infrared signal
receiver
Yamaha products
(up to six, including the unit)
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
Zone2
En 90
Controlling Zone2
1
Set MAIN/ZONE2 to “ZONE2”.
2
Press z (receiver power).
Each time you press the key, Zone2 is enabled or disabled.
When Zone2 is enabled, “ZONE2” lights up in the front
display.
3
Use the input selection keys to select an input
source.
• Video/audio signals that can be output to Zone2 vary depending on how you
connect the device in Zone2 to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see
“Multi-zone output” (p.152).
• You cannot select Bluetooth, USB and network sources exclusively for each
zone. For example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is
selected for the main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches
to “SERVER”.
4
Start playback on the external device or select a
radio station.
Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
For details on the following operations, see the
corresponding pages.
• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.65)
• Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.69)
• Playing back iPod music (p.70)
• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
(p.73)
• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
(p.76)
• Listening to Internet radio (p.80)
• Playing back music with AirPlay (p.83)
• The on-screen operations are not available for Zone2. Use the front display
or web control (p.93) to control Zone2.
• AirPlay is available in Zone2 only when AirPlay playback is ongoing in the
main zone.
• The Zone2 input automatically switches in conjunction with the input source
selected in the main zone when “Main Zone Sync” is selected as the Zone2
input with the web control (p.93) or AV CONTROLLER (p.8).
• To play back DSD audio in Zone2, select “Main Zone Sync” as the Zone2
input or use the party mode (p.91).
Caution
• To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2.
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
123
PHONO
SUR. DECODE
USB
NET
9
0
E
N
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
MAIN/ZONE2
z
Input selection keys
En 91
■ Other operations for Zone2
The following functions are also available when Zone2 is enabled.
Adjusting the volume
Press VOLUME or MUTE.
Selecting the input source and settings at once (SCENE)
Press SCENE.
• To register the current settings (input source, volume and tone control) to a scene,
hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front
display.
Setting the sleep timer
Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30
min, off).
Adjusting the high-/low-frequency range of sounds
a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel.
b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”.
c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Default
0.0 dB
Adjusting the Zone2 front speaker balance
a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel.
b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Balance”.
c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.
■ Enjoying the same source in multiple
rooms (party mode)
The party mode allows you to play back in Zone2 the same music
that is being played back in the main zone. During the party mode,
stereo playback is automatically selected for all zones. Utilize this
function when you want to use main zone music as background
music for a house party.
1
Press PARTY.
Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or
off.
When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the
front display.
• If the party mode does not work on Zone2, set “Party Mode Set” (p.125) in
the “Setup” menu to “Enable” (default).
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
123
PHONO
SUR. DECODE
USB
NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
PR
OG
RAM
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
MUS
I
C
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
BL
U
ET
OO
T
H
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
TV
BD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
PH
ON
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
USB
NET
SLEEP
VOLUME
MUTE
SCENE
PARTY
En 92
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
123
PHONO
SUR. DECODE
USB
NET
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
PH
ON
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
MEMORY
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
You can register up to 40 favorite USB and network contents as
shortcuts and access them directly by selecting the shortcut
numbers.
• You can also use the “Bookmarks” feature to register Internet radio stations (p.82).
• Only the input source will be registered for Bluetooth and AirPlay. Individual
contents cannot be registered.
Registering an item
Select a desired item and register it to a shortcut number.
1
Play back a song or a radio station to be registered.
2
Press MEMORY.
• To change a shortcut number to which the item will be registered, use
numeric keys to select the shortcut number after Step 2.
3
To confirm the registration, press MEMORY.
Recalling a registered item
Recall a registered item by selecting the shortcut number.
1
Press BLUETOOTH, USB or NET.
2
Use the numeric keys to enter a shortcut number
(01 to 40).
You can also use PRESET on the front panel to select a
shortcut.
• “No Presets” appears when no items are registered.
• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.
• The registered item cannot be recalled in the following cases.
– The USB storage device which contains the registered item is not
connected to the unit.
– The PC/NAS which contains the registered item is turned off or not
connected to the network.
– The registered network content is temporarily unavailable or out of
service.
– The registered item (file) has been deleted or moved to another location.
–A Bluetooth connection cannot be established.
• When you register music files stored on a USB storage device or a PC/NAS,
the unit memorizes the relative position of the music files in the folder. If you
have added or deleted any music files to or from the folder, the unit may not
recall the music file correctly. In such cases, register the items again.
Registering favorite items (shortcut)
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSBPR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
SLEEP
HD
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
01:Empty
MemoryPreset
Shortcut number (flashes)
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSBPR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
SLEEP
HD
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
02:Empty
MemoryPreset
“Empty” (not in use) or item currently registered
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSBPR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
SLEEP
HD
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
01:USB
RecallPreset
Numeric keys
En 93
You can control the unit with the web control screen displayed in a web browser.
• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router.
• Some security software installed on your PC may block the access of the unit to your PC. In these
cases, configure the security software appropriately.
• To display the web control screen or turn on the unit from the web control when the unit is in standby
mode, set “Network Standby” (p.95) to “On”.
• We recommend using one of the following web browsers.
– Internet Explorer 9.x, 10.x or 11.x
– Safari 7.x
1
Start the web browser.
2
Enter the IP address of the unit in the address bar of the web browser.
(Example)
• You can check the IP address of the unit in “Network” (p.130) in the “Information” menu.
• You can bookmark the unit’s IP address in the browser or create a shortcut link (p.95) to access the
web control screen quickly in the future. However, if you are using a DHCP server, the IP address of
the unit may change each time the unit is turned on.
• If you have enabled the MAC address filter (p.122), you need to specify the MAC address of your PC
to allow the PC to access the unit. For information on how to check the MAC address of your PC,
refer to its instruction manual.
• If you are using Windows 8, we recommend you start Internet Explorer in the following way.
– Select “Desktop” in the Start screen and click the Internet Explorer icon at the bottom left of the
screen.
• By using the application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER”, you can control the unit from an
iPhone, iPad, iPod touch or Android devices (p.8).
Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control)
Web browser
Web control
PC
Router The unit
Web control
(wired or wireless) (wired or wireless)
En 94
■ Top menu screen
1 CONTROL
Moves to the control screen for the selected zone.
2 STATUS
Turns on/off the power for each zone or displays the input source and volume set for each zone.
3 SETTINGS
Moves to the settings screen.
4 PA RT Y M ODE
Turns on/off the party mode (p.91).
5 SYSTEM POWER
Turns on/off the power for all zones.
6 MAIN VOLUME
Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the main zone. You can also select the
increments used for volume adjustment.
7 RELOAD
Reloads the current status of the unit.
■ Control screen
1 PLAY INFO
Selects an input source or controls playback for the selected zone.
2 TOP MENU
Moves to the top menu screen.
3 SCENE
Selects a scene for the selected zone.
4 POWER
Turns on/off the power for the selected zone.
5 VOLUME
Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the selected zone. You can also select the
increments used for volume adjustment.
6 RELOAD
Reloads the current status of the unit.
• Multi-zone volume adjustment is not available when an external amplifier is used.
3
4
1
2
5
6
7
2
1
4
3
5
6
En 95
■ Settings screen
1 Rename
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.123) or the name of each zone
(p.124). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.
Network
Selects the network connection method (p.121) or configures the network parameters (such as
IP address) (p.121). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.
AirPlay Password
Sets the password to restrict access to the unit via AirPlay (p.83). Click “APPLY” to apply the
changes to the unit.
MAC Filter
Sets the MAC address filter (p.122) to limit access to the unit from the network devices. Click
“APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.
Auto Reload
Enables/disables automatic reloading. When “Auto Reload” is “On” (enabled), the web control
screen reloads the status of the unit every 5 seconds.
Network Standby
Enables/disables the network standby function (p.122).
Backup/Recovery
Creates a backup of the unit’s settings on the PC or restores the settings from the backup.
Firmware Update
Updates the firmware of the unit by using the firmware you have downloaded on the PC.
Follow the on-screen instructions to start the firmware update.
Create Link
Creates a shortcut link to the desired control screen.
Tips
Displays tips for use of the web control.
Licenses
Displays the licenses of the software used in the unit.
2 BACK
Moves to the top menu screen.
3 RELOAD
Reloads the current status of the unit.
2
1
3
Note
• If the network settings are changed, you may need to restart the browser or regain access to the unit.
• When using the MAC address filter, make sure you specify the MAC addresses of your network
devices correctly. Otherwise, the unit will be inaccessible from your network devices such as PCs and
other external devices.
• Do not operate the unit during the recovery process, as this may result in the incorrect recovery of the
settings. When the recovery finishes, click “OK” to set the unit to standby mode.
• The backup does not contain user information (such as user account and password) or unit-specific
information (such as MAC address and IP address).
• Some characters entered with a PC may not appear correctly on the unit.
En 96
Switching information on the front display
1
Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for
the displayed item appears.
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed
item can also be applied separately to each input source group.
* The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio
decoder is activated, “Decoder Off” appears.
Viewing the status information on the TV
1
Press DISPLAY.
The following information is displayed on the TV.
2
To close the information display, press DISPLAY.
Viewing the current status
Input source group Item
AV 1–7
V-AUX
AUDIO 1–3
PHONO
DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder
(decoder name*)
TUNER
DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder
(decoder name*)
* (U.K. and Europe models only)
Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is
tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (
p.67
).
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSBPR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
SLEEP
HD
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
AudioDecoder
Info
Item name
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSBPR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
SLEEP
HD
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
†‡PLƒx¡MOVIE
¡¡¡¡AV1
Information
Bluetooth
USB
SERVER
AirPlay
Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album
name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio
Decoder (decoder name*)
* During simple playback of iPod:
DSP Program (sound mode name),
Audio Decoder (decoder name*)
NET RADIO
Song (song title), Album (album name), Station
(station name), DSP Program (sound mode name),
Audio Decoder (decoder name*)
Input source group Item
Input source/
Party mode
status
Audio format/
Decoder
Compressed Music Enhancer status
CINEMA DSP status
Sound
mode
Volume/
YPAO
Volume
status
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
123
PHONO
SUR. DECODE
USB
NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
BL
U
ET
OO
T
H
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
PH
ON
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
USB
NET
INFO
DISPLAY
En 97
You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This
menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily
configure settings during playback.
1
Press OPTION.
Front display
TV screen
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Option menu items
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
• Default settings are underlined.
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSBPR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
SLEEP
HD
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
ToneControl
Option
Item Function Page
Tone Control
(Tone Control)
Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency
range of sounds.
98
YPAO Volume
(YPAO Volume)
YPAO Volume
(YPAO Vol.)
Enables/disables YPAO Volume. 98
Adaptive DRC
(A.DRC)
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to
minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume
is adjusted.
98
Dialogue
(Dialog)
Dialogue Level
(Dialog Lvl)
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. 99
Dialogue Lift
(Dialog Lift)
Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. 99
Subwoofer/Bass
(Subwoofer/Bass)
Subwoofer Trim
(SW.Trim)
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. 99
Extra Bass
(Extra Bass)
Enables/disables Extra Bass. 99
Enhancer
(Enhancer)
Enhancer
(Enhancer)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. 99
Hi-Res Mode
(HiRes Mode)
Enables/disables the high-resolution mode (for
enhancing the quality of uncompressed digital
audio).
100
Video Processing
(Video Process.)
Enables/disables the video signal processing
settings configured in the “Setup” menu.
100
Input Settings
(Input Settings)
Input Trim
(In.Trim)
Corrects volume differences between input sources. 100
Audio Select
(A.Sel)
Selects the audio input jack to use when more than
one audio connection is made for one input source.
100
Video Out
(V.Out)
Selects a video to be output with the audio input
source.
100
FM Mode
(FM Mode)
Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio
reception.
100
En 98
■ Tone Control (Tone Control)
Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds.
Choices
Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass)
Setting range
-6.0 dB to Bypass
(Bypass) to +6.0 dB, *0.5 dB increments
• If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels.
• You can also adjust the “Tone Control” setting with the front panel controls by pressing TONE/BALANCE
repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”, and PROGRAM to make an adjustment.
■ YPAO Volume (YPAO Volume)
Enables/disables YPAO Volume or Adaptive DRC.
Enables/disables YPAO Volume. When YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and
low-frequency levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that
you can enjoy natural sounds even at low volume.
Settings
• YPAO Volume works effectively after the measurement results of “Auto Setup” have been already
saved (p.39).
• We recommend enabling both YPAO Volume and Adaptive DRC when you are listening at lower
volumes or at night.
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically
adjusted when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for
listening to playback at a low volume at night.
Settings
If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide
at a high volume.
Traffic Program
(TrafficProgram)
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Automatically searches for a traffic information
station.
67
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod (p.72),
USB storage device (p.75), or media server (p.79).
—
Repeat
(Repeat)
Configures the repeat setting for the iPod (p.72),
USB storage device (p.75), or media server (p.79).
—
Item Function Page
YPAO Volume (YPAO Vol.)
Off (Off) Disables YPAO Volume.
On (On) Enables YPAO Volume.
Adaptive DRC (A.DRC)
Off (Off) The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted.
On (On)
Automatically adjusts the dynamic range when YPAO Volume is
enabled.
Volume: low Volume: high
Input level Input level
On
Off
On
Off
Output level
Output level
En 99
■ Dialogue (Dialog)
Adjusts the volume or perceive height of dialogue sounds.
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. If dialogue sounds cannot be heard
clearly, you can turn up its volume by increasing this setting.
Setting range
0
to 3
Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. If the dialogue sounds as if it is
coming from below the TV screen, you can raise its perceived height by increasing
this setting.
• This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met.
– One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) is selected when front
presence speakers are used.
– Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.60) is working.
(You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.)
Setting range
0
to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position)
■ Subwoofer/Bass (Subwoofer/Bass)
Adjust the subwoofer volume or bass sound.
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB
to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Enables/disables Extra Bass. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can enjoy
enhanced bass sounds, regardless of the size of the front speakers and the
presence or absence of the subwoofer.
Settings
■ Enhancer (Enhancer)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer and the high-resolution mode.
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.64).
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
• Compressed Music Enhancer works on both the main zone and Zone 2.
• You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer
(p.64).
Settings
Default
TUNER, Bluetooth, USB, (network sources): On (On)
Others: Off (Off)
• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz.
Dialogue Level (Dialog Lvl)
Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift)
Ideal position
Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim)
Extra Bass (Extra Bass)
Off (Off) Disables Extra Bass.
On (On) Enables Extra Bass.
Enhancer (Enhancer)
Off (Off) Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.
On (On) Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.
En 100
Enables/disables the high-resolution mode when “Enhancer” is set to “On”. If this
function is set to “On”, you can enhance the quality of uncompressed digital audio
(such as 2-channel PCM and FLAC) using Compressed Music Enhancer.
Settings
■ Video Processing (Video Process.)
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio) settings
configured in “Processing” (p.119) in the “Setup” menu.
Settings
■ Input Settings (Input Settings)
Configures the input settings.
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume
differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB
to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one audio connection is made
for one input source.
Settings
Selects a video to be output with the audio input source.
Settings
■ FM Mode (FM Mode)
Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception.
Settings
Hi-Res Mode (HiRes Mode)
On (On)
Enables the high-resolution mode.
(The high-resolution mode may not work depending on the audio
signal processing condition.)
Off (Off) Disables the high-resolution mode.
Direct
(Direct) Disables the video signal processing.
Processing
(Processing)
Enables the video signal processing.
Input Trim (In.Trim)
Audio Select (A.Sel)
Auto (Auto)
Automatically selects the audio input jack in the following priority order.
1. HDMI input
2. Digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL)
3. Analog input (AUDIO)
HDMI (HDMI)
Always selects HDMI input. No sounds are produced when no signals
are input through the HDMI jack.
Coax/Opt (Coax/Opt)
Always selects digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL). No sounds are
produced when no signals are input through the COAXIAL or OPTICAL
jack.
Analog (Analog)
Always selects analog input (AUDIO). No sounds are produced when
no signals are input through the AUDIO jacks.
Video Out (V.Out)
Off (Off) Does not output video.
AV 1–7 (AV1–7),
V-AUX (V-AUX)
Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks.
Stereo
(Stereo) Receives FM radio in stereo sounds.
Mono (Mono) Receives FM radio in monaural sounds.
En 101
CONFIGURATIONS
You can change the input source settings using the TV screen.
1
Press ON SCREEN.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an input source to be configured
and press the cursor key (q).
The input source of the unit also changes.
• You can still switch the input source by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
5
Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Input menu items
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
• Default settings are underlined.
Configuring input sources (Input menu)
Item Function Page
Rename/Icon Select Changes the input source name and icon. 102
Decoder Mode Sets the format of digital audio playback to DTS. 102
Volume Interlock
Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via
AirPlay.
102
DMC Control
Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media
Controller (DMC) to control playback.
102
En 102
■ Rename/Icon Select
Changes the input source name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.
Input sources
AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–3, PHONO, USB
■ Setup procedure
1
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a template and press the cursor key (w).
• You cannot change the template or icon for “USB” when an iPod is connected.
2
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).
3
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
4
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
5
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ Decoder Mode
Sets the format of digital audio playback to “DTS”.
For example, if the unit does not detect DTS audio and outputs noise, set “Decoder
Mode” to “DTS”.
Input sources
AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–3 (available only when any audio digital input jack is assigned)
Settings
■ Volume Interlock
Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay.
Input sources
AirPlay
Settings
■ DMC Control
Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
playback.
Input source
SERVER
Settings
• A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network.
When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media
Player 12) on the same network.
Auto Automatically selects an audio format to match the input audio signal.
DTS Selects DTS only. (Other audio signals are not reproduced.)
Off Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod.
Limited
Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range
(-80 dB to -20 dB and mute).
Full
Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range (-80 dB to
+16.5 dB and mute).
Disable Does not allow DMCs to control playback.
Enable
Allows DMCs to control playback.
En 103
You can change the settings of the SCENE function (p.57) using the TV screen.
1
Press ON SCREEN.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a scene to be configured and
press the cursor key (q).
• You can still switch the scene by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to change the setting.
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Scene menu items
■ Save
Registers the unit’s current settings (such as input source and sound program) in the
selected scene.
• If you have changed the input assignment for a scene, you also need to change the external device
assigned to the corresponding SCENE key (p.58).
Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu)
Item Function Page
Save Registers the current settings in the selected scene. 103
Load
Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. You can
also configure the SCENE link playback setting, select items
to be included as the scene assignments, or view the settings
currently assigned to the selected scene.
104
Rename/Icon Select Changes the scene name and icon. 105
Reset Restores the default settings for the selected scene. 105
En 104
■ Load
Loads the settings registered for the selected scene.
Select “DETAIL” to configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene
assignments.
Recalls a selected scene and starts its playback on an external device connected
to the unit via HDMI. (SCENE link playback)
Settings
Default
SCENE1 (BD/DVD), SCENE2 (TV): HDMI Control
SCENE3 (NET), SCENE4 (RADIO), SCENE5–12: Off
• To control playback of an HDMI Control-compatible device by SCENE link playback, you need to set
“HDMI Control” in the “Setup” menu to “On” and perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.152).
Selects items to be included as the scene assignments. You can also view the
settings currently assigned to the selected scene.
To include items as the scene assignments, use the cursor keys to select an item
and press ENTER to check the box (or uncheck the box to exclude).
For example, if you often adjust the volume while watching TV but listen to radio
with low volume at night, exclude “Volume” from the assignments for SCENE2 (TV)
and include “Volume” in the assignments for SCENE4 (RADIO).
Choices
Default
Input, HDMI Output, Mode: selected
Sound, Surround, Video, Volume, Lipsync, Speaker Setup: not selected
Device Control
Off Disables the SCENE link playback function.
HDMI Control
Enables SCENE link playback using HDMI Control signals. Select this if
an HDMI Control-compatible device (such as a BD/DVD player) is
connected to the unit via HDMI. It also turns on the TV if it supports
HDMI Control.
Detail
Input Input (p.56), Audio Select (p.100)
HDMI Output HDMI Output (p.56)
Mode
DSP Program (p.59), Pure Direct Mode (p.118), Enhancer (p.64),
Enhancer Hi-Res Mode (p.100)
Sound
Tone Control (p.98), YPAO Volume (p.98), Adaptive DRC (p.98),
Extra Bass (p.99)
Surround
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (p.118), Dialogue Lift (p.99), Dialogue Level
(p.99), Subwoofer Trim (p.99)
Video Video Mode (p.119)
Volume Master Volume (p.56)
Lipsync Lipsync (p.117), Delay (p.117)
Speaker Setup Setting Pattern (p.113), PEQ Select (p.116)
Check or uncheck
En 105
■ Rename/Icon Select
Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.
■ Setup procedure
1
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).
2
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
3
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
entry.
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
5
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ Reset
Restores the default settings (p.57) for the selected scene.
You can change the settings of the sound programs and surround decoders using the
TV screen.
1
Press ON SCREEN.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “DSP Program” and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a sound program to be
configured and press the cursor key (q).
• You can still switch the sound program by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.
Configuring sound programs/surround
decoders (DSP Program menu)
En 106
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
5
Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
DSP Program menu items
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program or surround decoder.
• Default settings are underlined.
■ Settings for sound programs
Item Function Settings
Decode Type
Selects a surround decoder to be used
in combination with the selected sound
program.
bSurround*, bPLIIx Movie
(bPLII Movie), bPLIIx
Music* (bPLII Music*),
bPLIIx Game* (bPLII
Game*), Neo:6 Cinema,
Neo:6 Music*
(* Available only when
“SURROUND DECODER” is
selected)
DSP Level Adjusts the sound field effect level.
-6
dB
to 0
dB
to +3
dB
Higher to enhance the sound
field effect, and lower to
reduce it.
Initial Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and presence sound field
generation.
1 ms to 99 ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.
Surround Initial Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and surround sound field
generation.
1ms to 49ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.
Surround Back Initial
Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and surround back sound field
generation.
Room Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of the
presence sound field.
0.1 to 2.0
Higher to enhance the
broadening effect, and lower
to reduce it.
Surround Room Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of the
surround sound field.
Surround Back Room
Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of the
surround back sound field.
En 107
The following items are available when you select “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo”.
• Available items in “7ch Stereo” vary depending on the speaker system being used.
Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the presence sound
field.
0 to 10
Higher to enhance the
reflectivity, and lower to
reduce it.
Surround Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the surround sound
field.
Surround Back
Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the surround back
sound field.
Reverb Time
Adjust the decay time of the rear
reverberant sound.
1.0 s to 5.0 s
Higher to enrich the
reverberant sound and lower
to have clear sound.
Reverb Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and reverberant sound
generation.
0 ms to 250 ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.
Reverb Level
Adjusts the volume of the reverberant
sound.
0% to 100%
Higher to strengthen the
reverberant sound, and lower
to weaken it.
Item Function Settings
Sound program
Item Function Settings
2ch Stereo Direct
Selects whether to
automatically bypass the
DSP circuit when an
analog audio source is
played back.
Auto
, Off
7ch Stereo
Level Adjusts the entire volume. -5 to 0
to +5
Front / Rear Balance
Adjusts the front and rear
volume balance.
-5 to 0
to +5
Higher to enhance the front
side, and lower to enhance
the rear side.
Left / Right Balance
Adjusts the left and right
volume balance.
-5 to 0
to +5
Higher to enhance the right
side, and lower to enhance
the left side.
Height Balance
Adjust the height volume
balance using the front
presence speakers.
0 to 5
to 10
Higher to enhance the
upside, and lower to
enhance the downside. (The
front presence speakers do
not produce sounds when
“Height Balance” is set to
“0”.)
Monaural Mix
Enables/disables
monaural sound output.
Off
, On
En 108
■ Settings for decoders
The following items are available when you set “Decode Type” of “SURROUND
DECODER” to “bSurround”, “bPLIIx Music” (bPLII Music) or “Neo:6 Music”.
Decode Type Item Function Settings
bSurround Center Spread
Selects whether to
spread the center
channel signals to left
and right when
2-channel source is
played.
Off
, On
Select “On” to spread center
channel signals to left and right if
you feel the center sound is too
strong when 2-channel source is
played.
bPLIIx Music
(bPLII Music)
Panorama
Adjusts the broadening
effect of the front sound
field.
Off
, On
Select “On” to wrap front left/right
channel sounds around the field
and generate a spacious sound
field in combination with the
surround sound field.
Center Width
Adjusts the broadening
effect of the center
sound field.
0 to 3
to 7
Higher to enhance the broadening
effect, and lower to reduce it
(closer to center).
Dimension
Adjusts the difference in
level between the front
and surround sound
fields.
-3 to 0
to +3
Higher to strengthen the front
sound field and lower to strengthen
the surround sound field.
Neo:6 Music Center Image
Adjusts the center
orientation level
(broadening effect) of
the front sound field.
0.0 to 0.3
to 1.0
Higher to strengthen the center
orientation level (less broadening
effect) and lower to weaken (more
broadening effect).
En 109
You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
1
Press ON SCREEN.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a menu.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
5
Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 110
Setup menu items
Menu Item Function Page
Speaker
Auto Setup Automatically optimizes the speaker settings (YPAO). 39
Manual Setup
Setting Pattern Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them. 113
Setting Data Copy Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction. 113
Power Amp Assign Selects a speaker system. 113
Configuration
Front Selects the size of the front speakers. 114
Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. 114
Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size. 114
Surround Back Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size. 114
Front Presence Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected and their size. 114
Subwoofer Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase. 115
Layout Selects the layouts of the surround speakers and front presence speakers. 115
Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. 115
Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. 115
Parametric EQ Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. 116
Test Tone Enables/disables the test tone output. 116
En 111
Sound
Lipsync
Delay Enable Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source. 117
Auto/Manual Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. 117
Adjustment Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually. 117
Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. 117
Max Volume Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. 117
Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. 118
Pure Direct Mode Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode. 118
Adaptive DSP Level Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level. 118
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D. 118
Virtual Surround Back Speaker Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers. 118
Object Decode Mode Enables/disables playback of object-based audio signals such as Dolby Atmos contents. 118
Video Video Mode Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio). 119
HDMI
HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control. You can also configure the relevant settings (such as ARC and TV audio input). 120
Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. 120
Standby Through Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. 121
Network
Network Connection Selects the network connection method. 121
IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). 121
Network Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices. 122
MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. 122
Network Name Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. 123
Bluetooth
Bluetooth Enables/disables the
Bluetooth
functions. 123
Audio Receive Disconnect Terminates the
Bluetooth
connection between the
Bluetooth
device (such as smartphones) and the unit. 69
Bluetooth Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from
Bluetooth
devices (
Bluetooth
standby). 123
Menu Item Function Page
En 112
Multi Zone
Main Zone Set Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 124
Zone2 Set
Vol ume Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output. 124
Max Volume Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness in the second zone. 124
Initial Volume Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on. 125
Audio Delay Adjusts the Zone2 audio output timing. 125
Mono Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 output. 125
Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 125
Monitor Out Assign Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks are used. 125
HDMI OUT2 Assign Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used. 125
Party Mode Set Enables/disables switching to the party mode. 125
Function
Input Assignment Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source. 126
Display Set
Dimmer (Front Display) Adjusts the brightness of the front display. 126
Short Message Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the 11unit is operated. 126
Wallpaper Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV. 126
Trigger Output1
Trigger Output2
Trigger Mode Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. 127
Target Zone Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized. 127
Memory Guard Prevents accidental changes to the settings. 127
ECO
Auto Power Standby Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. 128
ECO Mode Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode). 128
Language Select an on-screen menu language. 128
Menu Item Function Page
En 113
Speaker (Manual Setup)
Configures the speaker settings manually.
• Some speaker settings are not available depending on the selected “Power Amp Assign” setting.
• Default settings are underlined.
■ Setting Pattern
Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them.
When you configure the following speaker settings, the settings will be memorized in
the selected pattern.
• Measurement results (Auto Setup)
• Power Amp Assign
• Configuration
• Distance
• Level
• Parametric EQ
Settings
Pattern1
, Pattern2
• The setting pattern currently selected is shown at the top of the “Manual Setup” screen.
• This function is useful when you want to save certain settings according to the varying conditions of your
listening environment. For example, if you want to switch the settings when curtains are open or closed,
you can save the settings suited for each condition and switch between them.
■ Setting Data Copy
Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction.
Choices
■ Power Amp Assign
Selects a speaker system.
The unit has 7 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 9 speakers and up to 2
subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to create the favorite acoustic space in your room.
You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power
amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system.
Settings
■ Configuration
Configures the output characteristics of the speakers.
• When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm
(6-1/4”) or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”).
Pattern1 > 2 Copies the “Pattern1” parameters to “Pattern2”.
Pattern2 > 1 Copies the “Pattern2” parameters to “Pattern1”.
Basic
Select this option when you use the basic speaker configuration (up to
7-channel plus front presence speakers) (p.17).
7ch +1ZONE
Select this option when you use 7-channel speakers in the main zone
and Zone2 speakers (p.24).
5ch BI-AMP
Select this option when you use 5-channel speakers (including bi-amp
front speakers) (p.23).
5ch BI-AMP +SB
Select this option when you use 5-channel speakers (including bi-amp
front speakers) plus surround back channel expansion using an
external amplifier (p.24).
En 114
Selects the size of the front speakers.
Settings
• “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”.
Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.
Settings
Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes.
Settings
Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes.
Settings
• This setting is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”, or when “Layout (Surround)” is set to
“Front”.
Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected and their size.
Settings
Front
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency
components.
Small
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components
lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz).
Center
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency
components.
Small
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover
frequency (default: 80 Hz).
None
Select this option when no center speaker is connected.
The front speakers will produce center channel audio.
Surround
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel
frequency components.
Small
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover
frequency (default: 80 Hz).
None
Select this option when no surround speakers are connected.
The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual
CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program.
Surround Back
Large x1
Select this option when one large speaker is connected.
The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back
channel frequency components.
Large x2
Select this option when two large speakers are connected.
The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back
channel frequency components.
Small x1
Select this option when one small speaker is connected.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover
frequency (default: 80 Hz).
Small x2
Select this option when two small speakers are connected.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover
frequency (default: 80 Hz).
None
Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected.
The surround speakers will produce surround back channel audio.
Front Presence
Large Select this option for large speakers.
Small
Select this option for small speakers.
None Select this option when no front presence speakers are connected.
En 115
Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase.
Settings
• When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase.
Selects the layouts of the surround speakers and front presence speakers.
Surround
Selects a surround speaker layout when surround speakers are used.
Settings
• This setting is not available when “Configuration (Surround)” is set to “None”.
Front Presence
Selects a front presence layout when front presence speakers are used. This
setting facilitates the optimization of the sound field effect.
Settings
• This setting is not available when “Configuration (Front Presence)” is set to “None”.
• To play Dolby Atmos contents using the front presence speakers, see “Presence speaker layout”
(p.19).
■ Distance
Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the
speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance
from “Meter” or “Feet”.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,
Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer
Setting range
0.30 m to 3.00
m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 10.0 ft to 80.0 ft), *0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments
■ Level
Adjusts the volume of each speaker.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,
Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer
Setting range
-10.0 dB to 0.0
dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Subwoofer
Use
Normal
Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase not
reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect)
channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels.
Reverse
Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase reversed).
The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio
and low-frequency components from other channels.
None
Select this option when no subwoofer is connected. The front speakers
will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and
low-frequency components from other channels.
Layout
Rear
Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the rear side
of the room.
Front
Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the front side
of the room. Virtual CINEMA FRONT (p.62) works in this case.
Front Height
Select this option when front presence speakers are installed on the
front side wall.
Overhead
Select this option when front presence speakers are installed to the
ceiling.
Dolby Enabled SP
Select this option when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the front
presence speakers.
En 116
■ Parametric EQ
Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.
Settings
• “YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front”, and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the measurement results of “Auto
Setup” have already been saved (p.39). Press ENTER again to view the measurement results.
■ Manual equalizer adjustment
1
Set “Parametric EQ” to “Manual” and press ENTER.
2
Press ENTER again to enter the edit screen.
3
Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER.
• To restore the default settings for all speakers, select “PEQ Data Clear” and then “OK”.
• To copy the parametric equalizer values acquired with “Auto Setup” (p.39) to the “Manual” fields for
fine adjustment, select “PEQ Data Copy” and then an equalizer type.
4
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a center frequency from the 7 preset bands
(4 for subwoofer) and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Setting range
Gain: -20.0 dB to +6.0 dB
5
To fine-adjust the center frequency or Q factor (bandwidth), press ENTER
repeatedly to select an item.
Frequency: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the center frequency of the selected
band and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Q: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band and
the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Setting range
Center frequency: 31.3 Hz to 16.0 kHz (31.3 Hz to 250.0 Hz for subwoofer)
Q factor: 0.500 to 10.080
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ Test Tone
Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker
balance or equalizer while confirming its effect.
Settings
Manual
Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually.
For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”.
YPAO:Flat Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics.
YPAO:Front
Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as the
front speakers.
YPAO:Natural Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound.
Through Does not use the equalizer.
Off Does not output test tones.
On
Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance
or equalizer.
En 117
Sound
Configures the audio output settings.
■ Lipsync
Adjusts the delay between video and audio by holding up the audio output.
Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source.
Choices
AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–3
Settings
Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.
Setting range
• Even if “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, the automatic adjustment does not work depending on
the TV connected to the unit. In this case, adjust the delay manually in “Adjustment”.
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Auto/Manual
Select” is set to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when
“Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”.
Setting range
0
ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments)
• “Offset” shows the difference between automatic adjustment and fine adjustment.
■ Dynamic Range
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and
DTS signals) playback.
Settings
■ Max Volume
Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.
Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5
dB
Delay Enable
Disable Disable the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.
Enable
Enables the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.
Auto/Manual Select
Auto
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when
a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the
unit via HDMI.
If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in
“Adjustment”.
Manual
Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video
and audio output manually.
Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.
Adjustment
Maximum Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.
Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use.
Minimum/Auto
Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low
volumes.
When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is
automatically adjusted based on the input signal information.
En 118
■ Initial Volume
Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on.
Settings
■ Pure Direct Mode
Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode (p.64).
Settings
■ Adaptive DSP Level
Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level.
Settings
■ CINEMA DSP 3D Mode
Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D (p.60). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP
3D functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo).
Settings
■ Virtual Surround Back Speaker
Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround
speakers. When VSBS is enabled, the unit creates VSBS when no surround back
speakers are connected.
Settings
• VSBS is effective only when 6.1- or 7.1-channel content is played back.
■ Object Decode Mode
Enables/disables playback of object-based audio signals such as Dolby Atmos
contents.
Settings
• Regardless of this setting, object-based audio signals are played in normal 5.1-/7.1-channel audio if any of
CINEMA DSP programs is selected.
Off
Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered
standby mode.
On
Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB
increments).
(This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max
Volume”.)
Auto
Automatically outputs video signals when any videos are input from the
selected input source or an input source that can be operated with the
on-screen display is selected. When no video signals are input, the
wall paper is displayed.
Video Off Does not output video signals including the wall paper.
Off Does not adjust the effect level automatically.
On
Adjusts the effect level automatically according to the YPAO
measurement results and the volume level.
Off Disables CINEMA DSP 3D.
On
Enables CINEMA DSP 3D.
Off Disables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS).
On
Enables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS).
Disable
Disables playback of object-based audio signals. Those signals will be
played in normal 5.1-/7.1-channel audio.
Enable
Enables playback of object-based audio signals.
En 119
Video
Configures the video output settings.
■ Video Mode
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio).
Settings
• When “Video Mode” is set to “Direct”, the unit transmits video signals with the least circuitry in order to
reduce video output delay.
• When “Video Mode” is set to “Processing” and the resolution is being converted, short messages are not
displayed on the TV screen.
Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to
“Processing”.
Settings
• If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MONITOR CHECK” (p.133) in
the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that the output video may not be
displayed on your TV normally.)
Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to
“Processing”.
Settings
• This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i,
1080p, or 2160p (4K) signals.
Direct Disables the video signal processing.
Processing
Enables the video signal processing.
Select a resolution and an aspect ratio in “Resolution” and “Aspect”.
Resolution
Through Does not convert the resolution.
Auto
Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution.
480p/576p, 720p,
1080i, 1080p, 4K
Output video signals with a selected resolution.
(Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.)
Aspect
Through Does not convert the aspect ratio.
16:9 Normal
Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side
of the screen.
En 120
HDMI
Configures the HDMI settings.
■ HDMI Control
Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.152).
Settings
• To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.152) after connecting HDMI
Control-compatible devices.
Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI
Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio
when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner.
Settings
AUDIO 1–3
Default
AUDIO 1
• When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for
connecting an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input.
Enables/disables ARC (p.154) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Settings
• You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers
connected to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the
unit, set “ARC” to “Off” and use the TV’s speakers.
Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the
unit when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Settings
■ Audio Output
Selects a device to output audio.
• The “Amp” and “HDMI OUT1” settings are available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.
• The “HDMI OUT2” setting is available only when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.125) is set to “Main”.
Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones connected
to the unit.
Settings
Off Disables HDMI Control.
On
Enables HDMI Control.
Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and “Standby Sync”.
TV Audio Input
ARC
Off Disables ARC.
On
Enables ARC.
Standby Sync
Off Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
On Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
Auto
Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the
unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals.
Amp
Off Disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones.
On
Enables the audio output from the speakers and headphones.
En 121
Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack or
HDMI OUT 2 jack.
Settings
• The HDMI OUT 1–2 jacks output 2-channel audio signals when the unit is turned on.
■ Standby Through
Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the
unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “On” or “Auto”, you can use the input
selection keys (AV 1–7 and V-AUX) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in
standby mode (the standby indicator on the unit blinks).
Settings
Network
Configures the network settings.
■ Network Connection
Selects the network connection method.
Settings
■ IP Address
Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).
Select whether to use a DHCP server.
Settings
HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2
Off Disables the audio output from the TV.
On Enables the audio output from the TV.
Off
(This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.)
Does not output videos/audio to the TV.
On
Outputs videos/audio to the TV.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
Auto
Outputs videos/audio to the TV. If no signals are detected, the unit is
set to the power saving mode.
Wired
Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network with a
commercially-available network cable (p.35)
Wireless (Wi-Fi)
Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network via
the wireless router (access point). For details on settings, see
“Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.48).
Wireless Direct
Select this option when you want to connect a mobile device to the unit
directly. For details on settings, see “Connecting a mobile device to the
unit directly (Wireless Direct)” (p.54).
DHCP
Off
Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters
manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”.
On
Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network
parameters (such as IP address).
En 122
■ Manual network settings
1
Set “DHCP” to “Off”.
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys
(q/w) to select a value.
4
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
5
To configure another network parameter, repeat steps 2 to 4.
6
To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
7
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ Network Standby
Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network
standby).
Settings
■ MAC Address Filter
Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.
Enables/disables the MAC address filter.
Settings
• AirPlay (p.83) and DMC (p.102) operations are not subject to the MAC address filter.
Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be
permitted access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”.
■ Procedure
1
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MAC Address 1–5” or “MAC Address
6–10” and press ENTER.
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number and press
ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys
(q/w) to select a value.
4
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
5
To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
IP Address Specifies an IP address.
Subnet Mask Specifies a subnet mask.
Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway.
DNS Server (P) Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.
DNS Server (S) Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.
Off Disables the network standby function.
On
Enables the network standby function.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
Auto
Enables the network standby function.
(If “Network Connection” is set to “Wired”, the unit is set to the power
saving mode when the network cable is disconnected.)
Filter
Off Disables the MAC address filter.
On
Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the
MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access to
the unit.
MAC Address 1–10
En 123
■ Network Name
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network
devices.
■ Procedure
1
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
2
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
entry.
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Bluetooth
Configures the
Bluetooth
settings.
■ Bluetooth
Enables/disables the
Bluetooth
function (p.69).
Settings
■ Bluetooth Standby
Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from
Bluetooth
devices (
Bluetooth
standby). If this function is set to “On”, the unit automatically turns
on when a connect operation is performed on the
Bluetooth
device.
Settings
• This setting is not available when “Network Standby” (p.122) is set to “Off”.
Off Disables the
Bluetooth
function.
On
Enables the
Bluetooth
function.
Off Disables the
Bluetooth
standby function.
On
Enables the
Bluetooth
standby function.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
En 124
Multi Zone
Configures the multi zone settings.
■ Main Zone Set
Configures the main zone setting.
Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV
screen.
■ Procedure
1
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
2
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
entry.
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ Zone2 Set
Configures the Zone2 settings.
Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.
If you have connected an external amplifier with volume control to the unit, disable
volume adjustments for Zone2.
Settings
• This setting is not available when “Power Amp Assign” (p.113) is set to “7ch +1ZONE”.
Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.
Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5
dB
• This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.
Zone Rename
Volume
Fixed Disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.
Variable
Enables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.
Max Volume
En 125
Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.
Settings
• This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.
Adjusts the Zone2 audio output timing so that the audio is synchronized with the
video.
Setting range
0
ms to 100 ms (1 ms increments)
Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 output.
Settings
Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main
Zone Set” (p.124).
■ Monitor Out Assign
Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO and
VIDEO) jacks are used.
Settings
Main
, Zone2
• To watch videos played back on a video device on the Zone2 video monitor, you need to connect the video
monitor to the unit in the same way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from
the DVD player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
with a component video cable.
■ HDMI OUT2 Assign
Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used.
Settings
Main
, Zone2
• For details on video/audio signals that can be output to Zone2, see “Multi-zone output” (p.152).
Enables/disables the audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 jack when “HDMI OUT2
Assign” is set to “Zone2”.
■ Party Mode Set
Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.91).
Choice
Target: Zone2
Settings
Initial Volume
Off
Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby
mode.
On
Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB
increments).
(This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max Volume”.)
Audio Delay
Mono
Off Produces stereo sounds in Zone2.
On Produces monaural sounds in Zone2.
Zone Rename
Audio Output
On Enables the audio output.
Off
Disables the audio output (video output only).
Disable Disables switching to the party mode.
Enable
Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party
mode by pressing PARTY on the remote control.
En 126
Function
Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use.
■ Input Assignment
Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input
source.
■ Procedure
Example: assigning the OPTICAL (b) jack to the input source “AV 2”
1
Use the cursor keys to select the cell at the intersection of “AV 2” and “Optical”,
and press ENTER.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “b” and press ENTER.
3
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
• You cannot assign both COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to the same input source.
■ Display Set
Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display.
Adjusts the brightness of the front display.
Setting range
-4 to 0
(higher to brighten)
• The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.128) is set to “On”.
Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is
operated (such as input selection and volume adjustment).
Settings
Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV.
Settings
Dimmer (Front Display)
Short Message
On Displays short messages on the TV screen.
Off Does not display short messages on the TV screen.
Wallpaper
Piano
Displays the piano image on the TV screen when there is no video
signal.
Gray
Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video
signal.
En 127
■ Trigger Output1, Trigger Output2
Sets the TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks to function in sync with the power status of each zone
or input switching.
Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.
Settings
Source
Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input,
switching when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”.
Choices
AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–3, PHONO, TUNER, (network sources), Bluetooth, USB
Settings
Manual
Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger
Mode” is set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function
of the external device connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack.
Choices
Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.
Settings
■ Memory Guard
Prevents accidental changes to the settings.
Settings
• When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen.
Trigger Mode
Power
The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the power status of the
zone specified with “Target Zone”.
Source
The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the input switching in
the zone specified with “Target Zone”.
An electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in
“Source.”
Manual
Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal
transmission with “Manual”.
Low
Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input
source specified in this option.
High
Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source
specified in this option.
Low Stops the electronic signal transmission.
High
Transmits the electronic signal.
Target Zone
Main
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the power status of the main zone.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone.
Zone2
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the power status of Zone2.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the input switching in Zone2.
All
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the power status of the main zone or Zone2.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone or Zone2.
Off
Does not protect the settings.
On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected.
Icon
En 128
ECO
Configures the power supply settings.
■ Auto Power Standby
Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit or if
no input signals are detected for the specified time, the unit will automatically go into
standby mode.
Settings
Default
U.K. and Europe models: 20 Minutes
Other models: Off
• Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the
front display.
■ ECO Mode
Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode.
When the eco mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit’s power consumption.
Settings
• The new setting will take effect after the unit is restarted.
• When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark.
• If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”.
Language
Select an on-screen menu language.
Settings
• The information on the front display is provided in English only.
Off Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically.
20 Minutes
Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit and
no input signals are detected for 20 minutes.
2 Hours, 4 Hours,
8 Hours, 12 Hours
Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for
the specified time. For example, when “2 Hours” is selected, the unit
will switch to standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours.
Off Disables the eco mode.
On Enables the eco mode.
English
English
Japanese
French
German
Spanish
Russian
Italian
Chinese
Français
Deutsch
Español
Italiano
En 129
You can view information about the unit using the TV screen.
1
Press ON SCREEN.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Information” and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an information type.
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Types of information
■ Audio Signal
Displays information about the current audio signal.
• Even when the unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on the
specifications and settings of the playback device.
■ Video Signal
Displays information about the current video signal.
■ HDMI Monitor
Displays information about the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jacks.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to switch between “OUT1” and “OUT2”.
Viewing information about the unit
(Information menu)
Input
Format Audio format of the input signal
Channel
The number of source channels in the input signal
(front/surround/LFE)
For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total
(3 front channels, 2 surround channels, and LFE).
Sampling The number of samples per second of the input digital signal
Bitrate The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal
Dialogue The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal
Output The speaker terminals from which signals are output
HDMI Signal Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output
HDMI Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI)
Analog Resolution
Resolutions of input signal (analog) and signal output at the MONITOR OUT
jacks (analog)
Interface TV interface
Video Resolution Resolutions supported by the TV
En 130
■ Network
Displays the network information on the unit.
(When using wired or wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection)
(When using Wireless Direct)
■ System
Displays the system information on the unit.
• If the unit detects a newer firmware over the network, “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of
the “Information” and “System” icons, and the corresponding message will be displayed in this screen. You
can update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in this screen and following the procedure in “Updating
the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.135).
■ Multi Zone
Displays information about Zone2.
IP Address IP address
Subnet Mask Subnet mask
Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway
DNS Server (P) The IP address of the primary DNS server
DNS Server (S) The IP address of the secondary DNS server
MAC Address (Ethernet)
MAC address
MAC Address (Wi-Fi)
vTuner ID vTuner ID
Network Name Network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.123)
Wired/Wireless The status of the wired or wireless connection
SSID
(When using wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection)
The SSID of the wireless network
SSID The SSID of the wireless network
Security Security method
Security Key Security key
IP Address IP address
Subnet Mask Subnet mask
MAC Address (Wi-Fi) MAC address
Network Connection “Wireless Direct” indication
Remote ID The unit’s remote control ID setting (p.132)
TV Format The unit’s video signal type (p.132)
Speaker Impedance The speaker impedance setting of the unit (p.131)
Tuner Freq. Step
(Asia and General models only)
The FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit (p.132)
System ID System ID number
Firmware Version The version of firmware installed on the unit
Input The input source selected for Zone2
Volume The volume for Zone2
En 131
Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display.
1
Set the unit to standby mode.
2
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE
z
.
3
Press PROGRAM to select an item.
4
Press STRAIGHT to select a setting.
5
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on
again.
The new settings take effect.
ADVANCED SETUP menu items
• Default settings are underlined.
Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.)
Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the
speakers connected.
Settings
Configuring the system settings
(ADVANCED SETUP menu)
MAIN ZONE z STRAIGHT
PROGRAM
Item Function Page
SPEAKER IMP. Changes the speaker impedance setting. 131
REMOTE SENSOR Turns on/off of the remote control sensor on the main unit. 132
REMOTE CON AMP Selects the unit’s remote control ID. 132
TUNER FRQ STEP
(Asia and General models only)
Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting.
132
TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type. 132
MONITOR CHECK Removes the limitation on HDMI video output. 133
4K MODE Selects the HDMI 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signal format. 133
RECOV./BACKUP
Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings
from the backup.
133
INITIALIZE Restores the default settings. 133
FIRM UPDATE Updates the firmware. 134
VERSION Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. 134
6 MIN
Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. You
can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
8
MIN
Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the
unit.
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
ENHANCER
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡8¬MIN
¡SPEAKER¡IMP.
En 132
Turning on/off the remote control sensor
(REMOTE SENSOR)
Turn on/off the remote control sensor on the main unit. While the remote control sensor
is turned off, you cannot control the unit from the remote control.
Settings
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP)
Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default:
ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a
unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.
Settings
ID1
, ID2
■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control
1
To select ID1, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE1 (BD/DVD) together for
3 seconds.
To select ID2, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE2 (TV) together for 3
seconds.
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting
(TUNER FRQ STEP)
(Asia and General models only)
Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or
region.
Settings
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)
Switch the video signal type of the unit so that it matches to the format of your TV.
Settings
NTSC, PAL
Default
U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models: NTSC
Other models: PAL
ON
Turns on the remote control sensor.
OFF Turns off the remote control sensor.
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
ENHANCER
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
SPIMP.-
ON
REMOTESENSOR
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
ENHANCER
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
SPIMP.-
ID1
REMOTECONAMP
FM100/AM10
Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz steps
and AM by 10-kHz steps.
FM50/AM9
Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps
and AM by 9-kHz steps.
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
3
ZONE
2
STEREO
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
FM50/AM9
TUNERFRQSTEP
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
ENHANCER
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
SPIMP.-
NTSC
TVFORMAT
En 133
Removing the limitation on HDMI video output
(MONITOR CHECK)
The unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI
OUT jack.
Disable the monitor check function if you want to specify a resolution in “Resolution”
(p.119) when the unit cannot detect the TV’s resolution or when you want to specify a
different resolution than the detected resolution.
Settings
• Reset to “YES” if the unit becomes inoperable because video from the unit cannot be displayed on the TV
after “MONITOR CHECK” has been set to “SKIP”.
Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE)
Selects the format of signals input/output at the unit when HDMI 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz)
compatible TV and playback device are connected to the unit.
Settings
• When “MODE 1” is selected, use a high-speed HDMI cable that supports 18 Gbps.
Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP)
Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from the backup.
■ Backup/recovery procedure
1
Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “BACKUP” or “RECOVERY” and press INFO
to start the process.
Choices
Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE)
Restores the default settings for the unit.
Choices
YES
Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a
resolution supported by the TV only.)
SKIP
Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a
specified resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.)
MODE 1
Inputs/outputs 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signals in 4:4:4, 4:2:2 or 4:2:0 format.
(4:2:0 format only for VIDEO AUX [HDMI IN] jack)
Depending on the connected device or HDMI cables, video may not
be displayed correctly. In this case, select “MODE 2”.
MODE 2
Inputs/outputs 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signals in 4:2:0 format.
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
ENHANCER
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
SPIMP.-
YES
MONITORCHECK
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
ENHANCER
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
SPIMP.-
MODE2
4KMODE
BACKUP Creates backup of the settings of the unit in the internal memory.
RECOVERY
Recovers the settings of the unit from the backup (available only when
backup has been created).
Note
• Do not turn off the unit during the recovery process. Otherwise, the settings may not be restored
correctly.
• The backup does not contain user information (such as user accounts and passwords).
VIDEO Restores the default settings for video configurations.
ALL Restores the default settings for the unit.
CANCEL Does not perform an initialization.
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
ENHANCER
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
SPIMP.-
BACKUP
RECOV./BACKUP
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
ENHANCER
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
SPIMP.-
CANCEL
INITIALIZE
En 134
Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE)
New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be
released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from the Yamaha website. If the unit
is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For
details, refer to the information supplied with updates.
■ Firmware update procedure
Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure
you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware.
1
Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to
start firmware update.
Choices
• If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after
ON SCREEN is pressed. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in
“Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.135).
Checking the firmware version (VERSION)
Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.
• You can also check the firmware version in “System” (p.130) in the “Information” menu.
• It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed.
USB Update the firmware using a USB memory device.
NETWORK Update the firmware via the network.
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
ENHANCER
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
SPIMP.-
USB
FIRMUPDATE
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
ENHANCER
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
SPIMP.-
x.xx
VERSION
En 135
New firmware that provides additional features or product
improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected
to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and
update it.
• You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.134).
A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed
after ON SCREEN is pressed.
1
Read the on-screen description.
2
To start the firmware update, use the cursor keys to
select “START” and press ENTER.
The on-screen display turns off.
3
If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!”
appears on the front display, press MAIN ZONE z
on the front panel.
The firmware update is complete.
• If you want to update the firmware later, select “CLOSE” in Step 2. “!” (exclamation
mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and a
message will be displayed in the “System” screen (p.130). You can update the
unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in the “System” screen.
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network
Note
• Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during
firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more
(depending on your Internet connection speed).
• If the unit is connected to the wireless network, network update may not be
possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case,
update the firmware using the USB memory device (p.134).
• For details on update, visit the Yamaha website.
Information
icon
Message
System Icon
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
123
PHONO
SUR. DECODE
USB
NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAND
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
ON
SC
REE
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUS
I
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
BL
U
ET
OO
T
H
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
PH
ON
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
USB
NET
ENTER
Cursor keys
En 136
APPENDIX
The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound
balance...
If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use “Auto Setup” to
optimize the speaker settings again (p.39). If you want to adjust the speaker settings
manually, use “Manual Setup” in the “Setup” menu (p.113).
Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the
volume control...
If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the
volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or
speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum
volume level for the unit in advance (p.117). You can also set the maximum volume for
Zone2 (p.124).
I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning
on the unit...
By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically
applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the
volume to be applied when the receiver is turned on (p.118). You can also set the initial
volume for Zone2 (p.125).
We are bothered by volume differences when switching
between input sources…
You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in
the “Option” menu (p.100).
I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at
all...
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.152). After
connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit,
enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This
setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your
system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback
devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device.
I want to turn off the on-screen messages displayed during
operations...
By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when the unit is operated
(such as input selection and volume adjustment). If the short messages bother you
when you are watching movies or sports, configure “Short Message” (p.126) in the
“Setup” menu to turn off the short messages.
I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings...
You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by
utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.127).
The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another
Yamaha product as well as the unit...
When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another
Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens,
register different remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each
remote control (p.132).
I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device
even when the unit is in standby mode...
If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output
videos/audio played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in
standby mode. To use this function, set “Standby Through” (p.121) in the “Setup” menu
to “On” or “Auto”. You can also switch the input source using the remote control of the
unit when this function is enabled.
Frequently asked questions
En 137
Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly.
If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center.
First, check the following:
a The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets
securely.
b The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on.
c The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device.
Power, system and remote control
Troubleshooting
Problem Cause Remedy
The power does not turn on.
The protection circuitry has been activated three times
consecutively. When the unit is in this condition, the standby
indicator on the unit blinks if you try to turn on the power.
As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your
nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.
The power does not turn off.
The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop
in the power supply voltage.
Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to
initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable
from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.)
The power turns off (standby mode) immediately. The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted.
Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and
speakers (p.21).
The unit enters standby mode automatically.
The sleep timer worked. Turn on the unit and start playback again.
The auto-standby function kicked in because the unit was not used
for the specified time.
To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup”
menu to “Off” (p.128).
The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.131).
The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short
circuit.
Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and
speakers (p.21).
The protection circuitry has been activated because the volume of
the unit is too high.
Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to
“Off” (p.128).
The unit is not reacting.
The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop
in the power supply voltage.
Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to
initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable
from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.)
En 138
Audio
The unit cannot be controlled using the remote
control.
The unit is out of the operating range. Use the remote control within the operating range (p.5).
The batteries are weak. Replace with new batteries.
The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or
strong lighting.
Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit.
(China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only)
The remote control is set to control external devices.
Press RECEIVER to set the remote control to control the unit (the key lights up in
orange).
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.
Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.132).
Problem Cause Remedy
Problem Cause Remedy
No sound.
Another input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input.
Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio
format of the input signal, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.129).
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The volume cannot be increased.
The maximum volume is set. Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.117).
A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit.
No sound is coming from a specific speaker.
The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel. To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.129).
The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the
speaker.
To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.116).
Audio output of the speaker is disabled.
Perform “Auto Setup” (p.39) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change
the speaker settings (p.113).
The volume of the speaker is set too low.
Perform “Auto Setup” (p.39) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the
speaker volume (p.115).
The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is
defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable.
The speaker is malfunctioning.
To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be
malfunctioning.
En 139
No sound is coming from the subwoofer.
The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency
signals.
To check if the subwoofer is working properly, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu
(p.116).
Subwoofer output is disabled.
Perform “Auto Setup” (p.39) or set “Subwoofer” in the “Setup” menu to “Use”
(p.115).
The volume of the subwoofer is too low. Adjust the volume on the subwoofer.
The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function. Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level.
No sound from the playback device (connected to
the unit with HDMI).
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).
Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from
the SPEAKERS terminals.
In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.120).
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds
the limit.
Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is
used).
The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.
Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the
speakers connected to the unit.
A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with
an HDMI cable.
Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.28).
(If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable)
The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection.
Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack
(p.120).
(If you are trying to use ARC)
ARC is disabled on the unit or TV.
Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.120). Also, enable ARC on the TV.
Only the front speakers work on multichannel
audio.
The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as
PCM) only.
To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.129). If necessary,
change the digital audio output setting on the playback device.
Noise/hum is heard.
The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device. Move the unit further away from the device.
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The sound is distorted.
The volume of the unit is too high.
Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to
“Off” (p.128).
A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks.
The sound is interrupted.
If the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2, HDMI
audio output may be interrupted during some zone operations due
to internal circuitry switching.
For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back
videos/audio” (p.88).
Problem Cause Remedy
En 140
Video
Problem Cause Remedy
No video.
Another input source is selected on the unit. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV. Set “MONITOR CHECK” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “YES” (p.133).
The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is
defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
No video from the playback device (connected to
the unit with HDMI).
The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit.
To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Video
Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.129). For information about video signals
supported by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.154).
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).
Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
If you want to play back contents that require HDCP 2.2-compatible devices, both
the TV and playback device must support HDCP 2.2.
The playback device that supports HDCP 2.2 is connected to the
VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack.
To play back contents that require HDCP 2.2-compatible devices, connect the
playback device to the HDMI (AV 1–7) jack (p.30).
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over
the limit.
Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV.
The TV is not connected to the unit via HDMI.
You can display the menu of the unit on the TV only when they are connected with
an HDMI cable. If necessary, use an HDMI cable to connect them (p.28).
Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
The video is interrupted.
(If you are using 2 TVs in the main zone)
Another TV is turned off when “HDMI OUT 1+2” is selected.
Select “HDMI OUT 1” or “HDMI OUT 2” to output the signals only to the TV you
are using (p.56).
(If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2)
HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone
operations due to internal circuitry switching.
For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back
videos/audio” (p.88).
En 141
FM/AM radio
Problem Cause Remedy
FM radio reception is weak or noisy.
There is multi-path interference. Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio
reception (p.100).
Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element
antenna.
AM radio reception is weak or noisy.
The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors,
thermostats, or other electrical equipment.
It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor
AM antenna.
Radio stations cannot be selected automatically.
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Select the station manually (p.65).
Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element
antenna.
The AM radio signal is weak.
Adjust the AM antenna orientation.
Select the station manually (p.65).
Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with
the supplied AM antenna.
AM radio stations cannot be registered as
presets.
Auto Preset has been used.
Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations only. Register AM radio stations
manually (p.66).
En 142
Bluetooth
Problem Cause Remedy
A Bluetooth connection cannot be established.
The
Bluetooth
function of the unit is disabled. Enable the
Bluetooth
function (p.123).
Another
Bluetooth
device is already connected to the unit.
Terminate the current
Bluetooth
connection and then establish a new connection
(p.69).
The unit and the
Bluetooth
device are too far apart. Move the
Bluetooth
device closer to the unit.
There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that
outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby.
Move the unit away from those devices.
The
Bluetooth
device does not support A2DP. Use a
Bluetooth
device that supports A2DP.
The connection information registered on the
Bluetooth
device is
not working for some reason.
Delete the connection information on the
Bluetooth
device, and then establish a
connection between the
Bluetooth
device and the unit again (p.69).
No sound is produced, or the sound is
interrupted during playback.
The volume of the
Bluetooth
device is set too low. Turn up the volume of the
Bluetooth
device.
The
Bluetooth
device is not set to send audio signals to the unit. Switch the audio output of the
Bluetooth
device to the unit.
The
Bluetooth
connection has been terminated.
Establish a
Bluetooth
connection between the
Bluetooth
device and the unit again
(p.69).
The unit and the
Bluetooth
device are too far apart. Move the
Bluetooth
device closer to the unit.
There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that
outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby.
Move the unit away from those devices.
En 143
USB and network
Problem Cause Remedy
The unit does not detect the USB device.
The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely. Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again.
The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32. Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format.
Folders and files in the USB device cannot be
viewed.
The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption. Use a USB device without an encryption function.
The files in the USB device cannot be played back
continuously.
Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.
If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files)
during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files
in the playback folder.
The network feature does not function.
The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained
properly.
Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup”
menu to “On” on the unit (p.121). If you want to configure the network parameters
manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other
network devices in your network (p.121).
The unit cannot connect to the Internet via a
wireless router (access point).
The wireless router (access point) is turned off. Turn on the wireless router.
The unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart. Place the unit and the wireless router (access point) closer to each other.
There is an obstacle between the unit and the wireless router
(access point).
Move the unit and the wireless router (access point) in a location where there are
no obstacles between them.
Wireless network is not found.
Microwave ovens or other wireless devices in your neighborhood
might disturb the wireless communication.
Turn off these devices.
Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of the
wireless router (access point).
Check the firewall setting of the wireless router (access point).
The unit does not detect the PC.
The media sharing setting is not correct.
Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music
contents are shared (p.76).
Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access
of the unit to your PC.
Check the settings of security software installed on your PC.
The unit and PC are not in the same network.
Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the
unit and the PC to the same network.
The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.
In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or
specify the MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (p.122).
The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played
back.
The files are not supported by the unit or the media server.
Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For
information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music
stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.76).
The files in the PC cannot be played back
continuously.
Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.
If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files)
during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files
in the playback folder.
En 144
The Internet radio cannot be played.
The selected Internet radio station is currently not available.
There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have
been stopped. Try the station later or select another station.
The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting
silence.
Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try
the station later or select another station.
Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your
network devices (such as the router).
Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be
played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station.
The port number varies depending on the radio station.
The iPod does not recognize the unit when using
AirPlay.
The unit is connected to a multiple SSID router.
Access to the unit might be restricted by the network separation function on the
router. Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit.
The application for smartphone/tablet “AV
CONTROLLER” does not detect the unit.
The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network.
Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the
unit and smartphone/tablet to the same network.
The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.
In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or
specify the MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the
unit (p.122).
Firmware update via the network is failed. It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network. Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.134).
Problem Cause Remedy
En 145
Error indications on the front display
Message Cause Remedy
Access denied Access to the PC is denied.
Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared
(p.76).
Access error
The unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
The unit cannot access the iPod. Turn off the iPod and turn it on again.
The connected iPod is not supported by the unit. Use an iPod supported by the unit (p.70).
There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit.
Make sure your router and modem are turned on.
Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.35).
Check SP Wires The speaker cables short circuit. Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly.
Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
No content There are no playable files in the selected folder. Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit.
No device
The unit cannot detect the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
The unit cannot detect the iPod. Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again.
Please wait The unit is preparing for connecting to the network.
Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn
it on again.
RemID Mismatch
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.
Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.132).
Remote Off
The unit cannot be operated from remote control because the
remote control sensor on the main unit is turned off.
Use the controls on the front panel. To use the remote control, set “REMOTE SENSOR” in the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “ON” (p.132).
Unable to play
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the USB device for
some reasons.
Check the song data. If it cannot be played on another device, the song data may be defective.
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some
reason.
Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be
defective.
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some
reason.
Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the
formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.76). If
the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with
heavy traffic.
USB Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
Version error Firmware update is failed. Update the firmware again.
En 146
Audio information
■ Audio decoding format
Dolby Atmos
Introduced first in the cinema, Dolby Atmos brings a revolutionary sense of dimension and immersion to the
Home Theater experience. Dolby Atmos is an adaptable and scalable object based format that reproduces
audio as independent sounds (or objects) that can be accurately positioned and move dynamically
throughout the 3 dimensional listening space during playback. A key ingredient of Dolby Atmos is the
introduction of a height plane of sound above the listener.
Dolby Atmos Stream
Dolby Atmos content will be delivered to your Dolby Atmos enabled AV receiver via Dolby Digital Plus or
Dolby TrueHD on Blu-ray Disc, downloadable files and streaming media. A Dolby Atmos stream contains
special metadata that describes the positioning of sounds within the room. This object audio data is
decoded by a Dolby Atmos AV receiver and scaled for optimum playback through Home Theater speaker
systems of every size and configuration.
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports
5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with Dolby
Digital Surround EX. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound.
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports
7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems
that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
Dolby Enabled Speaker
A convenient alternative to speakers built into the ceiling, products utilizing Dolby speaker technology
employ the ceiling above you as a reflective surface for reproducing audio in the height plane above the
listener. Dolby enabled speakers feature a unique upward firing driver and special signal processing that
can be built into a conventional speaker, or a standalone speaker module, minimally impacting the overall
speaker system footprint while providing an immersive listening experience during Dolby Atmos and Dolby
surround playback.
Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available:
“Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Dolby Pro Logic IIx enables 7-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There are three
modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for
game sources (for 2-channel sources only).
Dolby Surround
Dolby surround is a next generation surround technology that intelligently up mixes stereo; 5.1 and 7.1
content for playback through your surround speaker system. Dolby surround is compatible with traditional
speaker layouts, as well as Dolby Atmos enabled playback systems that employ in-ceiling speakers or
products with Dolby speaker technology.
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a
high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to
eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This
technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
DSD (Direct Stream Digital)
DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super
Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate (such as 2.8224 MHz and 5.6448
MHz). The highest frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB.
This technology offers better audio quality than that used for CDs.
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This
format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital
Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc.
DTS Digital Surround
DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
DTS-ES
DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This
decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a
surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a
discrete surround back channel is recorded.
DTS Express
DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher
compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is
developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the
existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on
BD (Blu-ray discs).
Glossary
En 147
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home
theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to
eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This
technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS Neo:6
DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music
mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete
full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound.
FLAC
FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio
formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality.
MP3
One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this
compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data
quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
MPEG-4 AAC
An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming
services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality
than MP3.
PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)
PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This
technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called
Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs).
Sampling frequency/Quantization bit
Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal
is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”.
• Sampling frequency
Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate.
When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider.
• Quantization bit
The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a
numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more
accurate.
WAV
Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by
converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other
compression methods.
WMA (Windows Media Audio)
One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic
technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of
compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
■ Others
Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp)
A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification
connection, the unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a
consequence, the tweeter and woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference.
LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This
channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio
effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio.
Lip sync
Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an
increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag
between audio and video output.
En 148
HDMI and video information
Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and
the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because
each of these signals is independent.
Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined
and transmitted with a single cable.
Deep Color
Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available
colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems
process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology
allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate
on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors.
HDCP
HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) is a digital copy protection form that prevents copying of
digital contents as it travels across connections (such as HDMI).
HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video
signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable
without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a
secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at
“http://www.hdmi.org/”.
x.v.Color
“x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than
sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with
the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid,
natural images.
Network information
SSID
SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a particular wireless LAN access point.
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) is a technology that allows an electronic device to exchange data or connect to the
Internet wirelessly using radio waves. Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminating the complexity of making
connections with network cables by using wireless connection. Only products that complete Wi-Fi Alliance
interoperability tests can carry the “Wi-Fi Certified” trademark.
WPS
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy
establishment of a wireless home network.
En 149
Yamaha technologies
CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor)
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is
best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions
(such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are
differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP,
Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own
home.
CINEMA DSP 3D
The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA
DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the
accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room.
Compressed Music Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music
formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound
system.
SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for
headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound
programs can be enjoyed on headphones.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with
front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic
sound field in a listening room.
Virtual CINEMA FRONT
Virtual CINEMA FRONT allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers
with front surround speakers. Even if the surround speakers placed in the front, the unit creates the realistic
sound field in a listening room.
Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS)
Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without
front presence speakers. Even if the front presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D
sound field in your room.
Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS)
Virtual Surround Back Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround back
speakers. Even if the surround back speakers are not connected, the unit adds a sense of depth to the rear
sound filed of CINEMA DSP.
En 150
■ Supported devices
❑ Bluetooth device
• The unit supports
Bluetooth
devices that support A2DP or AVRCP.
•A
Bluetooth
device may not be detected by the unit or some feature may not be
compatible, depending on the model.
❑ USB devices
• The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (e.g., flash memories or portable
audio players) using FAT16 or FAT32 format.
• Do not connect devices other than USB mass storage class devices (such as USB
chargers or USB hubs), PCs, card readers, an external HDD, etc.
• USB devices with encryption cannot be used.
• Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer of
the USB storage device.
❑ iPod
• An iPod may not be detected by the unit or some features may not be compatible,
depending on the model or software version of the iPod.
❑ AirPlay
AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac with OS X
Mountain Lion or later and Mac and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later.
(as of May 2015)
■ File formats
❑ USB/PC (NAS)
* Linear PCM format only
• To play back FLAC files stored on a PC or NAS, you need to install server software that supports sharing of
FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files.
• Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back.
Supported devices and file formats
Made for.
iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6, iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, iPhone 4s, iPhone 4,
iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G
iPod touch (2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th generation)
iPod nano (2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th and 7th generation)
(as of May 2015)
File
Sampling
frequency (kHz)
Quantization
bitrate (bit)
Bitrate
The number
of channels
Gapless
playback
WAV *
32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
176.4/192
16/24 — 2 ✔
MP3 32/44.1/48 — 8 to 320 2 —
WMA 32/44.1/48 — 8 to 320 2 —
MPEG-4 AAC 32/44.1/48 — 8 to 320 2 —
FLAC
32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
176.4/192
16/24 — 2 ✔
ALAC 32/44.1/48/88.2/96 16/24 — 2 ✔
AIFF
32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
176.4/192
16/24 — 2 ✔
DSD 2.8 MHz/5.6 MHz 1 — 2 —
En 151
Video signal flow
Video signals input from a video device to the unit are
output to a TV as shown below.
■ Video conversion table
• You can select the resolution and the aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing in “Video Mode” (p.119) in the “Setup” menu.
• The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably.
HDMI HDMI
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI
VIDEO VIDEO VIDEOVIDEO
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
m: Available
HDMI out COMPONENT VIDEO out
VIDEO
out
Resolution
480i/
576i
480p/
576p
720p 1080i 1080p 4K
480i/
576i
480p/
576p
720p 1080i 1080p
480i/
576i
HDMI in
480i/576i mmmmmm
480p/576p mmmmm
720p mmmm
1080i mmmm
1080p/
50, 60 Hz
mmmm
1080p/24 Hz
mm
4K m
COMPONENT
VIDEO in
480i/576i mmmmmmm
480p/576p mmmmm m
720p mmmm m
1080i mmmm m
1080p m
VIDEO in 480i/576i mmmmmm m
Video device The unit TV
HDMI outHDMI in
COMPONENT
VIDEO in
COMPONENT
VIDEO out
VIDEO outVIDEO in
En 152
Multi-zone output
■ Audio output
m: Available
*1 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.125) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” (Audio Output: On)
*2 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input
source selected in the main zone is selected)
Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.125) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”
*3 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input
source selected in the main zone is selected)
*4 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input
*5 To play back DSD audio in Zone2, select “Main Zone Sync” as the Zone2 input with the web control (p.93)
or use the party mode (p.91).
■ Video output
m: Available
*6 Available when “Monitor Out Assign” (p.125) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”
*7 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.125) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”
HDMI Control
HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that
supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as
power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback
devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with
an HDMI cable.
For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV” (p.28) and “Connecting video
devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.30).
Operations available from the TV’s remote control
• Standby synchronization
• Volume control including mute
• Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner
• Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device
• Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker)
(Example)
Operations available from the unit’s remote control
• Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene
selection (p.57)
• Switching the TV input to display the on-screen menu (when ON SCREEN is pressed)
• Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) using the external
device operation keys
Using the unit’s
internal amplifier
(
p.25
)
Using an external amplifier (p.87)
Zone2 Out
In
EXTRA SP jacks ZONE OUT jacks
HDMI OUT 2
(ZONE OUT) jack
(*1)
Digital audio (HDMI) m (*2) m (*2) m (*3)
Digital audio
(COAXIAL/OPTICAL)
m (*4) m (*4)
Analog audio (AUDIO) mm
USB (including iPod) (*5) mm
Network sources (*5) mm
TUNER mm
Zone2 Out
In
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks (*6)
HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT)
jack (*7)
COMPONENT VIDEO
VIDEO
HDMI video m
Component video m
Composite video m
Information on HDMI
HDMI Control
Turn off the TV
The unit turns off
(standby)
HDMI Control
Playback device
also turns off
En 153
(Example)
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after
connecting the TV and playback devices.
For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.
• This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system.
1
Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.
2
Configure the settings of the unit.
a Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
b Press ON SCREEN.
c Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
d Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”.
e Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER.
f Use the cursor keys to select “On”.
g Press ON SCREEN.
3
Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI
Control-compatible BD/DVD players).
4
Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and
playback devices.
5
Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.
6
Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
7
Check the followings.
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected.
If not, select the input source manually.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
8
Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning
off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 3 and plugging in the TV again in
Step 4. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices
exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use.
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
the TV.
• We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works
more effectively.
• We do not assure the operation of all HDMI Control-compatible devices.
HDMI Control
Press SCENE (BD/DVD)
Turns on and displays
video from the playback
device
HDMI Control
Playback starts
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
DI
S
PLA
Y
RETURN
O
PTI
ON
ON SCREEN
Cursor keys
ENTER
En 154
Audio Return Channel (ARC)
ARC allows you to input TV audio to the unit with the HDMI cable which transmits video
signal to the TV.
Check the following after the HDMI Control settings.
1
Select a TV program with the TV remote control.
2
Check that the input source of the unit will be automatically switched
to “AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
If you cannot hear the TV audio, check the following:
– “ARC” (p.120) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”.
– The HDMI cable is connected to the ARC-compatible HDMI jack (HDMI jack
marked “ARC”) on the TV.
Some HDMI jack on the TV is not compatible with ARC. For details, refer to the
instruction manual for the TV.
• If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.120) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use an
audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable) to input TV audio to the unit (p.28).
• When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.
• “AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the
AUDIO 1 jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.120) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input
assignment. To use the SCENE function (p.58), you also need to change the input assignment for
SCENE (TV).
HDMI signal compatibility
Audio signals
Video signals
The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending
on the type of the DVD player.
• The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction
manual for each device.
• To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device
outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device).
For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device.
Audio signal type Audio signal format Compatible media (example)
2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio
Multichannel Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc),
HD DVD
DSD 2 to 5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD
Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video
Bitstream
(High definition audio)
Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,
DTS-HD Master Audio,
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,
DTS Express
BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD
• VGA • 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• 480i/60 Hz • 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• 576i/50 Hz • 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• 480p/60 Hz • 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• 576p/50 Hz
En 155
• The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections.
Reference diagram (rear panel)
HDMI OUT
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
1
2
HDMI
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
(HDCP2.2)
AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
IN OUT
REMOTE
R
L
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4
AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3
(2 TV)
(1 BD/DVD)
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
3
COAXIAL COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
1
PHONO
GND
AC IN
FM
75Ω
ANTENNA
(
4 RADIO
)
OPTICAL
1
2
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2
SPEAKERS
CENTER FRONTSURROUND BACKSURROUND
BI–AMP
ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/
R
5
6
L R R RL L L
SINGLE
AM
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
FRONT
SURROUND SUR. BACK
(SINGLE)
EXTRA SP
RS-232C
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
NETWORK
( 3
NET
)
Y
P
B
P
R
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
YP
R
P
B
AV 1
COMPONENT VIDEO
A
AV 3
C
AV 2
B
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
Y
WIRELESS
(HDCP2.2)
(U.S.A. model)
En 156
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby
Atmos, Dolby Surround, Pro Logic, Surround EX, and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under
license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, DTS-HD, the Symbol, &
DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks, and
DTS-HD Master Audio is a trademark of DTS, Inc. © DTS, Inc. All
Rights Reserved.
“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic
accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod or
iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet
Apple performance standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its
compliance with safety and regulatory standards.
Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone may
affect wireless performance.
iTunes, AirPlay, iPhone, iPod, iPod nano, iPod touch, and Safari are
trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.
The Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos are registered trademarks
owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Yamaha
Corporation is under license.
Bluetooth protocol stack (Blue SDK)
Copyright 1999-2014 OpenSynergy GmbH
All rights reserved. All unpublished rights reserved.
This receiver supports network connections.
HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the
United States and other countries.
x.v.Color™
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Digital Living Network Alliance. All rights reserved.
Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.
Windows™
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and other countries.
Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player
are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Android™ Google Play™
Android and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
Blu-ray is a trademark of the Blu-ray Disc Association.
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Logo is a certification mark of the Wi-Fi
Alliance.
The Wi-Fi Protected Setup Identifier Mark is a mark of the Wi-Fi
Alliance.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
Google Noto Fonts
Copyright © 2012 Google Inc. All rights reserved.
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the “License”);
you may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
distributed under the License is distributed on an “AS IS” BASIS,
WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either
express or implied.
See the License for the specific language governing permissions
and limitations under the License.
Trademarks
Explanations regarding GPL
This product utilizes GPL/LGPL open-source software in some
sections. You have the right to obtain, duplicate, modify, and
redistribute this open-source code only. For information on
GPL/LGPL open source software, how to obtain it, and the
GPL/LGPL license, refer to the Yamaha Corporation website
(http://download.yamaha.com/sourcecodes/musiccast/).
En 157
Input jacks
• Analog Audio
Audio x 9 (AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–3, PHONO, V-AUX)
• Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz)
Optical x 3 (AV 3, AUDIO 1–2)
Coaxial x 3 (AV 1–2, AUDIO 3)
•Video
Composite x 5 (AV 1–4, V-AUX)
Component x 3 (AV 1–3)
• HDMI Input
HDMI x 8 (AV 1–7, V-AUX)
•Others
USB x 1 (USB2.0)
NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T)
Output jacks
• Analog Audio
- Speaker Out x 9 (7 ch) (FRONT L/R
, CENTER,
SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R, EXTRA SP L/R
*1
)
*1 Note: Assignment is possible [ZONE2, F.PRESENCE,
BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)]
- Pre Out x 7 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,
SURROUND BACK L/R)
- Subwoofer Out x 2 (SUBWOOFER 1–2, mono)
- ZONE OUT x 1 (ZONE 2)
- Headphone x 1
•Video
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
- Composite x 1
- Component x 1
• HDMI Output
HDMI OUT x 2 (HDMI OUT 1–2*)
* barter to ZONE OUT (ZONE2)
Other jacks
• YPAO MIC x 1
• REMOTE IN x 1
• REMOTE OUT x 1
• TRIGGER OUT x 2
• RS-232C x 1
HDMI
• HDMI features: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync, ARC
(Audio Return Channel), 3D, 4K Ultra HD
• Video Format (Repeater Mode)
-VGA
- 480i/60 Hz
- 576i/50 Hz
- 480p/60 Hz
- 576p/50 Hz
- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
- 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• Audio Format
-Dolby Atmos
-Dolby TrueHD
- Dolby Digital Plus
- Dolby Digital
- DTS-HD Master Audio
- DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
- DTS Express
-DTS
- DSD 2-ch to 6-ch
- PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit)
• Content Protection: HDCP compatible
(HDMI [AV 1–7]: HDCP 2.2 compatible)
• Link Function: CEC supported
TUNER
• Analog Tuner
[U.K. and Europe models]
FM/AM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER)
[Other models]
FM/AM x 1 (TUNER)
USB
• Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory
• Current Supply Capacity: 1 A
Bluetooth
• Sink Function
Source Device to AVR (ex. Smartphone/Tablet)
• Capable of Play/Stop Operation from Sink Device
•
Bluetooth
Version .................................................Ver. 2.1+EDR
• Supported Profile ................................................ A2DP, AVRCP
• Supported Codec .....................................................SBC, AAC
• Wireless Output
............................................. Bluetooth
Class 2
• Maximum Communication Distance .......................10 m (33 ft)
Network
• PC Client Function
• Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5
• AirPlay supported
• Internet Radio
• WiFi function
- Capable of WPS by PIN Method and Push-Button-Method
- Capable of sharing with iOS devices by wireless connection
and USB connection
- Capable of Direct Connection with Mobile Device
- Available Security Method: WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed
Mode
- Radio Frequency Band: 2.4GHz
- Wireless Network Standard: IEEE 802.11 b/g/n
Specifications
En 158
Compatible Decoding Formats
• Decoding Format
-Dolby Atmos
- Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus
- Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX
- DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,
DTS Express
- DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1
- DTS Digital Surround
• Post Decoding Format
- Dolby Pro Logic
- Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie,
Dolby Pro Logic II Game
- Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie,
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game
- Dolby Surround
- DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema
Audio Section
• Rated Output Power (2-channel driven)
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 6 )
Front L/R ..........................................................120 W+120 W
Center .......................................................................... 120 W
Surround L/R....................................................120 W+120 W
Surround Back L/R ..........................................120 W+120 W
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 )
Front L/R ..........................................................110 W+110 W
Center .......................................................................... 110 W
Surround L/R....................................................110 W+110 W
Surround Back L/R ..........................................110 W+110 W
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 )
Front L/R ..........................................................120 W+120 W
Center .......................................................................... 120 W
Surround L/R....................................................120 W+120 W
Surround Back L/R ..........................................120 W+120 W
• Rated Output Power (1-channel driven)
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 )
Front L/R..................................................................140 W/ch
Center......................................................................140 W/ch
Surround L/R ...........................................................140 W/ch
Surround Back L/R ..................................................140 W/ch
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 )
Front L/R..................................................................135 W/ch
Center .....................................................................135 W/ch
Surround L/R ...........................................................135 W/ch
Surround Back L/R ..................................................135 W/ch
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 )
Front L/R [U.K. and Europe models].......................170 W/ch
• Maximum Effective Output Power (1-channel driven)
(1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 )
Front L/R..................................................................170 W/ch
Center......................................................................170 W/ch
Surround L/R ...........................................................170 W/ch
Surround Back L/R ..................................................170 W/ch
(1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 )
Front L/R..................................................................165 W/ch
Center......................................................................165 W/ch
Surround L/R ...........................................................165 W/ch
Surround Back L/R ..................................................165 W/ch
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
Front L/R (8/6/4/2 )...................................135/165/210/280 W
• Damping Factor
Front L/R, 1 kHz, 8 ............................................. 150 or more
• Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance
PHONO (1 kHz, 100 W/8 )................................ 3.5 mV/47 k
AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 ) ...................... 200 mV/47 k
• Maximum Input Signal
PHONO (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .............................. 60 mV or more
AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ........................ 2.4 V or more
• Output Level / Output Impedance
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER (50 Hz)......................................... 1.0 V/470
Except SUBWOOFER (1 kHz)............................. 1.0 V/470
ZONE OUT ............................................................. 1.0 V/470
• Headphone Impedance....................................... 16 or more
• Frequency Response
AUDIO 2 etc. (10 Hz to 100 kHz)................................ +0/-3 dB
• RIAA Equalization Deviation
PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) ......................................... 0±0.5 dB
• Total Harmonic Distortion
PHONO to PreOut (1 kHz, 1 V) ........................... 0.04% or less
AUDIO 2 etc. to Speaker Out (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 55 W/ 8 )
............................................................................ 0.04% or less
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
(Pure Direct, Input 1 k Shorted, Speaker Out)
PHONO .............................................................. 95 dB or more
AUDIO 2 etc..................................................... 110 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Speaker Out ....................................................... 150 µV or less
• Channel Separation
(Input 1 k Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)
PHONO ....................................................75 dB/60 dB or more
AUDIO 2 etc.............................................75 dB/60 dB or more
• Volume Control
Main Zone ................ MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)
Zone2 ....................... MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)
En 159
• Tone Control Characteristics
Main Zone
Bass Boost/Cut.........................±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step)
Bass Turnover............................................................. 350 Hz
Treble Boost/Cut ..................... ±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step)
Treble Turnover .......................................................... 3.5 kHz
Zone2
Bass Boost/Cut.........................±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step)
Bass Turnover............................................................. 350 Hz
Treble Boost/Cut ..................... ±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step)
Treble Turnover .......................................................... 3.5 kHz
• Filter Characteristics
(fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back: Small)
..................................................................................12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer)..................................................... 24 dB/oct.
Video Section
• Video Signal Type....................................... NTSC/PAL/SECAM
• Video Signal Level
Composite ............................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Component
Y.......................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Pb/Pr ................................................................ 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω
• Video Maximum Input Level .......................... 1.5 Vp-p or more
• Signal to Noise Ratio ..........................................60 dB or more
• Monitor Out Frequency Response
Component (MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT)
............................................................5 Hz to 100 MHz, ±3 dB
FM Section
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ..............87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz
[Asia and General models]
.......................................87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[Other models].................................87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
• 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.)
Mono................................................................. 3 µV (20.8 dBf)
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo ..........................................................65 dB/64 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo ............................................................ 0.5%/0.6%
• Antenna Input................................................75 Ω unbalanced
AM section
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .................. 530 kHz to 1710 kHz
[Asia and General models] ..... 530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models] ........................................ 531 kHz to 1611 kHz
General
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ..........................AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[General model] ............AC 110 to 120/220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
[China model]..................................................AC 220 V, 50 Hz
[Korea model] .................................................AC 220 V, 60 Hz
[Australia model] .............................................AC 240 V, 50 Hz
[U.K. and Europe models] ..............................AC 230 V, 50 Hz
[Asia model] ....................................AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
• Power Consumption
[U.S.A. model].................................................................450 W
[Canada and Korea models]...........................................380 W
[Other models] ................................................................420 W
• Standby Power Consumption
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby Off
......................................................................................... 0.1 W
HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals),
Network Standby Off........................................................ 1.4 W
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby On,
Bluetooth Standby Off
Wired............................................................................. 2.1 W
Wireless (Wi-Fi) ............................................................. 2.1 W
Wireless Direct .............................................................. 2.2 W
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off,
Network Standby On (Wired), Bluetooth Standby On
......................................................................................... 1.9 W
HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals),
Network Standby On (Wireless Direct), Bluetooth Standby On
......................................................................................... 2.9 W
• Maximum Power Consumption
[Asia and General models]...........................................1190 W
• Dimensions (W x H x D)
......................435 x 182 x 439 mm (17-1/8” x 7-1/8” x 17-1/4”)
* Including legs and protrusions
• Reference Dimensions (W x H x D)
(with wireless antenna upright)
......................435 x 247 x 439 mm (17-1/8” x 9-3/4” x 17-1/4”)
• Weight ...........................................................14.9 kg (32.8 lbs)
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
En 160
Symbols
Exclamation mark (!) 130, 135
Lock icon (o) 127
Numerics
2.1-channel system 18
2ch Stereo 62
4K Ultra HD 154
5.1-channel system 18
7.1+2-channel system 17
7.1-channel system 17
7ch Stereo 62
A
Adaptive DRC 98
ADVANCED SETUP 131
AirPlay 83
AM radio 65
ARC (Audio Return Channel) 154
Audio Decoder (front display information) 96
Auto Power Standby 128
Auto Preset (FM radio) 68
B
Backup/recovery of the settings 133
Banana plug 21
Basic speaker configuration 17
Bluetooth 69
Bookmark 82
C
CINEMA DSP 60
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode 118
Compressed Music Enhancer 64
Crossover frequency setting (subwoofer) 39
D
Decoder Off (front display information) 96
Dialogue 99
, 129
Dimmer (Front Display) 126
DLNA 76
DMC (Digital Media Controller) 102
Dolby Atmos 17
, 38, 59, 118
DSP Program (front display information) 96
E
ECO 128
Error indication (front display) 145
External power amplifier 26
Extra Bass 99
F
Firmware update 131, 134
FM radio 65
Frequency step setting 65
, 132
Front display information 96
H
HDCP 139, 140
HDMI OUT2 Assign 125
HDMI output selection 56
HDMI signal compatibility 154
I
Initial Volume 118, 125
Input jack assignment 126
Input Trim 100
Internet radio 80
iPod content playback 70
iPod content playback (AirPlay) 83
L
Lipsync 147
M
MAC Address Filter 122
Max Volume 117
, 124
Memory Guard 127
Menu language selection 37
Multiple room playback 85
Muting 56
, 91
N
NAS content playback 77
Network Connection 121
Network information 130
Network Name 130
Network Standby 122
O
Option menu 97
P
Parametric EQ 116
Party mode 91
Power Amp Assign 113
Preset station selection (FM/AM radio) 66
Pure Direct 64
R
Radio Data System tuning 67
Remote control 14
Remote control ID 132
Rename 102
, 105, 123
Repeat 72
, 75, 79
Restoring the default settings 133
S
SCENE function 57
Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format 133
Setup menu 109
Short Message 126
Shuffle 72
, 75, 79
Signal information 129
Sleep timer 14
, 91
Sound program 60
, 61
Speaker impedance 16
, 20, 131
Standby Through 111
Index
En 161
Straight decode 63
Subwoofer Trim 99
Surround decoder 63
T
Test Tone 116
Tone Control 98
Trigger function 36
, 127
U
USB storage device content playback 73
V
Virtual CINEMA FRONT 18, 62
Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) 17
Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) 17
, 118
W
Wallpaper 126
Web control 93
Wireless (Wi-Fi) 48
, 121
Wireless Direct 54
, 121
WPS 50
Y
YPAO
(Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer) 39
YPAO Volume 98
Z
Zone2 85, 124
© 2015 Yamaha Corporation YH114B0/EN
Transcripción de documentos
AV Receiver Owner’s Manual Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit. English CONTENTS 8 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 FEATURES 9 Configuring the necessary speaker settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 6 10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . 39 Measuring at one listening position (single measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 What you can do with the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Useful applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Checking the measurement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Front display (indicators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 11 Connecting to a network device wirelessly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 PREPARATIONS Selecting the connection method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Connecting the unit to a wireless network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 15 Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 General setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 PLAYBACK 1 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 56 Basic speaker configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Basic playback procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Advanced speaker configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Selecting an HDMI output jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Input/output jacks and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 2 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Configuring scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 3 Connecting playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Selecting setting items to be included as scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Selecting the sound mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Connecting to the jacks on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Enjoying unprocessed playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 5 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna . . . . 35 Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Connecting the network cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Listening to FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Preparing the wireless antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Setting the frequency steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 6 Connecting other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Registering favorite radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 7 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Operating the radio on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 En 2 Playing back music via Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 CONFIGURATIONS Playing back Bluetooth device music on the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 101 Configuring input sources (Input menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Playing back iPod music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Input menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Playback of iPod content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Scene menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (DSP Program menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 DSP Program menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 Media sharing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Playback of PC music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Setup menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Speaker (Manual Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Playback of Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 Playing back music with AirPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Multi Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 Multi-zone configuration examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 Preparing Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 Controlling Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 Registering favorite items (shortcut) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) . . . . . . . . . 129 Registering an item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Types of information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 Recalling a registered item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . 131 Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control) . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Viewing the current status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Turning on/off the remote control sensor (REMOTE SENSOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 Switching information on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 Viewing the status information on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TUNER FRQ STEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MONITOR CHECK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Updating the unit’s firmware via the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 En 3 APPENDIX 136 Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Power, system and remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 USB and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 HDMI and video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Network information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Yamaha technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Supported devices and file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Multi-zone output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Audio Return Channel (ARC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Reference diagram (rear panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 En 4 Accessories Operating range of the remote control Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product. • Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range shown below. Remote control Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2) Within 6 m (20 ft) 30° 30° Insert the batteries the right way round. AM antenna FM antenna • The illustrations of the main unit and remote control used in this manual are of the U.S.A. model, unless otherwise specified. *One of the above is supplied depending on the region of purchase. YPAO microphone • In this manual, illustrations of English menu screens are used as examples. • (China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only) For information on how to control external devices with the remote control, refer to “Supplement for Remote Control” on the supplied CD-ROM. Power cable • Some features are not available in certain regions. • Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice. • This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control. *The supplied power cable varies depending on the region of purchase. • This manual describes all the “iPod” and “iPhone” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to both “iPod” and “iPhone” unless otherwise specified. CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual) Easy Setup Guide Safety Brochure En 5 • indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations. • indicates supplementary explanations for better use. FEATURES What you can do with the unit Wide variety of supported content • Bluetooth . p.69 • iPod/iPhone . p.70 • USB . p.73 • Media server (PC/NAS) . p.76 • Internet radio . p.80 • AirPlay . p.83 Supports 2- to 7-channel (plus front presence) speaker system and up to 2 subwoofer connections. Allows you to enjoy favorite acoustic spaces in various styles. • Automatically optimizing the speaker . p.39 settings to suit your room (YPAO) • Reproducing stereo or multichannel . p.60 sounds with the sound fields like actual movie theaters and concert halls (CINEMA DSP) • Enjoying compressed music with . p.64 enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) Control Network contents Speakers iPod/iPhone/ Bluetooth device Audio • Bi-amp connections, channel expansion (with external power-amp) and multi-zone configurations to enhance your system . p.22 Audio USB device HDMI Control 4K Ultra HD signals and HDCP 2.2 supported Audio HDMI Control Audio/Video BD/DVD player Audio/Video TV AV receiver (the unit) Playback of Dolby Atmos contents supported Change the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) . p.17 . p.57 Sequential operation of a TV, AV receiver, and BD/DVD player (HDMI Control) TV remote control En 6 . p.152 Full of useful functions! Useful tips ❑ Connecting various devices (p.30) ❑ Creating 3-dimensional sound fields (p.60) A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players), game consoles, camcorders, and other devices. Connecting front presence speakers allows you to create a natural 3-dimensional sound field in your own room (CINEMA DSP 3D). Even when no front presence speakers are connected, the Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) function produces 3D surround sound. In addition, the unit creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field even when no surround back speakers are connected. ❑ Playing back TV audio in surround sound with a single HDMI cable connection (Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.28) When using an ARC-compatible TV, you only need one HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio input from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control signals. I want to connect a playback device using HDMI for video and non-HDMI for audio... Use “Audio Select” in the “Option” menu to specify the type of an audio input jack to be used for the corresponding input source (p.100). Video and audio are not synchronized... Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay between video and audio output (p.117). I want to hear audio from the TV speakers... Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the output destination of signals input into the unit (p.120). Your TV speakers may be selected as an output destination. I want to get more bass sounds… HDMI Control TV audio Set “Extra Bass” in the “Option” menu to “On” to enjoy enhanced bass sounds (p.99). Video from external device I want to change the on-screen menu language... ❑ Various wireless connection methods (p.47) The unit supports the Wi-Fi feature that allows the unit to connect to your wireless router (access point) without a network cable connection. In addition, Wireless Direct enables connecting a mobile device to the unit directly without router. VSBS Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a language from English, Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese (p.37). I want to update the firmware... ❑ Surround playback with 5 speakers placed in front (p.62) If you have surround speakers but there is no space to place them in the rear of your room, you can place them in the front and enjoy multichannel surround sound with the 5 speakers placed in the front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT). Use “FIRM UPDATE” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to update the unit’s firmware (p.134). If the unit is connected to the Internet, a message will be displayed on the TV when a firmware update is available (p.135). Many other settings are available that let you to customize the unit. For details, see the following pages. • Input settings (p.101) • SCENE settings (p.103) Wi-Fi or Wireless Direct ❑ Low power consumption (p.128) The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the unit’s power consumption. • Sound program and surround decoder settings (p.106) • Various function settings (p.110) • Information view (such as audio signal and video signal) (p.129) • System settings (p.131) En 7 Useful applications ■ AV CONTROLLER ■ AV SETUP GUIDE (for tablet) “AV CONTROLLER” will turn your smartphone/tablet into a Wi-Fi enabled remote control for your Yamaha network products. This application provides you the flexibility to control the available inputs, volume, mute, power commands and playback source. “AV SETUP GUIDE” is an application that assists you with cable connections between AV receiver and source devices as well as AV receiver setup. This application guides you through the various settings such as speaker connections, TV and video/audio device connections and selecting the speaker system. Functions • Power on/off and volume adjustment Functions • Input, scene and sound mode selection • Connection guide (speakers, TV and video/audio devices) • DSP Parameter adjustment • Playback control (including music selection for some sources) • For details, search for “AV CONTROLLER” on the App Store or Google Play. • Setup guide (YPAO settings and various setup assistance with illustrations) • Viewing owner’s manual • For details, search for “AV SETUP GUIDE” on the App Store or Google Play. En 8 Part names and functions Front panel 1 2 3 4 5 MAIN ZONE PURE DIRECT INPUT 6 1 MAIN ZONE z key Turns on/off (standby) the unit. 2 Standby indicator Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the following conditions. • HDMI Control is enabled (p.120) • Standby Through is enabled (p.121) • Network Standby is enabled (p.122) • Bluetooth Standby is enabled (p.123) • An iPod is being charged (p.70) VOLUME 7 8 5 PURE DIRECT key Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.64). • To use controls or jacks behind the front panel door, gently press the bottom of the door to open it. Keep the door closed when not using controls or jacks behind the front panel door. (Be careful not to trap your fingers.) 6 INPUT knob Selects an input source. 7 Front panel door For protecting controls and jacks (p.10). 8 VOLUME knob Adjusts the volume. 3 Front display Displays information (p.11). 4 Remote control sensor Receives remote control signals (p.5). En Opening the front panel door 9 ■ Inside of the front panel door 9 0 AB C ON SCREEN OPTION DE F GH SCENE TONE/BALANCE STRAIGHT 1 2 3 IJ K INFO(WPS) MEMORY PRESET FM AM TUNING L 4 (CONNECT) MULTI ZONE PROGRAM ENTER ZONE 2 RETURN ZONE CONTROL DISPLAY VIDEO AUX PHONES 5V M 9 ON SCREEN key Displays the on-screen menu on the TV. 0 Menu operations keys Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter. ENTER Confirms a selected item. RETURN Returns to the previous screen. A OPTION key Displays the option menu (p.97). B DISPLAY key 1A YPAO MIC SILENT CINEMA N O VIDEO Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range of output sounds (p.98). Adjusts the left/right channel volume balance for Zone2 (p.91). D STRAIGHT key Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.63). AUDIO R HDMI IN P E PROGRAM keys J FM and AM keys Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.59). F SCENE keys G MULTI ZONE keys ZONE 2 ZONE CONTROL Switch between FM and AM (p.65). K PRESET keys Select the registered input source, sound program, and various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode (p.57). Displays status information on the TV (p.96). C TONE/BALANCE key L Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.66). Selects a USB/network content from shortcuts (p.92). L TUNING keys Select the radio frequency (p.65). Enables/disables the audio output to Zone2 (p.90). Changes the zone (main zone or Zone2) that is controlled by the keys and knobs on the front panel (p.90). H INFO (WPS) key M USB jack For connecting a USB storage device (p.73) or an iPod (p.70). N YPAO MIC jack For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.39). Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.96). Enters the wireless network connection setup (WPS push button configuration) by holding down for 3 seconds (p.50). O PHONES jack For connecting headphones. P VIDEO AUX jacks I MEMORY key Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.66). Registers USB/network contents as shortcuts (p.92). En 10 For connecting a device, such as a camcorder and a game console (p.33). Front display (indicators) 1 23 4 6 5 7 8 9 ECO MUTE VOLUME ZONE ZONE ZONE SLEEP 3 4 IN OUT 1 2 3 2 ENHANCER PARTY STEREO TUNED 3 0A B Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output. IN Lights up when HDMI signals are being input. OUT1/OUT2 Indicates the HDMI OUT jacks currently outputting an HDMI signal. 2 ECO Lights up when the unit is in the eco mode (p.128). 3 Signal strength indicator Indicates the strength of the wireless network signal (p.47). 4 ZONE2 Lights up when Zone2 is enabled (p.90). 5 SLEEP Lights up when the sleep timer is on. 6 Information display Displays the current status (such as input name and sound mode name). You can switch the information by pressing INFO (p.96). Blinks when audio is muted. FPL L C R FPR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR CD E 1 HDMI 7 MUTE ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL EF 8 Volume indicator G E Cursor indicators Indicates the current volume. 9 VIRTUAL Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational. F ADAPTIVE DRC Lights up when the Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) or Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) (p.60), or the virtual surround processing (p.62) is working. 0 Bluetooth indicator Lights up when the unit is connecting to a Bluetooth device (p.69). A ENHANCER Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.64) is working. B CINEMA DSP Lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.60) is working. “CINEMA DSP n” lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D (p.60) is activated. C STEREO Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal. TUNED Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station signal. D PARTY Lights up when the unit is in the party mode. (p.91) En 11 Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.98) is working. G Speaker indicators Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output. A Front speaker (L) S Front speaker (R) D Center speaker F Surround speaker (L) G Surround speaker (R) H Surround back speaker (L) J Surround back speaker (R) K Surround back speaker B Front presence speaker (L) N Front presence speaker (R) L Subwoofer Rear panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 : HDMI (HDCP2.2) HDMI OUT (HDCP2.2) 2 (ZONE OUT) 7 1 AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 NETWORK AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 ABC ( 3 NET ) D (U.S.A. model) WIRELESS AV 7 (1 BD/DVD) ARC AC IN AV 1 AV 2 (1 BD/DVD) AV 3 AV 4 MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT PB Y COMPONENT VIDEO Y PR AV 2 PB TRIGGER OUT PR B 1 REMOTE 12V 0.1A MAX. TOTAL PHONO AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 IN RS-232C OUT 2 (2 TV) A Y AV 1 ZONE OUT L PB PR Y PRE OUT (SINGLE) SURROUND SUR. BACK C AV 3 PB PR 1 2 R GND 1 OPTICAL 2 OPTICAL 3 COAXIAL 4 COAXIAL 5 COAXIAL 6 OPTICAL ZONE 2 FRONT SUBWOOFER CENTER SPEAKERS R SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/ R BI–AMP EXTRA SP L CENTER R FRONT L ANTENNA (4 RADIO) 75Ω FM AM SINGLE 1 PHONO jacks For connecting to a turntable (p.32). 2 AUDIO 1–3 jacks For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting audio signals (p.32). 3 AV 1–4 jacks For connecting to video/audio playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.30). 4 HDMI OUT 1 jack For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting video/audio signals (p.28). When using ARC, TV audio signal can also be input through the HDMI OUT 1 jack. HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting video/audio signals (p.30), or for connecting to an HDMI-compatible device used in Zone2 (p.88). * The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections. 5 MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT component/composite video jacks For connecting to a TV that supports component or composite video and outputting video signals (p.29) or for connecting to a Zone2 video monitor (p.87). For connecting to a network with a network cable (p.35). A Wireless antenna For connecting to a network device wirelessly (p.47). B RS-232C terminal 6 HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.30). 7 COMPONENT VIDEO (AV 1–3) jacks For connecting to video playback devices that support component video and inputting video signals (p.31). 8 TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks For connecting to devices that support the trigger function (p.36). 9 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that allows you to operate the unit and other devices from another room (p.89). En 0 NETWORK jack 12 This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation. Consult your dealer for details. C VOLTAGE SELECTOR (General model only) Selects the switch position according to your local voltage (p.36). D AC IN jack For connecting the supplied power cable (p.36). HDMI (HDCP2.2) HDMI OUT (HDCP2.2) 2 (ZONE OUT) 1 AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 NETWORK AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 ( 3 NET ) (U.S.A. model) WIRELESS AV 7 (1 BD/DVD) ARC AC IN AV 1 AV 2 (1 BD/DVD) AV 3 AV 4 MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT PB Y COMPONENT VIDEO Y PR AV 2 PB TRIGGER OUT PR B 1 REMOTE 12V 0.1A MAX. TOTAL PHONO AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 IN RS-232C OUT 2 (2 TV) A Y AV 1 ZONE OUT L PB PR Y PRE OUT (SINGLE) SURROUND SUR. BACK C AV 3 PB PR 1 2 R GND 1 OPTICAL 2 OPTICAL 3 COAXIAL 4 COAXIAL 5 COAXIAL ZONE 2 6 OPTICAL FRONT SUBWOOFER CENTER SPEAKERS R SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/ R BI–AMP EXTRA SP L CENTER R FRONT L ANTENNA (4 RADIO) 75Ω FM AM SINGLE E F E ANTENNA jacks For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.34). F ZONE OUT jacks For connecting to the external amplifier used in Zone2 and for outputting audio (p.87). G H G SPEAKERS terminals For connecting to speakers (p.16). H PRE OUT jacks For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.20) or to an external power amplifier (p.26). En 13 * The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections. Remote control 1 Remote control signal transmitter 1 Transmits infrared signals. 2 z (receiver power) key 2 Turns on/off (standby) the unit. AV 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT MAIN ZONE 2 SCENE 5 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO 6 PROGRAM 7 TOP MENU 8 VOLUME MUTE POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION 9 B C D E F G H I J ENTER DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE Select an input source for playback. AV 1–7 AV 1–7 jacks V-AUX VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel) AUDIO 1–3 AUDIO 1–3 jacks PHONO PHONO jacks TUNER FM/AM radio BLUETOOTH Bluetooth connection (the unit as a Bluetooth receiver) USB USB jack (on the front panel) NET NETWORK sources (press repeatedly to select a desired network source) 4 MAIN/ZONE2 switch Changes the zone (main zone or Zone2) that is controlled by the remote control (p.90). 5 SCENE keys Select the registered input source, sound program, and various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode (p.57). MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT K Operate the FM/AM radio when “TUNER” is selected as the input source (p.65). BAND Switches between FM and AM radio. PRESET Select a preset station. TUNING Select the radio frequency. External device operation keys Let you perform playback operations when “USB” or “NET” is selected as the input source, or control playback of the HDMI Control-compatible playback device (p.152). B Sound mode keys Select a sound mode (p.59). C INFO key Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.96). D SLEEP key Switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off). E Numeric keys Let you enter numerical values, such as radio frequencies. MEMORY key Registers FM/AM radio stations as presets (p.66). F HDMI OUT key 6 PROGRAM keys RETURN : A 3 Input selection keys A Radio keys Select a sound program (p.59). 7 External device operation keys Displays menus for the HDMI Control-compatible playback device (p.152). Selects HDMI OUT jacks to be used for video/audio output (p.56). G PARTY key Turns on/off the party mode (p.91). H VOLUME keys 8 ON SCREEN key Displays the on-screen menu on the TV. Adjust the volume. I MUTE key 9 Menu operation keys Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter. ENTER Confirms a selected item. RETURN Returns to the previous screen. 0 MODE key Mutes the audio output. J OPTION key Displays the option menu (p.97). K DISPLAY key Switches the iPod operation modes (p.72). Displays status information on the TV (p.96). • (China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only) For information on the keys other than those above, refer to “Supplement for Remote Control” on the supplied CD-ROM. (U.S.A. model) En 14 PREPARATIONS General setup procedure 1 Connecting speakers (p.16) Basic speaker configuration (p.17) Select the speaker layout and connect the speakers to the unit. Advanced speaker configuration (p.22) Apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance the system. 2 Connecting a TV (p.28) Connect a TV to the unit. 3 Connecting playback devices (p.30) Connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players) and audio devices (such as CD players) to the unit. 4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas (p.34) Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit. 5 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna (p.35) Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or prepare the wireless antenna for establishing a wireless network connection. 6 Connecting other devices (p.36) Connect external devices such as devices compatible with the trigger function. 7 Connecting the power cable (p.36) After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable. 8 Selecting an on-screen menu language (p.37) Select the desired on-screen menu language (default: English). 9 Configuring the necessary speaker settings (p.38) According to your speaker configuration, you need to configure some speaker settings manually before performing YPAO. 10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) (p.39) Optimize the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room (YPAO). 11 Connecting to a network device wirelessly (p.47) Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a wireless connection. This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit! En 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 Connecting speakers The unit has 7 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 9 speakers and up to 2 subwoofers to create the favorite acoustic space in your room. You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system (p.22). Caution • Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6 MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers. For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.20). Ideal speaker layout Functions of each speaker Speaker type Abbr. Front (L) 1 Function Front (R) 2 Center 3 Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogues and vocals). Surround (L) 4 Surround (R) 5 Produce surround left/right channel sounds. Surround speakers also produce surround back channel sounds when no surround back speakers are connected. Surround back (L) 6 E Produce front left/right channel sounds (stereo sounds). 1.8 m (5.9 ft) 7 Front presence (L) E Front presence (R) R Subwoofer 9 1 9 Produce surround back left/right channel sounds. Surround back (R) R 0.5 to 1 m (1.6 to 3.3 ft) 0.5 to 1 m (1.6 to 3.3 ft) 1.8 m (5.9 ft) 2 3 9 Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds. In combination with CINEMA DSP 3D (p.60), the front presence speakers create a natural 3-dimensional sound field in your room. 4 Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces bass parts of other channels. This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect 2 subwoofers to the unit and place them on the left/right (or front/rear) sides of the room. 5 10°~30° 10°~30° 6 7 0.3 m (1 ft) or more • We recommend using front presence speakers to have a full effect of the 3-dimensional sound fields. However, the unit creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to produce 3-dimensional sound fields even when no front presence speakers are connected (p.60). • Use “Ideal speaker layout” (diagram on the right) as reference. You do not need to exactly adjust the speaker layout to this diagram since the YPAO function of the unit will automatically optimize the speaker settings (such as distances) to suit the speaker layout. • When using only one surround back speaker, place it straight behind the listening position (middle of “SBL” and “SBR” in the diagram). En 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Basic speaker configuration ■ Placing speakers in your room ❑ 7.1-channel system [★5.1.2] (using front presence speakers) Depending on the number of speakers, place the speakers and subwoofer in your room. This section describes the representative speaker layout examples. • To play back Dolby Atmos contents, apply a speaker system with a ★ mark. • (About the number of channels) For example, “5.1.2” denotes “standard 5.1-channel plus 2 for overhead speaker channels”. For details on how to place overhead speakers (presence speakers), see “Presence speaker layout” (p.19). ❑ 7.1+2-channel system [★5.1.2] (using both surround back and front presence speakers) This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field, and also creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. This system is suited for enjoying not only 5.1-channel but also for 7.1-channel contents. ❑ 7.1-channel system [★7.1.0] (using surround back speakers) This speaker system brings out the full performance of the unit and allows you to enjoy a highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field with any contents. • The surround back speakers and front presence speakers do not produce sounds simultaneously. The unit automatically changes the speakers to be used, depending on the selected CINEMA DSP (p.60). This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers. En 17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ❑ 5.1-channel system ❑ Front 5.1-channel system (using front presence speakers) E R 1 9 This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. This system is suited for enjoying not only 5.1-channel but also for 7.1-channel contents. 2 3 This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field, and creates the virtual surround speakers using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA DSP). ❑ 2.1-channel system ❑ Front 5.1-channel system (using surround speakers) 1 2 4 9 5 3 Even when no surround speakers are connected, the unit creates the virtual surround speakers using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA DSP). Even when surround speakers are placed in the front side, the unit creates the virtual surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) when “Layout (Surround)” (p.115) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”. • Add the center speaker to configure a 3.1-channel system. • You can enjoy surround sound even without the center speaker (front 4.1-channel system). En 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ❑ Presence speaker layout Dolby Enabled SP The unit provides three layout patterns for presence speakers (Front Height, Overhead and Dolby Enabled SP). Choose a layout pattern that suits your listening environment. Use the Dolby Enabled speakers as the presence speakers. It utilizes sounds reflected from ceiling and lets you enjoy overhead sounds only from speakers that are placed at the same level as traditional speakers. • You can enjoy Dolby Atmos or Cinema DSP 3D with any layout pattern. Front Height Install the presence speakers on the front side wall. It delivers a natural sound field with excellent linkage of left, right, top and bottom sound spaces, and sound extensity effectively. • Place the Dolby Enabled speakers on top of or near the traditional front speakers. A Dolby Enabled speaker unit may be integrated into a traditional speaker. For details, refer to the instruction manual of the Dolby Enabled speakers. Notes on installation of ceiling speakers When installing presence speakers to a ceiling, install them just above the listening position, or the ceiling between the extensions of the front speakers and listening position. Overhead Install the presence speakers to the ceiling above the listening position. It delivers realistic overhead sound effects and sound field with excellent linkage of front and rear sound spaces effectively. FPR SR FR SBR C SBL FL FPL • For details on the installation position of ceiling speakers, see “Notes on installation of ceiling speakers” (p.19). En 19 SL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ■ Connecting speakers Caution Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit. • Be sure to use speakers that are made for ceiling use and take anti-drop measures. Ask a qualified contractor or dealer personnel for installation works. Caution ■ Setting the speaker impedance • Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn off the subwoofer before connecting the speakers. Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When using a 6-ohm speaker for any channel, set the speaker impedance to “6 MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers. • Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on. 1 2 Speakers to be connected Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall outlet. Room Abbr. While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z. 7+2 7 5 2 Front (L) 1 ● ● ● ● MAIN ZONE z Front (R) 2 ● ● ● ● Center 3 ● ● ● Surround (L) 4 ● ● *3 Surround (R) 5 ● ● *3 Surround back (L) 6 ● *1 Surround back (R) 7 ● *1 Front presence (L) E ● *2 *4 Front presence (R) R ● *2 *4 STRAIGHT Main zone 3 Check that “SPEAKER IMP.” is displayed on the front display. DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 4 5 Speaker system (the number of channels) Speaker type ¡SPEAKER¡IMP. ¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡8¬MIN MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Press STRAIGHT to select “6 MIN”. Power Amp Assign (p.113) Basic (default) If you have seven speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers (*1) or front presence speakers (*2). Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and remove the power cable from the AC wall outlet. If you have five speakers, use two of them as surround speakers (*3) or front presence speakers (*4). You are now ready to connect the speakers. • You can also connect up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit. • To use an external power amplifier (Hi-Fi amplifier, etc.) to enhance speaker output, see “Connecting an external power amplifier” (p.26). En 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Cables necessary for connection (commercially available) ❑ Connecting speaker cables Speaker cables (x the number of speakers) Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting the negative (-) terminal of the unit and the speaker, and the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to the negative and the other wire to the positive terminal. + – + – Audio pin cable (two for connecting two subwoofers) a Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the ends of the speaker cable, and twist the bare wires of the cable firmly together. Connection diagram b Loosen the speaker terminal. Refer to the following diagram and connect the speakers to the unit. c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side (upper right or bottom left) of the terminal. PRE OUT ZONE OUT (SINGLE) 1 d Tighten the terminal. 2 The unit (rear) ZONE 2 FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER CENTER SPEAKERS R SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/ R BI–AMP EXTRA SP L CENTER R FRONT L + (red) + b FR c ON T - a d SINGLE – (black) Using a banana plug (U.S.A., Canada, China, Australia and General models only) a Tighten the speaker terminal. E b Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal. R 1 a 2 Banana plug 9 3 9 4 + FR ON T b ❑ Connecting the subwoofer (with built-in amplifier) 5 Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer. 6 7 Audio pin cable PRE OUT (SING LE) 1 2 SURR UND SUR. BACK SUBW OOFE R SURR OUN D BA CK CENT ER L • When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). En 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Advanced speaker configuration In addition to the basic speaker configuration (p.17), the unit also allows you to apply the following speaker configurations to enhance your system. Using the four internal amplifiers for front speakers to have more high-quality sounds Bi-amp connection Combining with an external power amplifier (Hi-Fi amplifier, etc.) to build an extended system Using the excess internal amplifiers for stereo speakers in another room Power-amp channel expansion (Example) Multi-zone configuration (Example) (Example) External power amplifier Bi-amp connection Zone2 Main zone En 22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ■ Available speaker configurations ❑ 5ch BI-AMP Main zone Output channel (max) Bi-amp 5 7 7 Bi-amp External power amplifier (required) Multi-zone Surround back +1 (Zone2) Power Amp Assign (p.113) Page 5ch BI-AMP 23 5ch BI-AMP +SB 24 7ch +1ZONE 24 1 9 4 2 3 9 5 • When applying one of these configurations, you need to configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting in the “Setup” menu (p.38). Speaker En 23 Connect to 12 FRONT and EXTRA SP (bi-amp connection) 3 CENTER 45 SURROUND 67 (not used) ER (not used) 9 SUBWOOFER 1–2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ❑ 5ch BI-AMP +SB ❑ 7ch +1ZONE Bi-amp 1 9 1 2 3 9 9 4 1 5 6 7 2 9 3 4 5 6 2 7 Zone2 Main zone via external amp Speaker Connect to Speaker Connect to 12 FRONT and EXTRA SP (bi-amp connection) 12 FRONT 3 CENTER 3 CENTER 45 SURROUND 45 SURROUND 67 SUR.BACK (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier 67 SURROUND BACK ER (not used) ER (not used) 9 SUBWOOFER 1–2 9 SUBWOOFER 1–2 Zone2 speakers EXTRA SP • When Zone2 output is enabled (p.90), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound. En 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ■ Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections ■ Connecting Zone2 speakers When using front speakers that support bi-amp connections, connect them to the FRONT terminals and EXTRA SP terminals. When using Zone2 speakers, connect them to the EXTRA SP terminals. To utilize the EXTRA SP terminals for Zone2 speakers, configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet (p.38). To enable the bi-amp function, configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet (p.38). The unit (rear) The unit (rear) SPEAKERS SPEAKERS R SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/ R BI–AMP EXTRA SP L CENTER R FRONT R L SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK 1 1 9 2 2 L CENTER R FRONT L 3 FL 5 6 9 FR 9 4 3 4 ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/ R BI–AMP EXTRA SP SINGLE SINGLE 9 L 7 Zone2 5 Main zone • You can also connect Zone2 speakers using an external amplifier (p.87). • The FRONT terminals and EXTRA SP terminals output the same signals. Caution • Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a tweeter. Refer to the instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not making bi-amp connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker cables. En 25 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ■ Connecting an external power amplifier (Example) Connecting front speakers via an external power amplifier When connecting an external power amplifier to enhance speaker output, connect the input jacks of the power amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit. The same channel signals are output from the PRE OUT jacks as from their corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. PRE OUT (FRONT) jacks HDMI (HDCP2.2) V2 AV 3 NETWORK AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 ( 3 NET ) WIRELESS AV 7 Main input jack R OUT/ OUT PB Y COMPONENT VIDEO Y PR AV 2 PB TRIGGER OUT PR B 1 Caution REMOTE 12V 0.1A MAX. TOTAL IN 2 A Y AV 1 • To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure the followings before making connections. PB PRE OUT PR Y (SINGLE) C AV 3 PB RS-232C MAIN IN OUT PR PR 1 L L 2 – Remove the power cable of the unit and turn off the external power amplifier before connecting them. FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER CENTER R SPEAKERS ROUND L R SURROUND BACK L – When using the PRE OUT jacks, do not connect speakers to the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/ R BI–AMP EXTRA SP L FRONT – When using a pre-main amplifier that does not have the volume control bypass, turn up the volume of the pre-main amplifier enough and fix it. In this case, do not connect other devices (except the unit) to the pre-main amplifier. CENTER R R FRONT L SUR Amplifier with volume control bypass (such as A-S3000) SINGLE The unit (rear) The unit (rear) HDMI (HDCP2.2) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 NETWORK AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 ( 3 NET ) WIRELESS AV 7 (1 BD/DVD) AC IN MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT PB Y COMPONENT VIDEO Y PR AV 2 PB TRIGGER OUT PR B 1 REMOTE 12V 0.1A MAX. TOTAL IN RS-232C OUT 2 A Y AV 1 PB PRE OUT ZONE OUT PR Y (SINGLE) C AV 3 PB PR 1 2 ZONE 2 FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER CENTER SPEAKERS R SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/ R BI–AMP EXTRA SP L CENTER R FRONT L SINGLE 1 23 4 About external power amplifiers 1 FRONT jacks We recommend using power amplifiers that meet the following conditions. Output front channel sounds. • With unbalanced inputs 2 SURROUND jacks • With volume control bypass (or without volume control circuit) Output surround channel sounds. • Output power: 100 W or more (6 to 8 ) 3 SUR. BACK jacks Output surround back channel sounds. When using only one surround back speaker, connect the external amplifier to the SINGLE jack (L side). 4 CENTER jack Outputs center channel sounds. En 26 Input/output jacks and cables ■ Video/audio jacks ■ Video jacks ■ Audio jacks ❑ HDMI jacks ❑ COMPONENT VIDEO jacks ❑ OPTICAL jacks Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single jack. Use an HDMI cable. Transmit video signals separated into three components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (PB), and chrominance red (PR). Use a component video cable with three plugs. Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before using the cable. AV 1 HDMI cable Digital optical cable Component video cable A • Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality degradation. • The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return Channel (ARC), and 3D and 4K Ultra HD video transmission features. • Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K Ultra HD videos. Y AV 1 PR PB ❑ COAXIAL jacks Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial cable. ❑ VIDEO jacks Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable. Digital coaxial cable AV 1 Video pin cable ❑ AUDIO jacks Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin cable (RCA cable). Stereo pin cable En 27 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 2 Connecting a TV Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV. About Audio Return Channel (ARC) You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit. • ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways. If you connect a TV that supports ARC to the unit with a single HDMI cable, you can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit. To maximize the performance of the unit, we recommend connecting a TV with an HDMI cable. • When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC. ■ HDMI connection ■ Component/composite video connection Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable). When connecting any video device with a component video cable, connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks. When connecting any video device with a video pin cable, connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack. • You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.30). HDMI OUT jack The unit (rear) HDM HDMI OUT (HDCP2.2) 2 (ZONE OUT) AV 1 AV 2 (1 BD/DVD) AV 1 1 AV 3 (1 BD/DVD) ARC AV 3 2 AV 2 (HDCP2.2) 1 HDMI input ARC HDMI AV 4 MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT • If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be output to the TV. HDMI OUT (ZONE OUT) • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. PB Y HDMI PHONO AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 (2 TV) A Y AUDIO 1 L AV 1 ZONE OUT PB PRE OUT (S SURROUND SU HDMI (2 TV) • If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box, you do not need to make an audio cable connection between the TV and the unit. R AUDIO GND 1 OPTICAL 2 OPTICAL 3 COAXIAL 4 COAXIAL 5 COAXIAL ZONE 2 6 OPTICAL R FRONT SURROUND L L R L L R R ANTENNA (4 RADIO) 75Ω FM AM R TV 1 OPTICAL OPTICAL O AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks O Audio output (digital optical or analog stereo) • You do not make an audio cable connection between the TV and the unit in the following cases: – If your TV supports Audio Return Channel (ARC) – If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box • If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s power and volume with the TV’s remote control. To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the HDMI settings on the unit. For details on the settings, see “Information on HDMI” (p.152). En 28 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ❑ COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component video cable) ❑ VIDEO (composite video) connection (with a video pin cable) The unit (rear) MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack (HDCP2.2) 2 (ZONE OUT) The unit (rear) HDMI (HDCP2.2) HDMI OUT 1 AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT AV 4 (1 BD/DVD) ARC AV 2 (1 BD/DVD) HONO AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AV 3 AV 4 MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT PB Y COM Y PR AV B A AV 1 PB PRE OUT ZONE OUT MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT PR Y 2 OPTICAL (ZONE OUT) AV 1 AV 2 (1 BD/DVD) AV 3 AV 4 (1 BD/DVD) ARC AV 3 AV 2 AV 4 VIDEO MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT PB Y PR (SINGLE) PB Y C AV 1 2 1 OPTICAL MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks AV 1 1 AUDIO 3 (2 TV) Y GND (HDCP2.2) 2 Video input (composite video) HDMI (HDCP2 HDMI OUT AV 1 3 COAXIAL 4 COAXIAL 5 COAXIAL 6 OPTICAL ZONE 2 R FRONT SURROUND L SURROUND SUR. BACK R SUBWOOFER PR V Video input (component video) PR PB PHONO AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 (2 TV) A Y AUDIO 1 L COMPONENT VIDEO Y AUDIO 1 Y PB PB PRE OUT PR (SINGLE) AUDIO R PR GND 1 OPTICAL 2 OPTICAL 3 COAXIAL 4 COAXIAL 5 COAXIAL ZONE 2 6 OPTICAL R ANTENNA (4 RADIO) FM AV 1 ZONE OUT (2 TV) SURROUND BACK PR 75Ω V AM PB FRONT SURROUND L SURROUND L SUR. BACK R SURROU L L R R ANTENNA (4 RADIO) AUDIO 1 Y (2 TV) 75Ω FM SING AM R TV AUDIO L L L R R 1 OPTICAL OPTICAL R O TV 1 OPTICAL AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks OPTICAL O AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks O Audio output (digital optical or analog stereo) En 29 O Audio output (digital optical or analog stereo) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ■ Connecting another TV or a projector 3 Connecting playback devices The unit has two HDMI output jacks. If you connect another TV or a projector to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can switch the TV (or projector) to be used for watching videos with the remote control (p.56). The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect an iPod or a USB storage device, see the following pages. • Connecting an iPod (p.70) HDMI HDMI OUT 2 jack • Connecting a USB storage device (p.73) HDMI OUT The unit (rear) (HDCP2.2) 2 1 (ZONE OUT) ARC TV Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) HDMI OUT (HDCP2.2) 2 (ZONE OUT) AV 1 AV 2 (1 BD/DVD) PHONO AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 1 AV 3 AV 1 AV 2 (1 BD/DVD) ARC AV 4 MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack. Y AUDIO 3 (2 TV) A Y AV ZONE OUT L HDMI R GND 1 OPTICAL 2 OPTICAL 3 COAXIAL 4 COAXIAL 5 COAXIAL 6 OPTICAL ZONE 2 R HDMI input FRONT SURROUND L HDMI • Videos input to the unit via HDMI cannot be output to a TV connected to the unit with a cable other than HDMI. For details, refer to “Video signal flow” (p.151). ANTENNA (4 RADIO) 75Ω FM AM TV (already connected) • The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment” setting (p.126) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COMPONENT VIDEO (A , B , C ), COAXIAL (c, d, e) and OPTICAL (a, b, f) jacks to another input source. Projector • If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.100) in the “Option” menu. • HDMI Control is not available on the HDMI OUT 2 jack. • If you set “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.125) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2”, you can connect a video monitor for Zone2 to the HDMI OUT 2 jack and enjoy videos and audio using the video monitor (p.88). ■ HDMI connection Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable. HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks The unit (rear) HDMI (HDCP2.2) I OUT CP2.2) 1 AV 3 AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 N AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7 (1 BD/DVD) ARC AV 4 MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT PB Y COMPONENT VIDEO Y PR AV 2 PB TRIGGER OUT PR B 1 HDMI output REMOTE 12V 0.1A MAX. TOTAL IN OUT 2 A Y AV 1 PB PRE OUT ZONE OUT PR Y (SINGLE) C AV 3 PB PR HDMI HDMI 2 6 OPTICAL ZONE 2 FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK HDMI 1 SUBWOOFER CENTER SPEAKERS R SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L SINGLE ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/ R BI–AMP EXTRA SP L CENTER Video device If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–7 on the remote control, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. En 30 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ■ Component video connection ■ Composite video connection Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable (digital coaxial, digital optical or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device. Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital coaxial, digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device. Output jacks on video device Output jacks on video device Input jacks on the unit Video Input jacks on the unit Audio Video Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL) Digital optical AV 3 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL) Analog stereo AV 1–3 (COMPONENT VIDEO + AUDIO) Component video Audio Composite video AV 1–3 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (VIDEO + COAXIAL) Digital optical AV 3 (VIDEO + OPTICAL) Analog stereo AV 1–4 (VIDEO + AUDIO) The unit (rear) HDMI OUT (HDCP2.2) 2 (ZONE OUT) Y The unit (rear) PB PR PR AV 1 AV 2 (1 BD/DVD) 1 AV 1 AV 1–4 (VIDEO) jacks (1 BD/DVD ARC AV 3 AV 4 Video output (composite video) PB HDMI (HDCP2.2) HDMI OUT (HDCP2.2) 2 (ZONE OUT) AV 1 AV 2 (1 BD/DVD) 1 AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 PHONO Y AV 6 AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 V (2 TV) (1 BD/DVD) ARC ZONE L AV 3 AV 4 MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT PB Y COMPONENT VIDEO Y PR AV 2 PB TRIGGE OUT PR VIDEO R B 1 Video output (component video) 12V 0.1A MAX. TOTAL PHONO AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 2 (2 TV) A Y AV 1 ZONE OUT L PB PR Y PRE OUT (SINGLE) SURROUND SUR. BACK C AV 3 PB PR GND 1 OPTICAL 2 OPTICAL 3 COAXIAL 4 COAXIAL 5 COAXIAL 6 OPTICAL ZONE 2 V R 1 ANTENNA (4 RADIO) 2 R PR GND 1 OPTICAL 2 OPTICAL 3 COAXIAL 4 COAXIAL 5 COAXIAL 6 OPTICAL ZONE 2 FRONT SUBWOOFER SPEAKERS SURROUND R L R SURROUND BACK Y PB 75Ω PR FM AM CENTER L PB ZONE 2/F.PRESEN R BI–AMP EXTRA SP C C Y COAXIAL ANTENNA (4 RADIO) 75Ω FM AM O C C L SINGLE COAXIAL O Video device Video device O L L R R OPTICAL O R L L L R R OPTICAL Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL), AV 3 (OPTICAL), AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks R Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL), AV 3 (OPTICAL), AV 1–3 (AUDIO) jacks Audio output (any of digital coaxial, digital optical, analog stereo) Audio output (any of digital coaxial, digital optical, analog stereo) If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–3 on the remote control, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. En 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) PHONO jacks Audio output (PHONO) PHONO Connect audio devices such as CD players, MD players, and a turntable to the unit. Depending on the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the following connections. PHONO L L L L R R R R • The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment” setting (p.126) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COAXIAL (c, d, e) and OPTICAL (a, b, f) jacks to another input source. Ground lead GND GND HDMI OUT (HDCP2.2) 2 (ZONE OUT) AV 1 AV 2 (1 BD/DVD) • If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.100) in the “Option” menu. PHONO AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 1 Audio output jacks on the unit Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (COAXIAL) AUDIO 3 (COAXIAL) AV 2 AV 4 MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT Turntable Y AUDIO 3 (2 TV) A Y AV ZONE OUT L Audio output jacks on audio device AV 1 (1 BD/DVD) ARC AV 3 R GND 1 OPTICAL 2 OPTICAL 3 COAXIAL 4 COAXIAL 5 COAXIAL ZONE 2 6 OPTICAL R FRONT SURROUND L ANTENNA (4 RADIO) 75Ω Digital optical AV 3 (OPTICAL) AUDIO 1–2 (OPTICAL) Analog stereo AV 1–4 (AUDIO) AUDIO 1–3 (AUDIO) FM AM C C COAXIAL Turntable (PHONO) O The unit (rear) PHONO Audio device O L L L R R OPTICAL R Any of AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–3 (COAXIAL, OPTICAL, AUDIO) jacks Audio output (any of digital coaxial, digital optical, analog stereo) If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–3 or PHONO on the remote control, the audio played back on the audio device will be output from the unit. When connecting a turntable • The PHONO jack of the unit is compatible with an MM cartridge. To connect a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge, use a boosting transformer. • Connecting the turntable to the GND terminal of the unit may reduce noise in the signal. En 32 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Connecting to the jacks on the front panel ❑ Composite video/analog stereo connection Use the VIDEO AUX jack to temporarily connect a playback device to the unit. Connect a playback device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the unit with a video pin cable and a stereo pin cable. Use the USB jack to connect an iPod or a USB storage device. For details, see “Connecting an iPod” (p.70) or “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.73). (CONNECT) MULTI ZONE PROGRAM FM AM TUNING ENTER ZONE 2 RETURN Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on the unit. ZONE CONTROL DISPLAY VIDEO AUX PHONES ❑ HDMI connection 5V Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the unit with an HDMI cable. 1A YPAO MIC SILENT CINEMA VIDEO L V L AUDIO R HDMI IN R The unit (front) (CONNECT) MULTI ZONE PROGRAM FM AM TUNING ENTER ZONE 2 RETURN ZONE CONTROL DISPLAY VIDEO AUX PHONES 5V 1A YPAO MIC SILENT CINEMA VIDEO L AUDIO R HDMI IN HDMI The unit (front) Game console Camcorder Game console If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played back on the device will be output from the unit. • If you connect video devices to both the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack and VIDEO AUX (VIDEO/AUDIO) jacks, the unit outputs video/audio input through the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack. Camcorder If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX on the remote control, the video/audio played back on the device will be output from the unit. • To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack of the unit (p.28). • You need to prepare an HDMI cable that matches the output jacks on your device. • The VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack does not support HDCP 2.2. En 33 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit. Assembling the AM antenna Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface. FM antenna AM antenna HDMI (HDCP2.2) HDMI OUT (HDCP2.2) 2 (ZONE OUT) AV 1 AV 2 (1 BD/DVD) 1 AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7 (1 BD/DVD) ARC AV 3 AV 4 MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT PB Y COMPONENT VIDEO Y PR AV 2 PB TRIGGER OUT PR B 1 RE 12V 0.1A MAX. TOTAL PHONO AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 IN 2 (2 TV) A Y AV 1 ZONE OUT L PB PR Y PRE OUT (SINGLE) SURROUND SUR. BACK C AV 3 PB PR 1 2 R GND 1 OPTICAL 2 OPTICAL 3 COAXIAL 4 COAXIAL 5 COAXIAL 6 OPTICAL ZONE 2 FRONT SUBWOOFER Connecting the AM antenna CENTER SPEAKERS R SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/ R BI–AMP EXTRA SP L Hold down ANTENNA Insert Release (4 RADIO) 75Ω FM AM SINGLE The unit (rear) • Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit. • The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity. En 34 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 5 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or prepare the wireless antenna for establishing a wireless network connection. • Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router) may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the security software or firewall settings appropriately. You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit. • Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit. • To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended. Connecting the network cable Preparing the wireless antenna Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5 or higher straight cable). If you want to establish a wireless network connection, stand the wireless antenna up straight. Network Attached Storage (NAS) Internet For information on how to connect the unit to a network device wirelessly, see “Connecting to a network device wirelessly” (p.47). WAN LAN Modem PC Network cable The unit (rear) Router ESS WIREL NETWORK AV 6 ( 3 NET ) WIRELESS AV 7 AC IN Mobile device (such as iPod touch and iPhone) TRIGGER OUT 1 12V 0.1A MAX. TOTAL REMOTE IN RS-232C OUT 2 PR • Do not apply excessive force on the antenna. Doing so may damage it. • If you want to use a wired (network cable) connection when a wireless connection has been made, set “Network Connection” (p.121) in the “Setup” menu to “Wired”. • If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit, as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network parameters manually (p.121). • You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.130) in the “Information” menu. En 35 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 6 Connecting other devices 7 Connecting the power cable Before connecting the power cable (General model only) Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage. Voltages are AC 110–120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz. The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operating the unit (such as powering on/off and input selection). If you have a Yamaha subwoofer that supports a system connection or a device with a trigger input jack, you can use the trigger function by connecting the external device to one of the TRIGGER OUT jacks with a monaural mini-plug cable. • Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC wall outlet. Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a potential fire hazard. TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks NETWORK The unit (rear) TRIGGER OUT NETWORK AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7 PB Y PR AV 2 PB AC IN REMOTE B 1 REMOTE 12V 0.1A MAX. TOTAL IN OUT 2 PB PR Y E OUT (SINGLE) ROUND SUR. BACK C AV 3 PB VOLTAGE SELECTOR 220V240V WIREL RS-232C OUT 110V120V 12V 0.1A MAX. TOTAL TRIGGER OUT PR VOLTAGE SELECTOR WIRELESS ER ( 3 NET ) 1 IN COMPONENT VIDEO ( 3 NET ) AV 7 HDMI (HDCP2.2) 3 The unit (rear) RS-232C 2 PR 1 System connector jack 2 SUBWOOFER CE/ L CENTER R FRONT L CENTER SPEAKERS R SURROUND BACK L ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/ R BI–AMP EXTRA SP L CENTER R FRONT L SINGLE Yamaha subwoofer that supports a system connection After all the connections are complete, connect the supplied power cable to the unit and then to an AC wall outlet. The unit (rear) • You can configure the trigger function settings in “Trigger Output1” and “Trigger Output2” (p.127) in the “Setup” menu. NETWORK ( 3 NET ) WIRELESS AC IN OTE RS-232C OUT CENTER En 36 To an AC wall outlet R FRONT L 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 z 8 Selecting an on-screen menu language AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX Select the desired on-screen menu language from English (default), Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese. AUDIO 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT MAIN ZONE 2 1 2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Language” and the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired language. 6 7 To confirm the setting, press ENTER. Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM 5 POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND • If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3. ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 3 4 Press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. MODE TUNING PRESET To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 • The information on the front display is provided in English only. 4 En 37 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 z 9 Configuring the necessary speaker settings AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX If you use any of the following speaker configurations, follow the procedure below to configure the corresponding speaker settings manually before performing YPAO. AUDIO 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT MAIN ZONE 2 6 When using any of advanced speaker configurations • Advanced speaker configuration (p.22) a Use the cursor keys to select “Power Amp Assign” (p.113) and press ENTER. • Using the surround speakers for front 5.1-channel system (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.18) b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select your speaker system and press ENTER. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU • Using the presence speakers for Dolby Atmos playback (p.19) VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN ON SCREEN 1 2 OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Cursor keys ENTER RETURN When using the surround speakers for front 5.1-channel system (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. a Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select “Configuration” “Layout” “Surround” (p.114). Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Front” and press ENTER. When using the presence speakers for Dolby Atmos playback • If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3. a Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select “Configuration” “Layout” “Front Presence” (p.114). BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 3 4 Press ON SCREEN. 5 Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select “Speaker” and then “Manual Setup”. 4 Configure the corresponding speaker settings. Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. En 38 b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select your front presence speaker layout and press ENTER. 7 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 z 10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room. AUDIO 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT MAIN ZONE 2 1 2 3 4 TV NET RADIO • The YPAO function of the unit adopts the YPAO-R.S.C. (Reflected Sound Control) technology that enables to create natural sound fields like a room specifically designed for acoustic perfection. YPAO MIC jack The unit (front) VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position and connect it to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel. • Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your ears). We recommend the use of a tripod as a microphone stand. You can use the tripod screws to stabilize the microphone. SCENE BD/DVD 4 YPAO MIC TOP MENU • Note the following regarding YPAO measurement. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN – Test tones are output at high volume and may surprise or frighten small children. OPTION 1 – Test tone volume cannot be adjusted. ENTER 2 – Keep the room as quiet as possible. RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING RETURN – Stay in a corner of the room behind the listening position so that you do not become an obstacle between speakers and the YPAO microphone. 9 3 – Do not connect headphones. PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 1 2 Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). • If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3. 3 Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If the crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to maximum. VOLUME MIN MAX CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT MIN 9 MAX En 39 4 YPAO 5 microphone Ear height 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 The following screen appears on the TV. • If you perform the multi measure, the speaker settings will be optimized for you to enjoy surround sound in a wider space. AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET • If you perform the multi measure, first place the YPAO microphone at the listening position you will be seated most frequently. AUDIO Single measure MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 Multi measure (5 listening positions) HDMI OUT SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU • To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting the measurement. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN 5 OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY If desired, change the measuring method (multi/single). d e bac a Use the cursor keys to select “Multi Position” and press ENTER. b Use the cursor keys to select a setting and then press ENTER. Multi measure Multi measure (1 listening position + front/back/left/right) (2 listening positions + front/back) BAND MODE TUNING a PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 b c a e d c a b d Settings Yes No (default) Select this option if you will have several listening positions or if you want others to enjoy surround sound. You can take measurements at up to 8 different positions in the room. The speaker settings will be optimized to suit the area defined by those positions (multi measure). Select this option if your listening position will always be fixed. Take the measurements at only one position. The speaker settings will be optimized to suit that position (single measure). This completes the preparations. See the following page to start the measurement. When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”: “Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure)” (p.42) When “Multi Position” is set to “No”: “Measuring at one listening position (single measure)” (p.41) En 40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Measuring at one listening position (single measure) AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT ZONE 2 1 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select “Measure” and press ENTER. The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the measurement immediately. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM To save the measurement results, use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER. When “Multi Position” is set to “No”, follow the procedure below for measurement. It takes about 3 minutes to perform the measurement. AUDIO MAIN 3 The adjusted speaker settings are applied. TOP MENU • To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement finishes. OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Cursor keys ENTER RETURN • To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”. 4 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO” to enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER. BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 • If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears, see “Error messages” (p.45) or “Warning messages” (p.46). • To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see “Checking the measurement results” (p.44). 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and press ENTER. En 41 • If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy natural sounds even at low volume. • You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.98) in the “Option” menu. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit. This completes optimization of the speaker settings. AUDIO 1 2 3 PHONO Caution TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT • The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on top of AV equipment). MAIN ZONE 2 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU 1 VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”, follow the procedure below for measurement. It takes about 10 minutes to measure 8 listening positions. • If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears, see “Error messages” (p.45) or “Warning messages” (p.46). SCENE 1 Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the measurement immediately. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select “Measure” and press ENTER. OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Cursor keys ENTER RETURN • To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN. The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement at the first position finishes. BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 2 Move the YPAO microphone to the next listening position and press ENTER. Repeat step 2 until measurements at all listening positions (up to 8) have been taken. En 42 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 3 AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT AUDIO MAIN ZONE 2 When the measurements at the positions you want to measure are completed, use the cursor keys to select “CANCEL” and press ENTER. 6 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO” to enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER. When you have taken measurements at 8 listening positions, the following screen appears automatically. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN • If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy natural sounds even at low volume. OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET 4 Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and press ENTER. 5 To save the measurement result, use the cursor keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT • You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.98) in the “Option” menu. • To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see “Checking the measurement results” (p.44). 7 Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit. This completes optimization of the speaker settings. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 4 The adjusted speaker settings are applied. • To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”. En 43 Caution • The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on top of AV equipment). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Checking the measurement results 3 AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT You can check the YPAO measurement results. 1 AUDIO MAIN ZONE 2 • You can also select “Result” from “Auto Setup” (p.110) in the “Setup” menu, which displays the previous measurement results. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU The following screen appears. Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings and reload the previous YPAO adjustments. 1 In the “Setup” menu, select “Speaker”, “Auto Setup”, and then “Result” (p.109). 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and press ENTER. 3 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM After the measurement, use the cursor keys to select “Result” and press ENTER. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN ON SCREEN 1 OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY To finish checking the results and return to the previous screen, press RETURN. 2 Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 3 BAND MODE TUNING PRESET 1 Measurement result items SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 2 Measurement result details ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 The number of measured positions (when multi measure is performed) 2 Use the cursor keys to select an item. Wiring Polarity of each speaker Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity (+/-). Size Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the subwoofer) Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. Distance Distance from the listening position to each speaker Level Output level adjustment for each speaker En 44 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Error messages If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again. Error message Cause E-1:No Front SP Front speakers are not detected. E-2:No Sur. SP One of the surround speakers cannot be detected. E-3:No F.PRNS SP One of the front presence speakers cannot be detected. E-4:SBR → SBL A surround back speaker is connected to the R side only. When using only one surround back speaker, you need to connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speaker. E-5:Noisy The noise is too loud. Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If you select “PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected. E-6:Check Sur. Surround back speakers are connected, but no surround speakers are connected. Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use surround back speakers. Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speakers. E-7:No MIC The YPAO microphone has been removed. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. E-8:No Signal The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. E-9:User Cancel The measurement has been canceled. Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To cancel the measurement, select “EXIT”. An internal error has occurred. Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. E-10:Internal Err. Remedy Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections. En 45 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Warning messages If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions. However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings. Warning message Cause Remedy W-1:Out of Phase A speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity (+/-). Select “Wiring” in “Result” (p.44) and check the cable connections (+/-) of the speaker identified by “Reverse”. If the speaker is connected incorrectly: Turn off the unit and then reconnect the speaker cable. If the speaker is connected correctly: Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are connected correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message. W-2:Over Distance A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the listening position. Select “Distance” in “Result” (p.44) and move the speaker identified by “>24.00m (>80.0ft)” within 24 m (80 ft) of the listening position. W-3:Level Error There are significant volume differences between the speakers. Select “Level” in “Result” (p.44) and check the speaker identified by “Over ±10.0dB”, then check the usage environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the subwoofer. We recommend using the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as possible. En 46 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 11 Connecting to a network device wirelessly ■ Connecting without a wireless router (access point) Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a wireless connection. Connect a mobile device to the unit directly. You can use the application for smartphone / tablet “AV CONTROLLER” to control the unit from mobiles devices or enjoy music files stored on mobiles devices on the unit. Selecting the connection method Select a connection method according to your network environment. ■ Connecting with a wireless router (access point) Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point). You can enjoy Internet radio, AirPlay, or music files stored on media servers (PC/NAS) on the unit. Mobile device (such as iPhone) Internet The unit For details on connection, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct)” (p.54). Wireless router • You cannot use Wireless Direct simultaneously with the wired (network cable) connection (p.35) or the wireless network connection (p.48). Modem • When Wireless Direct is enabled, the following functions are not available. – Internet radio – Network services – Playback of music stored on media servers (PC/NAS) Mobile device (such as iPhone) The unit • For details on “AV CONTROLLER”, visit the Yamaha website. For details on connection, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.48). • You cannot use the wireless network connection simultaneously with the wired (network cable) connection (p.35) or Wireless Direct (p.54). • If the unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart, the unit may not connect to a wireless router (access point). In such case, place them close to each other. En 47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 z Connecting the unit to a wireless network AV 7 V-AUX There are several methods to connect the unit to a wireless network. 1 2 3 PHONO Select a connection method according to your environment. TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT 1 5 2 3 4 6 AUDIO MAIN ZONE 2 Do you own iOS devices (iPhone/iPod touch)? 6 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network Connection” and press ENTER. 7 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Wireless (Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”. Yes A (p.48) SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU Does your wireless router (access point) have a WPS button? VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM No POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN No Cursor keys ENTER RETURN B (p.50) ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER Yes C (p.51) • The checkmark indicates the current setting. DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ■ A: Sharing the iOS device setting You can easily setup a wireless connection by applying the connection settings on iOS devices (iPhone/iPod touch). Before proceeding, confirm that your iOS device is connected to a wireless router. 1 2 Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. 3 4 Press ON SCREEN. 5 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”. Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. En 48 8 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Share Wi-Fi Settings (iOS)” and select “NEXT”. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 9 AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to select the desired connection method and select “NEXT”. ❑ Sharing the iOS device setting wirelessly If you select “Wireless (WAC)” as the connection method, perform the network setting sharing operation on your iOS device. (The following procedure is a setup example for iOS 8.) AUDIO MAIN ZONE 2 1 On the iOS device, select the unit as the AirPlay speaker in the Wi-Fi screen. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM The following connection methods are available. TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Wireless (WAC) You can apply the connection settings on the iOS device to the unit using a wireless connection. For details, see “Sharing the iOS device setting wirelessly”. (You need iOS device with iOS 7 or later.) USB Cable You can apply the connection settings on the iOS device to the unit using a USB cable. For details, see “Sharing the iOS device setting using a USB cable”. (You need iOS device with iOS 5 or later.) OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET MUSIC INFO SLEEP 2 Check the network currently selected and tap “Next”. Tap here to start setup SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE The name of the unit ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 5 6 7 4 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT The network currently selected When the sharing process finishes, the unit is automatically connected to the selected network (access point). En 49 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ❑ Sharing the iOS device setting using a USB cable z AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 AUDIO 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT MAIN ZONE 2 If you select “USB Cable” as the connection method, follow the procedure below to share the iOS device setting with the unit. Connect the iOS device to the USB jack, and disable the screen lock on the iOS device. ZONE 2 ZONE CONTROL DISPLAY VIDEO AUX PHONES 1 2 SCENE 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU 5V 1A YPAO MIC SILENT CINEMA VIDEO L AUDIO R VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN You can easily set up a wireless connection with one push of the WPS button. • This configuration does not work if the security method of your wireless router (access point) is WEP. In this case, use other connection method. The unit (front) RETURN 1 ■ B: Using the WPS push button configuration Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 2 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “NEXT” and press ENTER. 3 Tap “Allow” in the message appeared on the iOS device. DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV screen. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT Hold down INFO (WPS) on the front panel for 3 seconds. “Press WPS button on Access Point” appears on the front display. ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. 4 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. En 50 3 Push the WPS button on the wireless router (access point). When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the front display. If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another connection method. About WPS WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy establishment of a wireless home network. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 z AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT AUDIO MAIN ZONE 2 ■ C: Using other connection methods If your wireless router (access point) does not support WPS push button configuration method, follow the procedure below to configure the wireless network settings. 1 2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN ON SCREEN OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN 3 4 Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). BAND TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 5 6 Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network Connection” and press ENTER. 4 7 The following connection methods are available. Press ON SCREEN. DISPLAY MODE Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to select the desired connection method and select “NEXT”. Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM 8 WPS Button You can set up a wireless connection with the WPS button while viewing the TV screen. Follow the instructions displayed on the TV screen. Share Wi-Fi Settings (iOS) See “Sharing the iOS device setting” (p.48). Access Point Scan You can set up a wireless connection by searching for an access point. For details on settings, see “Searching for an access point” (p.52). Manual Setting You can set up a wireless connection by entering the required information (such as SSID) manually. For details on settings, see “Setting up the wireless connection manually” (p.52). PIN Code You can set up a wireless connection by entering the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router (access point). The method is available if the wireless router (access point) supports the WPS PIN code method. For details on settings, see “Using the PIN code” (p.53). Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Wireless (Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”. • The checkmark indicates the current setting. En 51 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT ❑ Searching for an access point ❑ Setting up the wireless connection manually If you select “Access Point Scan” as the connection method, the unit starts searching for access points. After a while, the list of available access points appears on the TV screen. If you select “Manual Setting” as the connection method, the wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV. AUDIO MAIN ZONE 2 1 1 2 3 4 TV NET RADIO TOP MENU Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the SSID of the access point and select “NEXT”. 2 2 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the security method of the access point and select “NEXT”. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key and select “NEXT”. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM 1 The wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV. SCENE BD/DVD Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the desired access point and select “NEXT”. You need to setup the SSID (network name), encryption method and security key for your network. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN ON SCREEN OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 3 4 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT” and press ENTER to start the connection process. When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV screen. If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another connection method. 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Settings None, WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode En 52 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 3 AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT If you select “None” in Step 2, this setting is not available. Proceed to Step 4. AUDIO MAIN ZONE 2 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU If you select “PIN Code” as the connection method, the list of available access points appears on the TV screen. 1 If you select other method, enter either 8 to 63 character string, or 64 hexadecimal digits. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN 2 3 ON SCREEN Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT” and press ENTER to start the connection process. When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV screen. Cursor keys ENTER RETURN Enter the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router (access point). For details on settings, refer to the instruction manual of the wireless router (access point). OPTION ENTER Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the desired access point and select “NEXT”. The PIN code of the unit appears on the TV screen. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM ❑ Using the PIN code If you select “WEP”, enter either 5 or 13 character string, or 10 or 26 hexadecimal digits. SCENE 1 Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key and select “NEXT”. DISPLAY If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another connection method. BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 4 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT” and press ENTER to start the connection process. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV screen. 4 If “Not connected” appears, check that all the information is entered correctly, and repeat from Step 1. 5 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. En 53 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 z AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT ZONE 2 1 2 3 4 TV NET RADIO TOP MENU 1 2 VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Wireless Direct” and select “OK”. • Wireless Direct connection may be insecure since the communication is not strongly encrypted. The unit may operate by playback operation on wireless devices connected to the unit without permission. SCENE BD/DVD 7 Follow the procedure below to connect a mobile device to the unit directly. AUDIO MAIN Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct) ON SCREEN Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). • The checkmark indicates the current setting. OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. 8 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the desired security method and select “NEXT”. DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 3 4 Press ON SCREEN. 5 6 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”. Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. 4 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network Connection” and press ENTER. Settings None, WPA2-PSK (AES) • If you select “None”, the connection may be insecure since the communication is not encrypted. En 54 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 9 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX If you select “None” in Step 8, this setting is not available. Proceed to Step 10. AUDIO 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT MAIN ZONE 2 Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key and select “NEXT”. Otherwise, either 8 to 63 character string, or 64 hexadecimal digits. 1 2 3 4 TV NET RADIO TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN ON SCREEN OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET 10 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “OK” and press ENTER to save the setting. The settings made appear on the TV screen. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT a Enable the Wi-Fi function on the mobile device. b Select the SSID displayed in Step 10 from the list of available access points. 12 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM For details on settings of your mobile device, refer to the instruction manual of the mobile device. c When you are prompted for a password, enter the security key displayed in Step 10. SCENE BD/DVD 11 Configure the Wi-Fi settings of a mobile device. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 The SSID and security key information is required for setup of a mobile device. En 55 PLAYBACK AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT AUDIO MAIN ZONE 2 Input selection keys Basic playback procedure 1 Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or BD/DVD player) connected to the unit. 2 Use the input selection keys to select an input source. 3 Start playback on the external device or select a radio station. HDMI OUT SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU MUTE VOLUME ON SCREEN Selecting an HDMI output jack 1 Press HDMI OUT to select an HDMI OUT jack. Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be used for signal output changes. DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 9 3 4 6 7 8 0 MEMORY ENT MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Refer to the instruction manual for the external device. OPTION ENTER HDMIOUTSel. OUT1+2 For details on the following operations, see the corresponding pages. OUT 1+2 • Listening to FM/AM radio (p.65) OUT 1 • Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.69) OUT 2 • Playing back iPod music (p.70) Off Outputs the same signal at both the HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2 jacks. Output the signals at the selected HDMI OUT jack. Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jacks. • Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.73) • Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.76) • Playing back music with AirPlay (p.83) • When “OUT 1+2” is selected, the unit outputs video signals at the highest resolution supported by both TVs (or projectors) connected to the unit. (For example, if you have connected a 1080p TV to the HDMI OUT 1 jack and a 720p TV to the HDMI OUT 2 jack, the unit outputs 720p video signals.) Press VOLUME to adjust the volume. • If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2 (“HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.125)), you can turn on/off each zone by pressing HDMI OUT repeatedly. • Listening to Internet radio (p.80) 4 • You can also select an HDMI output jack by selecting a scene (p.57). • To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute. • To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or TONE/BALANCE on the front panel (p.98). On-screen input selection a Press ON SCREEN. b Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER. c Use the cursor keys to select the desired input source and press ENTER. En 56 Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source, sound program, HDMI output and various settings with just one touch. You can use up to 12 scenes to register your favorite settings and switch them depending on a playback source. AUDIO 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT MAIN ZONE 2 1 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO SCENE Press SCENE. The input source and settings registered to the corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on automatically when it is in standby mode. By default, the following settings are registered for each scene. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM SCENE (SCENE key) TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN ON SCREEN OPTION 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO Input (p.56) AV 1 AUDIO 1 NET RADIO TUNER Input Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY HDMI Output BAND MODE TUNING Audio Select (p.100) Auto Auto — — HDMI Output (p.56) OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 DSP Program (p.59) Sci-Fi STRAIGHT 7ch Stereo 7ch Stereo Pure Direct Mode (p.118) Auto Auto Auto Auto Enhancer (p.64) Off On On On Enhancer Hi-Res Mode (p.100) On On On On PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT Mode ENHANCER PURE DIRECT • You can select SCENE 1–4 by pressing SCENE on the remote control. Additionally, you can create 8 scenes (SCENE 5–12) and select those scenes from the “Scene” menu (p.103). On-screen scene selection a Press ON SCREEN. b Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER. c Use the cursor keys to select a desired scene and press ENTER. En 57 Configuring scene assignments Selecting setting items to be included as scene assignments AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT MAIN ZONE 2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU 1 Set the unit to the condition (such as input source and sound program) that you want to assign to a scene. 2 Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front display. SCENE DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 SCENE1 SETComplete MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING • The SCENE link playback function allows you to start playback of an external device connected to the unit via HDMI. To enable SCENE link playback, specify the device type in “Device Control” (p.104) in the “Scene” menu. • (China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only) To control your playback device after selecting a scene with the remote control of the unit, change the external device assigned to the SCENE keys. For details, refer to “Supplement for Remote Control” in the supplied CD-ROM. PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 En 58 In addition to the default scene assignments (Input, HDMI Output and Mode), you can also include the following setting items as the scene assignments in “Detail” (p.104) in the “Scene” menu. Sound Tone Control, YPAO Volume, Adaptive DRC, Extra Bass Surround CINEMA DSP 3D Mode, Dialogue Lift, Dialogue Level, Subwoofer Trim Video Video Mode Volume Master Volume Lipsync Lipsync, Delay Speaker Setup Setting Pattern, PEQ Select Selecting the sound mode AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo playback). AUDIO 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT MAIN ZONE 2 ❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for movies 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE TOP MENU a Press ON SCREEN. b Use the cursor keys to select “DSP Program” and press ENTER. c Use the cursor keys to select a sound program/surround decoder and press ENTER. • Press MOVIE repeatedly. SCENE 1 PROGRAM On-screen sound program/surround decoder selection POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for viewing video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games (p.60). PROGRAM ON SCREEN OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN ❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for music or stereo playback • You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in the “DSP Program” menu (p.105). • Press MUSIC repeatedly. • You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.11) or at the “Audio Signal” screen in the “Information” menu (p.129). This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for listening music sources or stereo playback (p.61). DISPLAY TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT MOVIE MUSIC SUR.DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT • The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source. About Dolby Atmos® ❑ Selecting a surround decoder BAND MODE • You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing PROGRAM. • Dolby Atmos contents are decoded as Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus or multichannel PCM format in the following situations. • Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly. This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed multichannel playback from 2-channel sources (p.63). ❑ Switching to the straight decode mode • Press STRAIGHT. This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed sounds in original channels (p.63). ❑ Switching to the Pure Direct mode • Press PURE DIRECT. This mode lets you enjoy pure high fidelity sound by reducing the electrical noise from other circuitry (p.64). ❑ Enabling Compressed Music Enhancer • Press ENHANCER. This mode lets you enjoy compressed music with additional depth and breadth (p.64). En 59 – Any of CINEMA DSP programs is selected. – Neither surround back nor presence speakers are used. – Headphones are used (2-channel playback). • When the Dolby Atmos decoder is working, virtual surround processing (such as Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.62), YPAO Volume (p.98) or Compressed Music Enhancer (p.64) does not work. ■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE) Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D) The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games. ❑ MOVIE THEATER The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha’s original DSP technology (CINEMA DSP 3D). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual movie theaters or concert halls in your room and enjoy natural stereoscopic sound fields. Standard This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio, such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right, and rear. Spectacle This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms. Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music. Adventure This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides, powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation of the sounds and the separation of the channels. Drama This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for long periods. Mono Movie This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies, in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate reverberation to the original audio. Sound program category MUSIC DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP 3 CLASSICAL HallinVienna MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR “CINEMA DSP n” lights up Sound program • To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu to “Off”. • We recommend using front presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the stereoscopic sound fields. However, even when no front presence speakers are connected, the unit creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce stereoscopic sound fields. • If a multichannel source (6.1 channels or more) is input when no surround back speakers are connected, the unit creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. • When VPS or VSBS is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display. En 60 ■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback (MUSIC) ❑ ENTERTAINMENT Sports This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’ voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of the fans in a suitable space. Action Game This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field. Roleplaying Game This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a clearer and more spatial sound field. Music Video This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall. Recital/Opera This program controls the amount of reverberations at an optimum level and emphasizes the depth and clarity of human voices to offer the reverberations of an orchestra box in front the listener at the same time as providing the acoustic positioning and feeling of presence on the stage. The surround sound field is relatively moderate, but the data for concert hall effects are used to represent the inherent beauty of music. The listener will not be fatigued even after long hours of opera entertainment. En The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources. You can also select stereo playback. ❑ CLASSICAL 61 Hall in Munich This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500 seats that uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the arena. Hall in Vienna This program simulates a 1,700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound. Hall in Amsterdam The large, shoe box shaped hall seats about 2,200 around the circle stage. Reflections are rich and pleasing while the sound travels freely. Church in Freiburg Located in the south of Germany, this grand, stone-built church has a pointed tower at 120 meters in height. Its long and narrow shape and the high ceiling enable the elongated reverberation time and limited initial reflection time. Thus, the rich reverberation rather than the sound itself reproduces the atmosphere of the church. Church in Royaumont This program features the sound field created by the refectory (dining hall) of a beautiful medieval Gothic monastery located in Royaumont on the outskirts of Paris. Chamber This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music. ■ Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) ❑ LIVE/CLUB Village Vanguard The Jazz club is on 7th Avenue, New York. This small club with the low ceiling makes the powerful reflections converge toward the stage located in the center. Warehouse Loft The warehouse resembles some lofts in Soho. Sound reflects off the concrete walls clearly with a lot of energy. Cellar Club This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small stage. The Roxy Theatre This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall. The Bottom Line This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound. If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) when no surround speakers are connected, the unit utilizes Yamaha’s original virtual surround technology to reproduce up to 7-channel surround sound and enable you to enjoy the well-oriented sound field only with the front-side speakers. We recommend using presence speakers in order to enjoy more effective stereoscopic sound field. • When Virtual CINEMA DSP is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display. ■ Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) If you have surround speakers but there is no space to place them in the rear of your room, you can place them in the front (p.18) and enjoy multichannel surround sound using Virtual CINEMA FRONT. ❑ STEREO 2ch Stereo Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP). 7ch Stereo Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties. When “Layout (Surround)” (p.115) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, the unit creates the virtual surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound with the 5 speakers placed in the front. • When Virtual CINEMA FRONT is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display. ■ Enjoying surround sound with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) • CINEMA DSP 3D (p.60) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.62) do not work when “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo” is selected. You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel speaker system, with stereo headphones by connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting a sound program or a surround decoder. En 62 Enjoying unprocessed playback AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX You can play back input sources without any sound field effect processing. AUDIO 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT MAIN ZONE 2 ■ Playing back in original channels (straight decode) When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as CDs, and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for multichannel sources. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU 1 POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Press STRAIGHT. Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is enabled or disabled. OPTION ■ Playing back 2-channel sources in multichannel (surround decoder) The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. • Speakers that produce sounds will change depending on your speaker system and the selected decode type (p.106). • For details on each decoder, see “Glossary” (p.146). 1 Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder. Each time you press the key, the surround decoder changes. DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 ENTER RETURN DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP DISPLAY HD 3 STRAIGHT MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR BAND bSurround MODE TUNING ¡SUR.¡DECODE †‡PLƒx¡MOVIE SUR.DECODE PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 STRAIGHT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 9 3 4 6 7 8 0 MEMORY ENT • If “Layout (Surround)” (p.115) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, Virtual CINEMA FRONT (p.62) works when multichannel source is played back. bPLIIx Movie bPLII Movie bPLIIx Music bPLII Music bPLIIx Game bPLII Game En 63 MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Use the Dolby Surround decoder suitable for all sources. A real acoustic space (including overhead) will be created especially when object-based audio (such as Dolby Atmos content) is played. Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro Logic II decoder) suitable for movies. Sounds will be output from the surround/surround back speakers even when 2-channel source is input. Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro Logic II decoder) suitable for music. Sounds will be output from the surround/surround back speakers even when 2-channel source is input. Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro Logic II decoder) suitable for games. Sounds will be output from the surround/surround back speakers even when 2-channel source is input. Neo:6 Cinema Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix decoder) suitable for movies. Sounds will be output from the surround/surround back speakers. Neo:6 Music Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix decoder) suitable for music. Sounds will be output from the surround/surround back speakers. • You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoders when headphones are connected or when “Surround Back” (p.114) in the “Setup” menu is set to “None”. AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT • When the Dolby Surround decoder is selected, virtual surround processing (such as Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.62), YPAO Volume (p.98) or Compressed Music Enhancer (p.64) does not work. AUDIO MAIN ZONE 2 • If the Dolby Surround decoder is selected when only one surround back speaker is used, no sound is output from the surround back speaker (except when a Dolby Atmos content is played). SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry in order to reduce the electrical noise from other circuitry (such as the front display). It allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN 1 DISPLAY Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along with any other sound modes. In addition, Compressed Music Enhancer enhances the quality of uncompressed digital audio (such as 2-channel PCM and FLAC) when “Hi-Res Mode” (p.100) in the “Option” menu is set to “On” (default). 1 PRESET Press ENHANCER. Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer is enabled or disabled. Press PURE DIRECT. Each time you press the key, the Pure Direct mode is enabled or disabled. BAND MODE TUNING Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) EnhancerOn VOLUME ENHANCER SL SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT PURE DIRECT DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP PUREDIRECT HD 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC L C R SW SR SBL SB SBR “ENHANCER” lights up PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR ENHANCER • When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the following functions are not available. • Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz. – Some settings for the speakers or sound programs – Operating the on-screen menu and some items in the “Option” menu – Using the multi-zone function – Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation) En 64 • You can also use “Enhancer” (p.99) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer. Listening to FM/AM radio AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting from registered radio stations. AUDIO 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 TUNER • The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used in U.K. and Europe models. HDMI OUT SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 Press BAND to select a band (FM or AM). DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP Setting the frequency steps VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM • If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM antennas. Selecting a frequency for reception FM87.50MHz MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR HD 3 (Asia and General models only) TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and 9 kHz for AM. Depending on your country or region, set the frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM. OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND BAND MODE TUNING PRESET TUNING 1 2 SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT Set the unit to standby mode. When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z. MAIN ZONE z STRAIGHT 3 Use the following keys to set a frequency. TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the key for about a second to search stations automatically. Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to select 98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT). FM98.50MHz STEREO TUNED VOLUME SL L C R SW SR SBL SB SBR 4 “TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station. Numeric keys “STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received. PROGRAM 3 Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TUNER FRQ STEP”. DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP HD 3 4 5 • “Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of reception range. TUNERFRQSTEP FM50/AM9 Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”. Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again. En 65 • You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio reception in “FM Mode” (p.100) in the “Option” menu. When the signal reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it. Registering favorite radio stations (presets) AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their preset numbers. AUDIO MAIN ZONE 2 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO • You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals by using “Auto Preset” (p.68). Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number. TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio station. You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once. ■ Registering a radio station VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number. TUNER SCENE 1 ■ Selecting a preset station Preset 01:FM98.50MHz VOLUME 1 Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.65) to tune into the desired radio station. 2 Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds. • “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered. The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most recently registered number. • “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered. STEREO TUNED SL L C R SW SR SBL SB SBR OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT Preset number Numeric keys MEMORY Preset STEREO TUNED 01:FM98.50MHz PresetOK VOLUME SL L C R SW SR SBL SB SBR • To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into the desired radio station, use PRESET or numeric keys to select a preset number, and then press MEMORY again. “Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered Preset STEREO TUNED 01:Empty FM98.50MHz VOLUME SL L C R SW SR SBL SB SBR En 66 • “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered. • To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.68). Radio Data System tuning • “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System service. AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT (U.K. and Europe models only) Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station. AUDIO MAIN ZONE 2 ■ Displaying the Radio Data System information SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU 1 VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station. ■ Receiving traffic information automatically When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, the unit automatically receives traffic information. To enable this function, follow the procedure below to set the traffic information station. 1 When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Traffic Program” (TrafficProgram) and press ENTER. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY OPTION Cursor keys ENTER RETURN • We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting stations (p.68). 2 Press INFO. Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes. The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the search immediately. BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC STEREO TUNED ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 9 Info ProgramType VOLUME SL • To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor keys (q/w) while “READY” is displayed. L C R SW SR SBR SBL INFO 3 4 6 7 8 0 MEMORY ENT • To cancel the search, press RETURN. Item name • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed item appears. Frequency (always displayed) STEREO TUNED FM98.50MHz CLASSICS The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the search finishes. Finished STEREO TUNED TrafficProgram TPFM101.30MHz VOLUME SL L C R SW SR SBR SBL VOLUME SL L C R SW SR SBR Traffic information station (frequency) SBL Information • “TP Not Found” appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information stations are found. Program Service Program service name Program Type Current program type Radio Text Information on the current program Clock Time Current time DSP Program Sound mode name Audio Decoder Decoder name En 67 ■ Browse screen Operating the radio on the TV AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the TV. 1 AUDIO 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT MAIN ZONE 2 TUNER 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 3 The playback screen is displayed on the TV. 2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO 2 VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM ■ Playback screen 1 TOP MENU OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND 3 3 Operation menu Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN Menu MODE TUNING Submenu Function Memory Registers the current station to the preset number selected in the list. Auto Preset Automatically registers FM radio stations with strong signals (up to 40 stations). Clear Preset Clear the preset station selected in the list. Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations. PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset station and press ENTER to tune into it. 2 Preset number POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN 1 Preset station list MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 3 4 1 Radio station information Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected band (FM/AM) and frequency. (U.K. and Europe models only) When tuning into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.67), the Radio Data System information (“Program Service”, “Program Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”) is also displayed. Utility 2 TUNED/STEREO indicators “TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station. “STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received. 3 Operation menu Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu Function Browse Moves to the browse screen (preset station list). Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. En 68 1 Page Up 1 Page Down Moves to the previous/next page of the list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. • (U.K. and Europe models only) Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by “Auto Preset”. Playing back music via Bluetooth AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX You can play back music files stored on a Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) on the unit. AUDIO 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT MAIN ZONE 2 BLUETOOTH Follow the procedure below to establish a Bluetooth connection between a Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and the unit, and play back music stored the Bluetooth device on the unit. The unit SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO Playing back Bluetooth device music on the unit Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) • The unit does not support video playback via Bluetooth. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU • To use the Bluetooth function, set “Bluetooth” (p.123) in the “Setup” menu to “On”. 1 Press BLUETOOTH to select “Bluetooth” as the input source. • For details on supported Bluetooth devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.150). 2 On the Bluetooth device, select the unit (network name of the unit) from the available device list. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN A connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit will be made. DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING External device operation keys PRESET If the pass key is required, enter the number “0000”. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 3 3 4 On the Bluetooth device, select a song and start playback. The playback screen (artist name, album name and song title) is displayed on the TV. • “Not found” appears when no Bluetooth devices are detected. • If the unit detects the Bluetooth device previously connected, the unit automatically connects to the Bluetooth device after Step 1. To establish another Bluetooth connection, first terminate the current Bluetooth connection. • To terminate the Bluetooth connection, perform one of the following operations. – Perform the disconnect operation on the Bluetooth device. – Select an input source other than “Bluetooth” on the unit. – Select “Disconnect” in “Audio Receive” (p.111) in the “Setup” menu. • You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote control to control playback. En 69 Playing back iPod music AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX You can play back iPod music on the unit using a USB cable supplied with the iPod. AUDIO 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT MAIN ZONE 2 Follow the procedure below to operate the iPod contents and start playback. USB • For details on playable iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.150). 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO • The unit does not support a USB connection for iPad. To play back iPad music on the unit, use AirPlay (p.83). Press USB to select “USB” as the input source. The browse screen is displayed on the TV. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM You can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV screen. 1 SCENE 1 Playback of iPod content Connecting an iPod TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Connect your iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the iPod. OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 1 2 Connect the USB cable to the iPod. Connect the USB cable to the USB jack. The unit (front) ENHANCER PURE DIRECT • If playback is ongoing on your iPod, the playback screen is displayed. PHONES 3 4 5V 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 1A YPAO MIC SILENT CINEMA 2 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. DOCK TAG HD IN OUT 1 OUT 2 PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 2 3 4 SLEEP HD 3 USB Connected MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR • The iPod charges while it is connected to the unit. If you set the unit to standby mode while the iPod is charging, the iPod continues to charge up to 4 hours. If “Network Standby” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, it continues to charge without limit. • Disconnect the iPod from the USB jack when it is not in use. En 70 • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. • To operate the iPod manually to select content or control playback, switch to the simple play mode (p.72). ■ Browse screen AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 AUDIO 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT MAIN ZONE 2 ■ Playback screen 1 2 4 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO 1 Status indicators 1 Status indicators VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.72) and playback status (such as play/pause). OPTION 3 Contents list ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER Displays the list of iPod content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. 4 Item number/total TUNING External device operation keys PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 5 Operation menu Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining time. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. 3 Operation menu Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. BAND MODE Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.72) and playback status (such as play/pause). 2 Playback information 2 List name POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN MOVIE 3 5 Menu Function Browse Moves to the browse screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. Function 1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of the list. 1 Page Down 10 Pages Up Moves 10 pages forward/backward. 10 Pages Down • You can use the external device operation keys on the remote control to control playback. Return Returns to the higher-level list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. En 71 ■ Operating the iPod itself (simple play) AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT 1 MAIN ZONE 2 To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again. 2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU Operate your iPod itself to start playback. • During simple play, configure the shuffle/repeat settings directly on your iPod or press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below. 1 When “USB” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or “Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings of your iPod. Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode. The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are enabled. AUDIO ■ Shuffle/repeat settings POP-UP/MENU • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY OPTION • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 3 Item BAND MODE MODE TUNING Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. PRESET Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. Songs (Songs) Plays back songs in random order. “x” appears in the TV screen. Albums (Albums) Plays back albums in random order. “x” appears in the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears in the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs repeatedly. “v” appears in the TV screen. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP Shuffle (Shuffle) ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 MEMORY ENT 9 Repeat (Repeat) 4 En 72 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. Playing back music stored on a USB storage device AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on the unit. AUDIO 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT MAIN ZONE 2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION USB The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or FAT32 format). • For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.150). Connecting a USB storage device 1 Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack. The unit (front) ENTER ON SCREEN OPTION TONE/BALANCE STRAIGHT • Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack. • Connect a USB memory device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use extension cables. Playback of USB storage device contents Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device contents and start playback. You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed on the TV screen. 1 Press USB to select “USB” as the input source. The browse screen is displayed on the TV. (CONNECT) RETURN PROGRAM DISPLAY ENTER BAND RETURN DISPLAY MODE PHONES TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE 5V 1A YPAO MIC SILENT CINEMA MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 4 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT USB storage device DOCK TAG HD IN OUT 1 OUT 2 PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 2 3 4 SLEEP HD 3 USB Connected MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR • If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In this case, “Loading...” appears in the front display. En 73 • If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is displayed. 2 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT MAIN ZONE 2 ■ Browse screen 1 2 3 If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. AUDIO 1 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. 5 4 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO 1 Status indicators VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU 2 List name POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.75) and playback status (such as play/pause). 3 Contents list Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. • Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected. • If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during playback, playback stops automatically. • You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by selecting the shortcut numbers (p.92). MUSIC 4 Item number/total 5 Operation menu Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT Menu Function 1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of the list. 1 Page Down 10 Pages Up Moves 10 pages forward/backward. 10 Pages Down En 74 Return Returns to the higher-level list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. ■ Playback screen AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT ■ Shuffle/repeat settings You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of USB storage device contents. 1 2 AUDIO MAIN ZONE 2 3 1 When “USB” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or “Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO 1 Status indicators VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU 2 Playback information POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND OPTION Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. External device operation keys PRESET • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Item 3 Operation menu Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. MODE TUNING • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.75) and playback status (such as play/pause). Menu Function Browse Moves to the browse screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. Shuffle (Shuffle) Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. On (On) Plays back songs in the current album (folder) in random order. “x” appears on the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears on the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs in the current album (folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the TV screen. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT • You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote control to control playback. En 75 Repeat (Repeat) 4 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) ❑ For Windows Media Player 11 You can play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit. • To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router (p.35). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.130) in the “Information” menu. • The audio may be interrupted while using the wireless network connection. In this case, use the wired network connection. • For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.150). 1 2 3 Start Windows Media Player 11 on your PC. 4 Click “OK” to exit. Select “Library”, then “Media Sharing”. Check the “Share my media to” box, select the unit’s icon, and click “Allow”. Media sharing setup • For details on media sharing settings, refer to Windows Media Player help. To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS, first you need to configure the media sharing setting on each music server. ■ For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server software installed ■ For a PC with Windows Media Player installed Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and configure the media sharing settings. ❑ For Windows Media Player 12 1 2 3 4 Start Windows Media Player 12 on your PC. 5 Click “OK” to exit. Select “Stream”, then “Turn on media streaming”. Click “Turn on media streaming”. Select “Allowed” from the drop-down list next to the unit’s model name. En 76 Playback of PC music contents 3 AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and start playback. AUDIO MAIN ZONE 2 NET You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV screen. 1 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the input source. The browse screen is displayed on the TV. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. Cursor keys ENTER RETURN • Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected. • If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during playback, playback stops automatically. BAND MODE TUNING • You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by selecting the shortcut numbers (p.92). PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP • If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the playback screen is displayed. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 5 6 7 4 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 2 Use the cursor keys to select a music server and press ENTER. En 77 ■ Browse screen AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT MAIN ZONE 2 1 2 1 2 3 AUDIO 1 ■ Playback screen 4 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO 1 Status indicators 1 Status indicators VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU 3 5 Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.79) and playback status (such as play/pause). 2 Playback information 2 List name POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. OPTION 3 Contents list ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. TUNING External device operation keys PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 4 5 Operation menu Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu 3 Operation menu Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. 4 Item number/total BAND MODE Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.79) and playback status (such as play/pause). Function 1 Page Up Menu Function Browse Moves to the browse screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. Moves to the previous/next page of the list. 1 Page Down 10 Pages Up Moves 10 pages forward/backward. • You can use the external device operation keys on the remote control to control playback (some functions may not work depending on the PC/NAS). Return Returns to the higher-level list. • You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.102). Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. 10 Pages Down En 78 ■ Shuffle/repeat settings You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for the playback of PC music content. AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT AUDIO MAIN ZONE 2 1 When “SERVER” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or “Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM • Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display. TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING OPTION Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Item Shuffle (Shuffle) PRESET Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. On (On) Plays back songs in the current album (folder) in random order. “x” appears on the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears on the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs in the current album (folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the TV screen. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT Repeat (Repeat) 4 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. En 79 Listening to Internet radio AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world. Playback of Internet radio AUDIO 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT MAIN ZONE 2 NET • To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.35). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.130) in the “Information” menu. 1 The browse screen is displayed on the TV. • You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU • The unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service. • This service may be discontinued without notice. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the input source. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 2 BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. 4 • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. • You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by selecting the shortcut numbers (p.92). En 80 ■ Browse screen AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT MAIN ZONE 2 4 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO 1 Playback indicator 1 Playback indicator 2 List name 2 Playback information VOLUME MUTE TOP MENU 3 5 SCENE 1 PROGRAM 1 2 1 2 3 AUDIO 1 ■ Playback screen ON SCREEN Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER BAND MODE TUNING External device operation keys PRESET Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. 3 Contents list POP-UP/MENU 3 Operation menu Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. 4 Item number/total 5 Operation menu Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu Function Bookmark On Adds the current station to the “Bookmarks” folder (p.82). Browse Moves to the browse screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT Menu Function Bookmark On (Bookmark Off) Adds/removes the station selected in the list to/from the “Bookmarks” folder (p.82). 1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of the list. 1 Page Down 10 Pages Up Moves 10 pages forward/backward. • You can use the external device operation key (s) on the remote control to stop playback. Return Returns to the higher-level list. • Some information may not be available depending on the station. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. 10 Pages Down En 81 Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks) AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX By registering your favorite Internet radio stations to “Bookmarks”, you can quickly access to them from the “Bookmarks” folder in the browse screen. AUDIO 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT MAIN ZONE 2 3 ■ Registering the station on the browse/playback screen Access the vTuner website (http://yradio.vtuner.com/) with the web browser on your PC and enter the vTuner ID. You can switch the language. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU Select the desired Internet radio station in the browse screen or start playback of it to display the playback screen. 2 Press the cursor key (r) to select “Bookmark On” and press ENTER. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM 1 POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION The selected station is added to the “Bookmarks” folder. Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN Enter the vTuner ID in this area. DISPLAY BAND • To remove stations from the “Bookmarks” folder, select the station in the “Bookmarks” folder and then “Bookmark Off”. MODE TUNING PRESET • To use this feature, you need to create your personal account. Create your account using your e-mail address. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ■ Registering the station on the vTuner website 1 Select any of Internet radio stations on the unit. This operation is necessary to register the radio station for the first time. 2 Check the vTuner ID of the unit. You can find the vTuner ID in “Network” (p.130) in the “Information” menu. En 82 4 Register your favorite radio stations. Click the “Add” icon (❤+) next to the station name. • To remove the station from the “Bookmarks” folder, select “Bookmarks” in the Home screen, and then click the “Remove” icon (❤–) next to the station name. Playing back music with AirPlay Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on the unit via network. iTunes Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music contents on the unit. PC (wired or wireless) 1 Router The unit Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or display the playback screen on the iPod. If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon ( iTunes (example) (wired or wireless) iPod iOS7/iOS8 (example) ) appears. iPod iOS6 (example) iPhone/iPad/ iPod touch • If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are connected to the router properly. 2 • To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same router. You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.130) in the “Information” menu. • When using a multiple SSID router, access to the unit might be restricted depending on the SSID to connect. Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit. On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and select the unit (network name of the unit) as the audio output device. iTunes (example) iPod (example) • For details on supported iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.150). • You can restrict access to the unit using the AirPlay Password (p.95). Network name of the unit 3 Select a song and start playback. The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and starts playback. The playback screen is displayed on the TV. En 83 • You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by setting “Network Standby” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu to “On”. AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT • You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on iTunes/iPod in “Network Name” (p.123) in the “Setup” menu. AUDIO MAIN ZONE 2 • You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote control to control playback. • If you select the other input source on the unit during playback, playback on the iTunes/iPod stops automatically. • You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable volume controls from iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.102) in the “Input” menu to “Off”. • To control iTunes playback with the remote control of the unit, you need to configure the iTunes preferences to enable iTunes control from remote speakers in advance. iTunes (example of English version) SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU • When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the volume suddenly increases during playback, stop playback on the iTunes/iPod immediately. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM Caution POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER ■ Playback screen 1 2 BAND MODE TUNING External device operation keys PRESET Check this box SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 3 ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 5 6 7 4 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 1 Playback indicator 2 Playback information Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining time. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. 3 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu Function Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. En 84 Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) ■ Enjoying videos/music in another room The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input sources in the room where the unit is installed (main zone) and in another room (Zone2). You can enjoy videos/music using a TV placed in another room. For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (main zone), another person can listen to radio in the study room (Zone2). ❑ Enjoying videos/music using a TV and speakers • Video/audio signals that can be output to Zone2 vary depending on how you connect the device in Zone2 to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see “Multi-zone output” (p.152). Video (ZONE OUT or HDMI) • Since there are many possible ways to use the unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about the multi-zone connections that best meet your requirements. Audio (SPEAKERS or ZONE OUT) Multi-zone configuration examples Study room (Zone2) ■ Enjoying music in another room You can enjoy music using speakers placed in another room. Living room (main zone) Connections TV (for analog video playback): p.87 TV (for digital video playback): p.88 Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.25 Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.87 Audio (SPEAKERS or ZONE OUT) Study room (Zone2) Living room (main zone) Connections Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.25 Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.87 En 85 ❑ Enjoying videos/music using only a TV Preparing Zone2 Connect the device that will be used in Zone2 to the unit. Caution • Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting speakers or an external amplifier. Video/audio (HDMI) • Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on. Study room (Zone2) ■ Connecting speakers to play back audio Connect speakers to play back audio in Zone2. The connection method varies depending on the amplifier being used (the unit or an external amplifier). Living room (main zone) Connection TV: p.88 ❑ Using the unit’s internal amplifier Connect the speakers placed in Zone2 to the unit with speaker cables. For details, see “Connecting Zone2 speakers” (p.25). En 86 ❑ Using an external amplifier ■ Connecting a video monitor to play back analog videos Connect the external amplifier (with volume control) placed in Zone2 to the unit with a stereo pin cable and connect speakers to the external amplifier. Connect a video monitor to watch analog videos at Zone2. Depending on the video input jacks available on your video monitor, choose one of the video connection methods. The unit (rear) ZONE OUT (ZONE 2) jacks HDMI OUT (HDCP2.2) 2 (ZONE OUT) AV 1 AV 2 (1 BD/DVD) 1 AV 1 AV 2 (1 BD/DVD) ARC AV 3 AV 4 MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT • The video conversion between the analog video jacks does not work for Zone2 video output. To watch videos played back on a video device on the Zone2 video monitor, you need to connect the video monitor to the unit in the same way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from the DVD player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks with a component video cable. Y ZONE OUT PHONO AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 (2 TV) A Y AV ZONE OUT L L R R GND 1 OPTICAL 2 OPTICAL 3 COAXIAL 4 COAXIAL 5 COAXIAL 6 OPTICAL ZONE 2 R FRONT SURROUND The unit (rear) L ZONE 2 (4 RADIO) 75Ω FM HDMI (HDCP2.2) HDMI OUT ANTENNA (HDCP2.2) 2 External amplifier Audio input (analog stereo) AM ZONE OUT) AV 2 1 AV 3 AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 (1 BD/DVD) ARC AV 4 MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT PB Y COMPONENT VIDEO Y PR AV 2 A Y AV 1 MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT 5 COAXIAL R 6 OPTICAL PR Y (SINGLE) PB Y ZONE 2 R PB PRE OUT ZONE OUT L PB PR B FRONT SURROUND L C AV 3 PB PR 2 SURROUND SUR. BACK R SUBWOOFER SURROUND BACK PR CENTER L COMPONENT VIDEO PB ZONE R BI–AM Y AUDIO Video input (component video or composite video) P 1 Y PR PB PR NA O) AM PB V Y SINGLE ZONE OUT jacks (COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO) VIDEO V Zone2 Main zone Zone2 Main zone To assign the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks to the Zone2 video monitor, set “Monitor Out Assign” (p.125) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2”. En 87 ■ Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back videos/audio • When the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2, you can enable/disable the audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 jack by setting “Audio Output” (p.120) in the “Setup” menu to “On” or “Off” (default). Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as a TV) to play back videos/audio at Zone2. • You can also use speakers placed in Zone2 to output audio (p.25). • Videos/audio interruptions may happen in another zone when any of the following operations is performed. • To watch videos played back on a video device at Zone2, you need to connect the video device to the unit with an HDMI cable (p.30). – Tuning on/off a TV connected to the unit via HDMI or switching the TV input – Enabling/disabling a zone output or selecting its input source • We recommend that you disable HDMI Control on the playback devices connected to the unit. – Changing the sound mode or audio settings • On-screen operations are not available for Zone2. HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack The unit (rear) HDMI OUT HDMI OUT (HDCP2.2) 2 (ZONE OUT) 1 ARC AV 1 2(1 B (HDCP2.2) (ZONE OUT) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 4 COAXIAL 5 COAXIAL 6 OPTICAL (1 BD/DVD) PHONO AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 2 OPTICAL 3 COAXIAL HDMI AV 4 (2 TV) L R GND 1 OPTICAL ZO ANTENNA (4 RADIO) 75Ω FM AM (Example: using a TV) HDMI input HDMI HDMI Zone2 Main zone To assign the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack to Zone2, set “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.125) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2”. En 88 ■ Operating the unit from Zone2 (remote connection) Remote connections between Yamaha products An infrared signal transmitter is not required if you are using Yamaha products that support remote connections, as the unit does. You can transmit remote control signals by connecting the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an infrared signal receiver. You can operate the unit or external devices from Zone2 using the remote control supplied with each device if you connect an infrared signal receiver/emitter to the unit’s REMOTE IN/OUT jacks. REMOTE IN/OUT jacks • (China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only) You can operate external devices with the supplied remote control if you register a remote control code for each device. For details, refer to “Supplement for Remote Control” on the supplied CD-ROM. REMOTE REMOTE IN/OUT jacks REMOTE IN IN OUT OUT REMOTE IN/OUT jacks Infrared signal receiver The unit (rear) HDMI (HDCP2.2) AV 3 UT/ AV 4 PB Y NETWORK AV 5 AV 6 COMPONENT VIDEO Y PR AV 2 PB (3N AV 7 Yamaha products (up to six, including the unit) TRIGGER OUT PR B 1 REMOTE 12V 0.1A MAX. TOTAL IN RS-232 OUT 2 A Y AV 1 PB PRE OUT PR Y (SINGLE) C AV 3 PB REMOTE IN PR OUT 1 Remote control 2 FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER CENTER SPEAKERS UND L R SURROUND BACK L ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/ R BI–AMP EXTRA SP L CENTER R Zone2 SINGLE Infrared signal transmitter Infrared signal receiver External device (such as a CD player) Remote control (supplied with each device) Zone2 Main zone En 89 z Controlling Zone2 4 AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT MAIN ZONE 2 Input selection keys 1 2 MAIN/ZONE2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU 3 Set MAIN/ZONE2 to “ZONE2”. Refer to the instruction manual for the external device. Press z (receiver power). For details on the following operations, see the corresponding pages. Each time you press the key, Zone2 is enabled or disabled. • Listening to FM/AM radio (p.65) When Zone2 is enabled, “ZONE2” lights up in the front display. • Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.69) Use the input selection keys to select an input source. • Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.73) OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING • Video/audio signals that can be output to Zone2 vary depending on how you connect the device in Zone2 to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see “Multi-zone output” (p.152). • You cannot select Bluetooth, USB and network sources exclusively for each zone. For example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is selected for the main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches to “SERVER”. PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT • Listening to Internet radio (p.80) • Playing back music with AirPlay (p.83) • The on-screen operations are not available for Zone2. Use the front display or web control (p.93) to control Zone2. • AirPlay is available in Zone2 only when AirPlay playback is ongoing in the main zone. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 • Playing back iPod music (p.70) • Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.76) POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Start playback on the external device or select a radio station. 4 • The Zone2 input automatically switches in conjunction with the input source selected in the main zone when “Main Zone Sync” is selected as the Zone2 input with the web control (p.93) or AV CONTROLLER (p.8). • To play back DSD audio in Zone2, select “Main Zone Sync” as the Zone2 input or use the party mode (p.91). Caution • To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2. En 90 ■ Other operations for Zone2 The following functions are also available when Zone2 is enabled. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX Adjusting the volume Press VOLUME or MUTE. AUDIO 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT Selecting the input source and settings at once (SCENE) Press SCENE. MAIN ZONE 2 PARTY 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN SCENE MUTE Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or off. Setting the sleep timer When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the front display. Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off). Adjusting the high-/low-frequency range of sounds ENTER a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel. RETURN DISPLAY b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”. BAND MODE TUNING c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment. PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT Press PARTY. • To register the current settings (input source, volume and tone control) to a scene, hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front display. VOLUME OPTION The party mode allows you to play back in Zone2 the same music that is being played back in the main zone. During the party mode, stereo playback is automatically selected for all zones. Utilize this function when you want to use main zone music as background music for a house party. 1 SCENE 1 ■ Enjoying the same source in multiple rooms (party mode) Setting range -6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Default 0.0 dB Adjusting the Zone2 front speaker balance a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel. b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Balance”. c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment. En 91 • If the party mode does not work on Zone2, set “Party Mode Set” (p.125) in the “Setup” menu to “Enable” (default). Registering favorite items (shortcut) AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX You can register up to 40 favorite USB and network contents as shortcuts and access them directly by selecting the shortcut numbers. AUDIO 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT MAIN ZONE 2 BLUETOOTH USB NET • You can also use the “Bookmarks” feature to register Internet radio stations (p.82). • Only the input source will be registered for Bluetooth and AirPlay. Individual contents cannot be registered. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU Select a desired item and register it to a shortcut number. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION 1 2 ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Play back a song or a radio station to be registered. TUNING PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE HD 3 MUSIC MemoryPreset 01:Empty SLEEP 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT DOCK TAG HD IN OUT 1 OUT 2 PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 2 3 4 SLEEP HD 3 RecallPreset 01:USB MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR • The registered item cannot be recalled in the following cases. PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR – The USB storage device which contains the registered item is not connected to the unit. Shortcut number (flashes) 1 Use the numeric keys to enter a shortcut number (01 to 40). • “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered. MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO Press BLUETOOTH, USB or NET. • “No Presets” appears when no items are registered. DOCK TAG HD PRESET 1 2 Press MEMORY. BAND MODE Recall a registered item by selecting the shortcut number. You can also use PRESET on the front panel to select a shortcut. Registering an item VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM Recalling a registered item – The PC/NAS which contains the registered item is turned off or not connected to the network. Numeric keys MEMORY • To change a shortcut number to which the item will be registered, use numeric keys to select the shortcut number after Step 2. DOCK TAG HD IN OUT 1 OUT 2 PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 2 3 4 SLEEP HD 3 MemoryPreset 02:Empty – The registered item (file) has been deleted or moved to another location. – A Bluetooth connection cannot be established. • When you register music files stored on a USB storage device or a PC/NAS, the unit memorizes the relative position of the music files in the folder. If you have added or deleted any music files to or from the folder, the unit may not recall the music file correctly. In such cases, register the items again. MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR “Empty” (not in use) or item currently registered 3 – The registered network content is temporarily unavailable or out of service. To confirm the registration, press MEMORY. En 92 Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control) You can control the unit with the web control screen displayed in a web browser. Web browser • You can check the IP address of the unit in “Network” (p.130) in the “Information” menu. • You can bookmark the unit’s IP address in the browser or create a shortcut link (p.95) to access the web control screen quickly in the future. However, if you are using a DHCP server, the IP address of the unit may change each time the unit is turned on. Web control (wired or wireless) PC • If you have enabled the MAC address filter (p.122), you need to specify the MAC address of your PC to allow the PC to access the unit. For information on how to check the MAC address of your PC, refer to its instruction manual. Web control • If you are using Windows 8, we recommend you start Internet Explorer in the following way. (wired or wireless) Router The unit – Select “Desktop” in the Start screen and click the Internet Explorer icon at the bottom left of the screen. • By using the application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER”, you can control the unit from an iPhone, iPad, iPod touch or Android devices (p.8). • To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router. • Some security software installed on your PC may block the access of the unit to your PC. In these cases, configure the security software appropriately. • To display the web control screen or turn on the unit from the web control when the unit is in standby mode, set “Network Standby” (p.95) to “On”. • We recommend using one of the following web browsers. – Internet Explorer 9.x, 10.x or 11.x – Safari 7.x 1 2 Start the web browser. Enter the IP address of the unit in the address bar of the web browser. (Example) En 93 ■ Top menu screen ■ Control screen 3 1 5 1 6 2 3 4 4 5 7 2 1 CONTROL 6 1 PLAY INFO Moves to the control screen for the selected zone. Selects an input source or controls playback for the selected zone. 2 STATUS 2 TOP MENU Turns on/off the power for each zone or displays the input source and volume set for each zone. Moves to the top menu screen. 3 SETTINGS 3 SCENE Moves to the settings screen. Selects a scene for the selected zone. 4 PARTY MODE 4 POWER Turns on/off the party mode (p.91). Turns on/off the power for the selected zone. 5 SYSTEM POWER 5 VOLUME Turns on/off the power for all zones. Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the selected zone. You can also select the increments used for volume adjustment. 6 MAIN VOLUME 6 RELOAD Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the main zone. You can also select the increments used for volume adjustment. Reloads the current status of the unit. 7 RELOAD Reloads the current status of the unit. • Multi-zone volume adjustment is not available when an external amplifier is used. En 94 ■ Settings screen 2 BACK Moves to the top menu screen. 3 RELOAD Reloads the current status of the unit. 1 Note • If the network settings are changed, you may need to restart the browser or regain access to the unit. • When using the MAC address filter, make sure you specify the MAC addresses of your network devices correctly. Otherwise, the unit will be inaccessible from your network devices such as PCs and other external devices. 2 • Do not operate the unit during the recovery process, as this may result in the incorrect recovery of the settings. When the recovery finishes, click “OK” to set the unit to standby mode. 3 • The backup does not contain user information (such as user account and password) or unit-specific information (such as MAC address and IP address). • Some characters entered with a PC may not appear correctly on the unit. 1 Rename Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.123) or the name of each zone (p.124). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit. Network Selects the network connection method (p.121) or configures the network parameters (such as IP address) (p.121). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit. AirPlay Password Sets the password to restrict access to the unit via AirPlay (p.83). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit. MAC Filter Sets the MAC address filter (p.122) to limit access to the unit from the network devices. Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit. Auto Reload Enables/disables automatic reloading. When “Auto Reload” is “On” (enabled), the web control screen reloads the status of the unit every 5 seconds. Network Standby Enables/disables the network standby function (p.122). Backup/Recovery Creates a backup of the unit’s settings on the PC or restores the settings from the backup. Firmware Update Updates the firmware of the unit by using the firmware you have downloaded on the PC. Follow the on-screen instructions to start the firmware update. Create Link Creates a shortcut link to the desired control screen. Tips Displays tips for use of the web control. Licenses Displays the licenses of the software used in the unit. En 95 Viewing the current status AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX 3 PHONO Switching information on the front display AUDIO 1 2 TUNER MAIN BLUETOOTH ZONE 2 USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT 1 Press INFO. Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO DOCK TAG HD IN OUT 1 OUT 2 PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 2 3 4 SLEEP HD 3 Bluetooth USB SERVER AirPlay MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM Info AudioDecoder Input source group Item Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) * During simple playback of iPod: DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) Song (song title), Album (album name), Station (station name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) Item name TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed item appears. OPTION Viewing the status information on the TV ENTER DOCK TAG HD RETURN DISPLAY DISPLAY PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP HD 3 BAND MODE TUNING PRESET ¡¡¡¡AV1 †‡PLƒx¡MOVIE * The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio decoder is activated, “Decoder Off” appears. MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR 1 Information MOVIE Press DISPLAY. The following information is displayed on the TV. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT Compressed Music Enhancer status INFO INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 3 4 • Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed item can also be applied separately to each input source group. Input source group Item AV 1–7 V-AUX AUDIO 1–3 PHONO DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) TUNER Input source/ Party mode status Volume/ YPAO Volume status Audio format/ Decoder Sound mode * (U.K. and Europe models only) Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.67). CINEMA DSP status 2 En 96 To close the information display, press DISPLAY. Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) Option menu items You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily configure settings during playback. 1 Press OPTION. • Available items vary depending on the selected input source. • Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display. DOCK TAG HD IN OUT 1 OUT 2 PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 2 3 4 SLEEP HD 3 Option ToneControl • Default settings are underlined. MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Front display Item Function Tone Control (Tone Control) Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range of sounds. 98 Enables/disables YPAO Volume. 98 Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume is adjusted. 98 YPAO Volume (YPAO Vol.) YPAO Volume (YPAO Volume) Adaptive DRC (A.DRC) Dialogue (Dialog) TV screen 2 • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. 3 4 Dialogue Level Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. (Dialog Lvl) 99 Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift) 99 Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. Subwoofer Trim Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. Subwoofer/Bass (SW.Trim) (Subwoofer/Bass) Extra Bass Enables/disables Extra Bass. (Extra Bass) Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. Enhancer (Enhancer) Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. To exit from the menu, press OPTION. 99 Hi-Res Mode (HiRes Mode) Enables/disables the high-resolution mode (for enhancing the quality of uncompressed digital audio). 100 Enables/disables the video signal processing settings configured in the “Setup” menu. 100 Corrects volume differences between input sources. 100 Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one audio connection is made for one input source. 100 Selects a video to be output with the audio input source. 100 Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception. 100 Input Settings Audio Select (Input Settings) (A.Sel) Video Out (V.Out) 97 99 Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. Input Trim (In.Trim) En 99 Enhancer (Enhancer) Video Processing (Video Process.) FM Mode (FM Mode) Page Item Function Traffic Program (TrafficProgram) (U.K. and Europe models only) Automatically searches for a traffic information station. 67 Shuffle (Shuffle) Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod (p.72), USB storage device (p.75), or media server (p.79). — Repeat (Repeat) Configures the repeat setting for the iPod (p.72), USB storage device (p.75), or media server (p.79). — ■ YPAO Volume (YPAO Volume) Page Enables/disables YPAO Volume or Adaptive DRC. YPAO Volume (YPAO Vol.) Enables/disables YPAO Volume. When YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy natural sounds even at low volume. Settings ■ Tone Control (Tone Control) Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds. Off (Off) Disables YPAO Volume. On (On) Enables YPAO Volume. Choices Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass) • YPAO Volume works effectively after the measurement results of “Auto Setup” have been already saved (p.39). Setting range -6.0 dB to Bypass (Bypass) to +6.0 dB, *0.5 dB increments • We recommend enabling both YPAO Volume and Adaptive DRC when you are listening at lower volumes or at night. Adaptive DRC (A.DRC) • If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels. Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for listening to playback at a low volume at night. • You can also adjust the “Tone Control” setting with the front panel controls by pressing TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”, and PROGRAM to make an adjustment. Settings Off (Off) The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted. On (On) Automatically adjusts the dynamic range when YPAO Volume is enabled. If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide at a high volume. On Off Input level En 98 Volume: high Output level Output level Volume: low On Off Input level ■ Dialogue (Dialog) ■ Subwoofer/Bass (Subwoofer/Bass) Adjusts the volume or perceive height of dialogue sounds. Adjust the subwoofer volume or bass sound. Dialogue Level (Dialog Lvl) Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim) Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. If dialogue sounds cannot be heard clearly, you can turn up its volume by increasing this setting. Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. Setting range -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Setting range 0 to 3 Extra Bass (Extra Bass) Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift) Enables/disables Extra Bass. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can enjoy enhanced bass sounds, regardless of the size of the front speakers and the presence or absence of the subwoofer. Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. If the dialogue sounds as if it is coming from below the TV screen, you can raise its perceived height by increasing this setting. Settings • This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met. Off (Off) Disables Extra Bass. On (On) Enables Extra Bass. – One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) is selected when front presence speakers are used. ■ Enhancer (Enhancer) – Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.60) is working. (You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.) Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer and the high-resolution mode. Setting range 0 to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position) Enhancer (Enhancer) Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.64). Ideal position • This setting is applied separately to each input source. • Compressed Music Enhancer works on both the main zone and Zone 2. • You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.64). Settings Off (Off) Disables Compressed Music Enhancer. On (On) Enables Compressed Music Enhancer. Default TUNER, Bluetooth, USB, (network sources): On (On) Others: Off (Off) • Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz. En 99 Hi-Res Mode (HiRes Mode) Audio Select (A.Sel) Enables/disables the high-resolution mode when “Enhancer” is set to “On”. If this function is set to “On”, you can enhance the quality of uncompressed digital audio (such as 2-channel PCM and FLAC) using Compressed Music Enhancer. Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one audio connection is made for one input source. Settings Settings On (On) Enables the high-resolution mode. (The high-resolution mode may not work depending on the audio signal processing condition.) Off (Off) Disables the high-resolution mode. ■ Video Processing (Video Process.) Auto (Auto) Automatically selects the audio input jack in the following priority order. 1. HDMI input 2. Digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL) 3. Analog input (AUDIO) HDMI (HDMI) Always selects HDMI input. No sounds are produced when no signals are input through the HDMI jack. Always selects digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL). No sounds are Coax/Opt (Coax/Opt) produced when no signals are input through the COAXIAL or OPTICAL jack. Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio) settings configured in “Processing” (p.119) in the “Setup” menu. Analog (Analog) Settings Direct (Direct) Disables the video signal processing. Processing (Processing) Enables the video signal processing. Always selects analog input (AUDIO). No sounds are produced when no signals are input through the AUDIO jacks. Video Out (V.Out) Selects a video to be output with the audio input source. Settings ■ Input Settings (Input Settings) Off (Off) Does not output video. Configures the input settings. AV 1–7 (AV1–7), V-AUX (V-AUX) Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks. ■ FM Mode (FM Mode) • This setting is applied separately to each input source. Input Trim (In.Trim) Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception. Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it. Settings Setting range -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) En 100 Stereo (Stereo) Receives FM radio in stereo sounds. Mono (Mono) Receives FM radio in monaural sounds. CONFIGURATIONS 4 Configuring input sources (Input menu) Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. You can change the input source settings using the TV screen. 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER. • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. 3 5 6 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an input source to be configured and press the cursor key (q). Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Input menu items • Available items vary depending on the selected input source. • Default settings are underlined. The input source of the unit also changes. • You can still switch the input source by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3. En 101 Item Function Page Rename/Icon Select Changes the input source name and icon. 102 Decoder Mode Sets the format of digital audio playback to DTS. 102 Volume Interlock Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay. 102 DMC Control Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. 102 ■ Rename/Icon Select ■ Decoder Mode Changes the input source name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen. Sets the format of digital audio playback to “DTS”. For example, if the unit does not detect DTS audio and outputs noise, set “Decoder Mode” to “DTS”. Input sources AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–3, PHONO, USB Input sources AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–3 (available only when any audio digital input jack is assigned) ■ Setup procedure 1 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a template and press the cursor key (w). Settings Auto Automatically selects an audio format to match the input audio signal. DTS Selects DTS only. (Other audio signals are not reproduced.) ■ Volume Interlock Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay. Input sources AirPlay Settings • You cannot change the template or icon for “USB” when an iPod is connected. 2 3 4 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w). Off Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod. Limited Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range (-80 dB to -20 dB and mute). Full Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range (-80 dB to +16.5 dB and mute). Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. ■ DMC Control Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. Input source SERVER Settings • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 5 Does not allow DMCs to control playback. Enable Allows DMCs to control playback. Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. • A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network. When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media Player 12) on the same network. • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. 6 Disable To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. En 102 Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) 4 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. 5 6 Use the cursor keys and ENTER to change the setting. You can change the settings of the SCENE function (p.57) using the TV screen. 1 2 3 Press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Scene menu items Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a scene to be configured and press the cursor key (q). Item Function Save Registers the current settings in the selected scene. Page 103 Load Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. You can also configure the SCENE link playback setting, select items to be included as the scene assignments, or view the settings currently assigned to the selected scene. 104 Rename/Icon Select Changes the scene name and icon. 105 Reset Restores the default settings for the selected scene. 105 ■ Save Registers the unit’s current settings (such as input source and sound program) in the selected scene. • You can still switch the scene by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3. • If you have changed the input assignment for a scene, you also need to change the external device assigned to the corresponding SCENE key (p.58). En 103 ■ Load Detail Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. Selects items to be included as the scene assignments. You can also view the settings currently assigned to the selected scene. Select “DETAIL” to configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene assignments. To include items as the scene assignments, use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to check the box (or uncheck the box to exclude). Device Control For example, if you often adjust the volume while watching TV but listen to radio with low volume at night, exclude “Volume” from the assignments for SCENE2 (TV) and include “Volume” in the assignments for SCENE4 (RADIO). Recalls a selected scene and starts its playback on an external device connected to the unit via HDMI. (SCENE link playback) Settings Off Disables the SCENE link playback function. HDMI Control Enables SCENE link playback using HDMI Control signals. Select this if an HDMI Control-compatible device (such as a BD/DVD player) is connected to the unit via HDMI. It also turns on the TV if it supports HDMI Control. Check or uncheck Default SCENE1 (BD/DVD), SCENE2 (TV): HDMI Control SCENE3 (NET), SCENE4 (RADIO), SCENE5–12: Off Choices Input • To control playback of an HDMI Control-compatible device by SCENE link playback, you need to set “HDMI Control” in the “Setup” menu to “On” and perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.152). Input (p.56), Audio Select (p.100) HDMI Output HDMI Output (p.56) Mode DSP Program (p.59), Pure Direct Mode (p.118), Enhancer (p.64), Enhancer Hi-Res Mode (p.100) Sound Tone Control (p.98), YPAO Volume (p.98), Adaptive DRC (p.98), Extra Bass (p.99) Surround CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (p.118), Dialogue Lift (p.99), Dialogue Level (p.99), Subwoofer Trim (p.99) Video Video Mode (p.119) Volume Master Volume (p.56) Lipsync Lipsync (p.117), Delay (p.117) Speaker Setup Setting Pattern (p.113), PEQ Select (p.116) Default Input, HDMI Output, Mode: selected Sound, Surround, Video, Volume, Lipsync, Speaker Setup: not selected En 104 ■ Rename/Icon Select Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (DSP Program menu) Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen. ■ Setup procedure 1 2 3 You can change the settings of the sound programs and surround decoders using the TV screen. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w). 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a sound program to be configured and press the cursor key (q). Use the cursor keys to select “DSP Program” and press ENTER. Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 4 Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. 5 • You can still switch the sound program by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ■ Reset Restores the default settings (p.57) for the selected scene. En 105 4 DSP Program menu items Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. • Available items vary depending on the selected sound program or surround decoder. • Default settings are underlined. ■ Settings for sound programs • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. Item Function Decode Type bSurround*, bPLIIx Movie (bPLII Movie), bPLIIx Music* (bPLII Music*), Selects a surround decoder to be used bPLIIx Game* (bPLII in combination with the selected sound Game*), Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music* program. (* Available only when “SURROUND DECODER” is selected) DSP Level Adjusts the sound field effect level. -6 dB to 0 dB to +3 dB Higher to enhance the sound field effect, and lower to reduce it. Initial Delay Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and presence sound field generation. 1 ms to 99 ms Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it. Surround Initial Delay Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround sound field generation. • To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”. 5 6 Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. En 106 Surround Back Initial Delay Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround back sound field generation. Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the presence sound field. Surround Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround sound field. Surround Back Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround back sound field. Settings 1 ms to 49 ms Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it. 0.1 to 2.0 Higher to enhance the broadening effect, and lower to reduce it. Item Function Liveness Adjusts the loss of the presence sound field. The following items are available when you select “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo”. Settings Sound program 0 to 10 Higher to enhance the reflectivity, and lower to reduce it. Surround Liveness Adjusts the loss of the surround sound field. Surround Back Liveness Adjusts the loss of the surround back sound field. Reverb Time Adjust the decay time of the rear reverberant sound. 1.0 s to 5.0 s Higher to enrich the reverberant sound and lower to have clear sound. Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and reverberant sound generation. 0 ms to 250 ms Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it. Adjusts the volume of the reverberant sound. 0% to 100% Higher to strengthen the reverberant sound, and lower to weaken it. Reverb Delay Reverb Level 2ch Stereo Item Function Settings Direct Selects whether to automatically bypass the DSP circuit when an analog audio source is played back. Auto, Off Level Adjusts the entire volume. -5 to 0 to +5 Front / Rear Balance Adjusts the front and rear volume balance. -5 to 0 to +5 Higher to enhance the front side, and lower to enhance the rear side. Left / Right Balance Adjusts the left and right volume balance. -5 to 0 to +5 Higher to enhance the right side, and lower to enhance the left side. Height Balance Adjust the height volume balance using the front presence speakers. 0 to 5 to 10 Higher to enhance the upside, and lower to enhance the downside. (The front presence speakers do not produce sounds when “Height Balance” is set to “0”.) Monaural Mix Enables/disables monaural sound output. Off, On 7ch Stereo • Available items in “7ch Stereo” vary depending on the speaker system being used. En 107 ■ Settings for decoders The following items are available when you set “Decode Type” of “SURROUND DECODER” to “bSurround”, “bPLIIx Music” (bPLII Music) or “Neo:6 Music”. Decode Type bSurround Item Function Settings Center Spread Selects whether to spread the center channel signals to left and right when 2-channel source is played. Off, On Select “On” to spread center channel signals to left and right if you feel the center sound is too strong when 2-channel source is played. Panorama Adjusts the broadening effect of the front sound field. Off, On Select “On” to wrap front left/right channel sounds around the field and generate a spacious sound field in combination with the surround sound field. Center Width Adjusts the broadening effect of the center sound field. 0 to 3 to 7 Higher to enhance the broadening effect, and lower to reduce it (closer to center). Dimension Adjusts the difference in level between the front and surround sound fields. -3 to 0 to +3 Higher to strengthen the front sound field and lower to strengthen the surround sound field. Center Image Adjusts the center orientation level (broadening effect) of the front sound field. 0.0 to 0.3 to 1.0 Higher to strengthen the center orientation level (less broadening effect) and lower to weaken (more broadening effect). bPLIIx Music (bPLII Music) Neo:6 Music En 108 4 Configuring various functions (Setup menu) Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen. 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. 3 5 6 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a menu. En 109 Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Setup menu items Menu Item Function Auto Setup Automatically optimizes the speaker settings (YPAO). 39 Setting Pattern Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them. 113 Setting Data Copy Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction. 113 Power Amp Assign Selects a speaker system. 113 Front Selects the size of the front speakers. 114 Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. 114 Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size. 114 Surround Back Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size. 114 Front Presence Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected and their size. 114 Subwoofer Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase. 115 Layout Selects the layouts of the surround speakers and front presence speakers. 115 Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. 115 Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. 115 Parametric EQ Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. 116 Test Tone Enables/disables the test tone output. 116 Speaker Configuration Page Manual Setup En 110 Menu Item Video HDMI Network Bluetooth Page Delay Enable Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source. 117 Auto/Manual Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. 117 Adjustment Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually. 117 Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. 117 Max Volume Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. 117 Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. 118 Pure Direct Mode Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode. 118 Adaptive DSP Level Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level. 118 CINEMA DSP 3D Mode Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D. 118 Virtual Surround Back Speaker Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers. 118 Object Decode Mode Enables/disables playback of object-based audio signals such as Dolby Atmos contents. 118 Video Mode Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio). 119 HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control. You can also configure the relevant settings (such as ARC and TV audio input). 120 Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. 120 Standby Through Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. 121 Network Connection Selects the network connection method. 121 IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). 121 Network Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices. 122 MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. 122 Network Name Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. 123 Bluetooth Enables/disables the Bluetooth functions. 123 Terminates the Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and the unit. 69 Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth devices (Bluetooth standby). 123 Lipsync Sound Function Audio Receive Disconnect Bluetooth Standby En 111 Menu Item Function Page Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 124 Volume Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output. 124 Max Volume Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness in the second zone. 124 Initial Volume Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on. 125 Audio Delay Adjusts the Zone2 audio output timing. 125 Mono Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 output. 125 Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 125 Monitor Out Assign Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks are used. 125 HDMI OUT2 Assign Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used. 125 Party Mode Set Enables/disables switching to the party mode. 125 Input Assignment Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source. 126 Dimmer (Front Display) Adjusts the brightness of the front display. 126 Short Message Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the 11unit is operated. 126 Wallpaper Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV. 126 Trigger Mode Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. 127 Target Zone Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized. 127 Memory Guard Prevents accidental changes to the settings. 127 Auto Power Standby Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. 128 ECO Mode Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode). 128 Select an on-screen menu language. 128 Main Zone Set Zone2 Set Multi Zone Display Set Function Trigger Output1 Trigger Output2 ECO Language En 112 ■ Setting Data Copy Speaker (Manual Setup) Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction. Configures the speaker settings manually. Choices Pattern1 > 2 Copies the “Pattern1” parameters to “Pattern2”. Pattern2 > 1 Copies the “Pattern2” parameters to “Pattern1”. • Some speaker settings are not available depending on the selected “Power Amp Assign” setting. • Default settings are underlined. ■ Power Amp Assign Selects a speaker system. The unit has 7 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 9 speakers and up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to create the favorite acoustic space in your room. You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system. Settings ■ Setting Pattern Basic Select this option when you use the basic speaker configuration (up to 7-channel plus front presence speakers) (p.17). Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them. 7ch +1ZONE When you configure the following speaker settings, the settings will be memorized in the selected pattern. Select this option when you use 7-channel speakers in the main zone and Zone2 speakers (p.24). 5ch BI-AMP Select this option when you use 5-channel speakers (including bi-amp front speakers) (p.23). 5ch BI-AMP +SB Select this option when you use 5-channel speakers (including bi-amp front speakers) plus surround back channel expansion using an external amplifier (p.24). • Measurement results (Auto Setup) • Power Amp Assign • Configuration • Distance ■ Configuration • Level Configures the output characteristics of the speakers. • Parametric EQ Settings Pattern1, Pattern2 • When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm (6-1/4”) or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”). • The setting pattern currently selected is shown at the top of the “Manual Setup” screen. • This function is useful when you want to save certain settings according to the varying conditions of your listening environment. For example, if you want to switch the settings when curtains are open or closed, you can save the settings suited for each condition and switch between them. En 113 Front Surround Back Selects the size of the front speakers. Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes. Settings Settings Large Select this option for large speakers. The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency components. Large x1 Select this option when one large speaker is connected. The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back channel frequency components. Small Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz). Large x2 Select this option when two large speakers are connected. The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back channel frequency components. Small x1 Select this option when one small speaker is connected. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz). Small x2 Select this option when two small speakers are connected. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz). None Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected. The surround speakers will produce surround back channel audio. • “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”. Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. Settings Large Select this option for large speakers. The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency components. Small Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz). None Select this option when no center speaker is connected. The front speakers will produce center channel audio. • This setting is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”, or when “Layout (Surround)” is set to “Front”. Front Presence Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected and their size. Settings Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes. Large Select this option for large speakers. Small Select this option for small speakers. None Select this option when no front presence speakers are connected. Settings Large Select this option for large speakers. The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel frequency components. Small Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz). None Select this option when no surround speakers are connected. The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program. En 114 Subwoofer • This setting is not available when “Configuration (Front Presence)” is set to “None”. Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase. • To play Dolby Atmos contents using the front presence speakers, see “Presence speaker layout” (p.19). Settings Normal Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase not reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. Reverse Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. ■ Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance from “Meter” or “Feet”. Use None Choices Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer Select this option when no subwoofer is connected. The front speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. Setting range 0.30 m to 3.00 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 10.0 ft to 80.0 ft), *0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments • When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase. ■ Level Layout Adjusts the volume of each speaker. Selects the layouts of the surround speakers and front presence speakers. Choices Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer Surround Selects a surround speaker layout when surround speakers are used. Setting range -10.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Settings Rear Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the rear side of the room. Front Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the front side of the room. Virtual CINEMA FRONT (p.62) works in this case. • This setting is not available when “Configuration (Surround)” is set to “None”. Front Presence Selects a front presence layout when front presence speakers are used. This setting facilitates the optimization of the sound field effect. Settings Front Height Select this option when front presence speakers are installed on the front side wall. Overhead Select this option when front presence speakers are installed to the ceiling. Dolby Enabled SP Select this option when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the front presence speakers. En 115 ■ Parametric EQ 5 Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. Frequency: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the center frequency of the selected band and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain. Settings Manual Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually. For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”. Q: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain. YPAO:Flat Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics. YPAO:Front Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as the front speakers. Setting range Center frequency: 31.3 Hz to 16.0 kHz (31.3 Hz to 250.0 Hz for subwoofer) Q factor: 0.500 to 10.080 YPAO:Natural Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound. Through Does not use the equalizer. 6 Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker balance or equalizer while confirming its effect. Settings ■ Manual equalizer adjustment Set “Parametric EQ” to “Manual” and press ENTER. Press ENTER again to enter the edit screen. Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER. • To restore the default settings for all speakers, select “PEQ Data Clear” and then “OK”. • To copy the parametric equalizer values acquired with “Auto Setup” (p.39) to the “Manual” fields for fine adjustment, select “PEQ Data Copy” and then an equalizer type. 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ■ Test Tone • “YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front”, and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the measurement results of “Auto Setup” have already been saved (p.39). Press ENTER again to view the measurement results. 1 2 3 To fine-adjust the center frequency or Q factor (bandwidth), press ENTER repeatedly to select an item. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a center frequency from the 7 preset bands (4 for subwoofer) and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain. Setting range Gain: -20.0 dB to +6.0 dB En 116 Off Does not output test tones. On Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance or equalizer. Sound Adjustment Configures the audio output settings. Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”. ■ Lipsync Setting range 0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments) Adjusts the delay between video and audio by holding up the audio output. Delay Enable Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source. • “Offset” shows the difference between automatic adjustment and fine adjustment. Choices AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–3 ■ Dynamic Range Settings Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. Disable Disable the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source. Enable Enables the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source. Settings Auto/Manual Select Maximum Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range. Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use. Minimum/Auto Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low volumes. When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is automatically adjusted based on the input signal information. Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. Setting range Auto Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the unit via HDMI. If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”. Manual Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video and audio output manually. Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”. ■ Max Volume Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. Setting range -30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB • Even if “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, the automatic adjustment does not work depending on the TV connected to the unit. In this case, adjust the delay manually in “Adjustment”. En 117 ■ Initial Volume ■ Virtual Surround Back Speaker Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on. Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers. When VSBS is enabled, the unit creates VSBS when no surround back speakers are connected. Settings Off Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode. On Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB increments). (This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max Volume”.) Settings Off Disables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS). On Enables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS). ■ Pure Direct Mode • VSBS is effective only when 6.1- or 7.1-channel content is played back. Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode (p.64). ■ Object Decode Mode Settings Auto Automatically outputs video signals when any videos are input from the selected input source or an input source that can be operated with the on-screen display is selected. When no video signals are input, the wall paper is displayed. Video Off Does not output video signals including the wall paper. Enables/disables playback of object-based audio signals such as Dolby Atmos contents. Settings Disable Disables playback of object-based audio signals. Those signals will be played in normal 5.1-/7.1-channel audio. Enable Enables playback of object-based audio signals. ■ Adaptive DSP Level Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level. • Regardless of this setting, object-based audio signals are played in normal 5.1-/7.1-channel audio if any of CINEMA DSP programs is selected. Settings Off Does not adjust the effect level automatically. On Adjusts the effect level automatically according to the YPAO measurement results and the volume level. ■ CINEMA DSP 3D Mode Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D (p.60). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP 3D functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo). Settings Off Disables CINEMA DSP 3D. On Enables CINEMA DSP 3D. En 118 Video Aspect Configures the video output settings. Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”. Settings Through Does not convert the aspect ratio. 16:9 Normal Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side of the screen. • This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i, 1080p, or 2160p (4K) signals. ■ Video Mode Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio). Settings Direct Disables the video signal processing. Processing Enables the video signal processing. Select a resolution and an aspect ratio in “Resolution” and “Aspect”. • When “Video Mode” is set to “Direct”, the unit transmits video signals with the least circuitry in order to reduce video output delay. • When “Video Mode” is set to “Processing” and the resolution is being converted, short messages are not displayed on the TV screen. Resolution Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”. Settings Through Does not convert the resolution. Auto Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution. 480p/576p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p, 4K Output video signals with a selected resolution. (Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.) • If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MONITOR CHECK” (p.133) in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that the output video may not be displayed on your TV normally.) En 119 HDMI ARC Configures the HDMI settings. Enables/disables ARC (p.154) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. Settings Off Disables ARC. On Enables ARC. • You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set “ARC” to “Off” and use the TV’s speakers. Standby Sync ■ HDMI Control Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.152). Settings Settings Off Disables HDMI Control. Off Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off. On Enables HDMI Control. Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and “Standby Sync”. On Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off. Auto Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals. ■ Audio Output • To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.152) after connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices. Selects a device to output audio. TV Audio Input Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner. • The “Amp” and “HDMI OUT1” settings are available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”. • The “HDMI OUT2” setting is available only when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.125) is set to “Main”. Amp Settings AUDIO 1–3 Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones connected to the unit. Default AUDIO 1 Settings • When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for connecting an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input. En 120 Off Disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones. On Enables the audio output from the speakers and headphones. HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2 Network Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack or HDMI OUT 2 jack. Configures the network settings. Settings Off Disables the audio output from the TV. On Enables the audio output from the TV. • The HDMI OUT 1–2 jacks output 2-channel audio signals when the unit is turned on. ■ Standby Through ■ Network Connection Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “On” or “Auto”, you can use the input selection keys (AV 1–7 and V-AUX) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby mode (the standby indicator on the unit blinks). Selects the network connection method. Settings Settings Off (This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.) Does not output videos/audio to the TV. On Outputs videos/audio to the TV. (The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.) Auto Outputs videos/audio to the TV. If no signals are detected, the unit is set to the power saving mode. Wired Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network with a commercially-available network cable (p.35) Wireless (Wi-Fi) Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network via the wireless router (access point). For details on settings, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.48). Wireless Direct Select this option when you want to connect a mobile device to the unit directly. For details on settings, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct)” (p.54). ■ IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). DHCP Select whether to use a DHCP server. Settings En 121 Off Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”. On Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network parameters (such as IP address). ■ MAC Address Filter ■ Manual network settings 1 2 Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. Set “DHCP” to “Off”. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type and press ENTER. Filter IP Address Specifies an IP address. Enables/disables the MAC address filter. Subnet Mask Specifies a subnet mask. Settings Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway. Off Disables the MAC address filter. DNS Server (P) Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server. DNS Server (S) Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server. On Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access to the unit. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a value. 4 5 6 7 To confirm the setting, press ENTER. • AirPlay (p.83) and DMC (p.102) operations are not subject to the MAC address filter. To configure another network parameter, repeat steps 2 to 4. MAC Address 1–10 To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be permitted access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ■ Procedure ■ Network Standby Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network standby). Settings Off Disables the network standby function. On Enables the network standby function. (The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.) Auto Enables the network standby function. (If “Network Connection” is set to “Wired”, the unit is set to the power saving mode when the network cable is disconnected.) En 122 1 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MAC Address 1–5” or “MAC Address 6–10” and press ENTER. 2 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number and press ENTER. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a value. 4 5 6 To confirm the setting, press ENTER. To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ■ Network Name Bluetooth Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. Configures the Bluetooth settings. ■ Procedure 1 2 Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. ■ Bluetooth Enables/disables the Bluetooth function (p.69). Settings Off Disables the Bluetooth function. On Enables the Bluetooth function. • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 3 4 Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. ■ Bluetooth Standby • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth devices (Bluetooth standby). If this function is set to “On”, the unit automatically turns on when a connect operation is performed on the Bluetooth device. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Settings Off Disables the Bluetooth standby function. On Enables the Bluetooth standby function. (The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.) • This setting is not available when “Network Standby” (p.122) is set to “Off”. En 123 Multi Zone 3 Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. Configures the multi zone settings. • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ■ Zone2 Set Configures the Zone2 settings. Volume Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output. ■ Main Zone Set If you have connected an external amplifier with volume control to the unit, disable volume adjustments for Zone2. Configures the main zone setting. Settings Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen. ■ Procedure 1 2 Fixed Disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output. Variable Enables volume adjustments for Zone2 output. • This setting is not available when “Power Amp Assign” (p.113) is set to “7ch +1ZONE”. Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Max Volume Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. Setting range -30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB • This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”. • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. En 124 Initial Volume ■ Monitor Out Assign Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on. Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO and VIDEO) jacks are used. Settings Settings Main, Zone2 Off Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode. On Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB increments). (This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max Volume”.) • To watch videos played back on a video device on the Zone2 video monitor, you need to connect the video monitor to the unit in the same way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from the DVD player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks with a component video cable. ■ HDMI OUT2 Assign • This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”. Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used. Audio Delay Settings Main, Zone2 Adjusts the Zone2 audio output timing so that the audio is synchronized with the video. Setting range 0 ms to 100 ms (1 ms increments) • For details on video/audio signals that can be output to Zone2, see “Multi-zone output” (p.152). Mono Audio Output Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 output. Enables/disables the audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 jack when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” is set to “Zone2”. Settings Off Produces stereo sounds in Zone2. On Enables the audio output. On Produces monaural sounds in Zone2. Off Disables the audio output (video output only). Zone Rename ■ Party Mode Set Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the front display or TV screen. Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.91). You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main Zone Set” (p.124). Choice Target: Zone2 Settings En 125 Disable Disables switching to the party mode. Enable Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party mode by pressing PARTY on the remote control. Function 3 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use. • You cannot assign both COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to the same input source. ■ Display Set Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display. Dimmer (Front Display) Adjusts the brightness of the front display. Setting range -4 to 0 (higher to brighten) ■ Input Assignment Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source. • The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.128) is set to “On”. Short Message ■ Procedure Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated (such as input selection and volume adjustment). Example: assigning the OPTICAL (b) jack to the input source “AV 2” 1 Use the cursor keys to select the cell at the intersection of “AV 2” and “Optical”, and press ENTER. Settings On Displays short messages on the TV screen. Off Does not display short messages on the TV screen. Wallpaper Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV. Settings 2 Use the cursor keys to select “b” and press ENTER. En 126 Piano Displays the piano image on the TV screen when there is no video signal. Gray Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video signal. ■ Trigger Output1, Trigger Output2 Target Zone Sets the TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks to function in sync with the power status of each zone or input switching. Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized. Settings Trigger Mode Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. Main When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the power status of the main zone. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone. Zone2 When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the power status of Zone2. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the input switching in Zone2. All When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the power status of the main zone or Zone2. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone or Zone2. Settings Power The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the power status of the zone specified with “Target Zone”. Source The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the input switching in the zone specified with “Target Zone”. An electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in “Source.” Manual Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal transmission with “Manual”. Source ■ Memory Guard Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input, switching when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”. Prevents accidental changes to the settings. Settings Choices AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–3, PHONO, TUNER, (network sources), Bluetooth, USB Off Does not protect the settings. Settings On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected. Low Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input source specified in this option. High Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source specified in this option. • When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen. Icon Manual Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function of the external device connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack. Choices Low Stops the electronic signal transmission. High Transmits the electronic signal. En 127 ■ ECO Mode ECO Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode. Configures the power supply settings. When the eco mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit’s power consumption. Settings Off Disables the eco mode. On Enables the eco mode. • The new setting will take effect after the unit is restarted. • When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark. • If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”. ■ Auto Power Standby Language Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit or if no input signals are detected for the specified time, the unit will automatically go into standby mode. Select an on-screen menu language. Settings Off Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically. 20 Minutes Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit and no input signals are detected for 20 minutes. 2 Hours, 4 Hours, 8 Hours, 12 Hours Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for the specified time. For example, when “2 Hours” is selected, the unit will switch to standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours. Default U.K. and Europe models: 20 Minutes Other models: Off Settings • Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the front display. English English 日本語 Japanese Français French Deutsch German Español Spanish Russian Italiano Italian Chinese • The information on the front display is provided in English only. En 128 Types of information Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) ■ Audio Signal You can view information about the unit using the TV screen. 1 2 Displays information about the current audio signal. Press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “Information” and press ENTER. Format Audio format of the input signal Channel The number of source channels in the input signal (front/surround/LFE) For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total (3 front channels, 2 surround channels, and LFE). Sampling The number of samples per second of the input digital signal Bitrate The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal Dialogue The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal Input Output 3 The speaker terminals from which signals are output • Even when the unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on the specifications and settings of the playback device. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an information type. ■ Video Signal Displays information about the current video signal. 4 HDMI Signal Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output HDMI Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI) Analog Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog) and signal output at the MONITOR OUT jacks (analog) ■ HDMI Monitor To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Displays information about the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jacks. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to switch between “OUT1” and “OUT2”. En 129 Interface TV interface Video Resolution Resolutions supported by the TV ■ Network ■ System Displays the network information on the unit. Displays the system information on the unit. (When using wired or wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection) Remote ID The unit’s remote control ID setting (p.132) IP Address IP address TV Format The unit’s video signal type (p.132) Subnet Mask Subnet mask Speaker Impedance The speaker impedance setting of the unit (p.131) Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway Tuner Freq. Step (Asia and General models only) The FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit (p.132) DNS Server (P) The IP address of the primary DNS server System ID System ID number DNS Server (S) The IP address of the secondary DNS server Firmware Version The version of firmware installed on the unit MAC Address (Ethernet) MAC address MAC Address (Wi-Fi) vTuner ID vTuner ID Network Name Network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.123) Wired/Wireless The status of the wired or wireless connection SSID (When using wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection) The SSID of the wireless network • If the unit detects a newer firmware over the network, “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and the corresponding message will be displayed in this screen. You can update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in this screen and following the procedure in “Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.135). ■ Multi Zone Displays information about Zone2. (When using Wireless Direct) SSID The SSID of the wireless network Security Security method Security Key Security key IP Address IP address Subnet Mask Subnet mask MAC Address (Wi-Fi) MAC address Network Connection “Wireless Direct” indication En 130 Input The input source selected for Zone2 Volume The volume for Zone2 ADVANCED SETUP menu items Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) • Default settings are underlined. Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display. 1 2 Set the unit to standby mode. While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z. MAIN ZONE z Function SPEAKER IMP. Changes the speaker impedance setting. 131 REMOTE SENSOR Turns on/off of the remote control sensor on the main unit. 132 REMOTE CON AMP Selects the unit’s remote control ID. 132 TUNER FRQ STEP (Asia and General models only) Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting. 132 TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type. 132 MONITOR CHECK Removes the limitation on HDMI video output. 133 4K MODE Selects the HDMI 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signal format. 133 RECOV./BACKUP Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from the backup. 133 INITIALIZE Restores the default settings. 133 FIRM UPDATE Updates the firmware. 134 VERSION Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. 134 STRAIGHT PROGRAM 3 4 5 Item Press PROGRAM to select an item. Press STRAIGHT to select a setting. Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again. Page Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.) The new settings take effect. DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 ¡SPEAKER¡IMP. ¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡8¬MIN MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the speakers connected. Settings En 131 6 MIN Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. You can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers. 8 MIN Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the unit. Turning on/off the remote control sensor (REMOTE SENSOR) SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 REMOTESENSOR ON Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TUNER FRQ STEP) (Asia and General models only) MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR HD 3 Turn on/off the remote control sensor on the main unit. While the remote control sensor is turned off, you cannot control the unit from the remote control. Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or region. Settings ON Turns on the remote control sensor. OFF Turns off the remote control sensor. Settings Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP) SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 REMOTECONAMP ID1 FM100/AM10 Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz steps and AM by 10-kHz steps. FM50/AM9 Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps and AM by 9-kHz steps. Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default: ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver. HD 3 TVFORMAT NTSC MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Switch the video signal type of the unit so that it matches to the format of your TV. Settings ID1, ID2 Settings NTSC, PAL ■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control 1 TUNERFRQSTEP FM50/AM9 Default U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models: NTSC Other models: PAL To select ID1, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE1 (BD/DVD) together for 3 seconds. To select ID2, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE2 (TV) together for 3 seconds. En 132 Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MONITOR CHECK) Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP) SPIMP.- SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 MONITORCHECK YES DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 RECOV./BACKUP BACKUP MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from the backup. The unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack. ■ Backup/recovery procedure 1 Disable the monitor check function if you want to specify a resolution in “Resolution” (p.119) when the unit cannot detect the TV’s resolution or when you want to specify a different resolution than the detected resolution. Choices Settings YES Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a resolution supported by the TV only.) SKIP Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a specified resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.) Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “BACKUP” or “RECOVERY” and press INFO to start the process. BACKUP Creates backup of the settings of the unit in the internal memory. RECOVERY Recovers the settings of the unit from the backup (available only when backup has been created). Note • Do not turn off the unit during the recovery process. Otherwise, the settings may not be restored correctly. • Reset to “YES” if the unit becomes inoperable because video from the unit cannot be displayed on the TV after “MONITOR CHECK” has been set to “SKIP”. • The backup does not contain user information (such as user accounts and passwords). Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE) Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE) SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 4KMODE MODE2 SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR HD 3 INITIALIZE CANCEL MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Restores the default settings for the unit. Selects the format of signals input/output at the unit when HDMI 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) compatible TV and playback device are connected to the unit. Choices Settings MODE 1 Inputs/outputs 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signals in 4:4:4, 4:2:2 or 4:2:0 format. (4:2:0 format only for VIDEO AUX [HDMI IN] jack) Depending on the connected device or HDMI cables, video may not be displayed correctly. In this case, select “MODE 2”. MODE 2 Inputs/outputs 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signals in 4:2:0 format. • When “MODE 1” is selected, use a high-speed HDMI cable that supports 18 Gbps. En 133 VIDEO Restores the default settings for video configurations. ALL Restores the default settings for the unit. CANCEL Does not perform an initialization. Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE) SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 FIRMUPDATE USB Checking the firmware version (VERSION) SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR HD 3 New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from the Yamaha website. If the unit is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For details, refer to the information supplied with updates. • It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed. Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to start firmware update. Choices Update the firmware using a USB memory device. NETWORK Update the firmware via the network. PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR • You can also check the firmware version in “System” (p.130) in the “Information” menu. Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware. USB MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. ■ Firmware update procedure 1 VERSION x.xx • If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after ON SCREEN is pressed. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in “Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.135). En 134 Updating the unit’s firmware via the network AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and update it. AUDIO 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT MAIN ZONE 2 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO • Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more (depending on your Internet connection speed). TOP MENU • If the unit is connected to the wireless network, network update may not be possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case, update the firmware using the USB memory device (p.134). VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM • If you want to update the firmware later, select “CLOSE” in Step 2. “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and a message will be displayed in the “System” screen (p.130). You can update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in the “System” screen. • For details on update, visit the Yamaha website. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!” appears on the front display, press MAIN ZONE z on the front panel. The firmware update is complete. Note SCENE 3 OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY • You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.134). Information icon BAND A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed after ON SCREEN is pressed. MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 Message System Icon 1 2 Read the on-screen description. To start the firmware update, use the cursor keys to select “START” and press ENTER. The on-screen display turns off. En 135 APPENDIX Frequently asked questions The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound balance... enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device. If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use “Auto Setup” to optimize the speaker settings again (p.39). If you want to adjust the speaker settings manually, use “Manual Setup” in the “Setup” menu (p.113). I want to turn off the on-screen messages displayed during operations... Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the volume control... By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when the unit is operated (such as input selection and volume adjustment). If the short messages bother you when you are watching movies or sports, configure “Short Message” (p.126) in the “Setup” menu to turn off the short messages. If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum volume level for the unit in advance (p.117). You can also set the maximum volume for Zone2 (p.124). I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings... You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.127). I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning on the unit... The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another Yamaha product as well as the unit... By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the volume to be applied when the receiver is turned on (p.118). You can also set the initial volume for Zone2 (p.125). When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens, register different remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each remote control (p.132). We are bothered by volume differences when switching between input sources… You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in the “Option” menu (p.100). I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device even when the unit is in standby mode... I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at all... If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output videos/audio played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in standby mode. To use this function, set “Standby Through” (p.121) in the “Setup” menu to “On” or “Auto”. You can also switch the input source using the remote control of the unit when this function is enabled. To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.152). After connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit, En 136 Troubleshooting Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. First, check the following: a The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets securely. b The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on. c The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device. Power, system and remote control Problem Cause Remedy The power does not turn on. The protection circuitry has been activated three times consecutively. When the unit is in this condition, the standby indicator on the unit blinks if you try to turn on the power. As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair. The power does not turn off. The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power supply voltage. Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.) The power turns off (standby mode) immediately. The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted. Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers (p.21). The sleep timer worked. Turn on the unit and start playback again. The auto-standby function kicked in because the unit was not used for the specified time. To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup” menu to “Off” (p.128). The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.131). The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit. Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers (p.21). The protection circuitry has been activated because the volume of the unit is too high. Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to “Off” (p.128). The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power supply voltage. Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.) The unit enters standby mode automatically. The unit is not reacting. En 137 Problem The unit cannot be controlled using the remote control. Cause Remedy The unit is out of the operating range. Use the remote control within the operating range (p.5). The batteries are weak. Replace with new batteries. The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or strong lighting. Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit. (China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only) The remote control is set to control external devices. Press RECEIVER to set the remote control to control the unit (the key lights up in orange). The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not identical. Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.132). Cause Remedy Another input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys. Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input. Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio format of the input signal, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.129). The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. The maximum volume is set. Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.117). Audio Problem No sound. The volume cannot be increased. A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit. The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel. To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.129). The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the speaker. To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.116). Audio output of the speaker is disabled. Perform “Auto Setup” (p.39) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change the speaker settings (p.113). The volume of the speaker is set too low. Perform “Auto Setup” (p.39) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the speaker volume (p.115). The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable. The speaker is malfunctioning. To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be malfunctioning. No sound is coming from a specific speaker. En 138 Problem No sound is coming from the subwoofer. No sound from the playback device (connected to the unit with HDMI). No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is used). Only the front speakers work on multichannel audio. Cause Remedy The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency signals. To check if the subwoofer is working properly, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.116). Subwoofer output is disabled. Perform “Auto Setup” (p.39) or set “Subwoofer” in the “Setup” menu to “Use” (p.115). The volume of the subwoofer is too low. Adjust the volume on the subwoofer. The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function. Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level. The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications. The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from the SPEAKERS terminals. In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.120). The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices. The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers. Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the speakers connected to the unit. A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with an HDMI cable. Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.28). (If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable) The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection. Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack (p.120). (If you are trying to use ARC) ARC is disabled on the unit or TV. Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.120). Also, enable ARC on the TV. The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as PCM) only. To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.129). If necessary, change the digital audio output setting on the playback device. The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device. Move the unit further away from the device. The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. The volume of the unit is too high. Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to “Off” (p.128). A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks. If the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2, HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone operations due to internal circuitry switching. For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back videos/audio” (p.88). Noise/hum is heard. The sound is distorted. The sound is interrupted. En 139 Video Problem No video. No video from the playback device (connected to the unit with HDMI). Cause Remedy Another input source is selected on the unit. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys. Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit. The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV. Set “MONITOR CHECK” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “YES” (p.133). The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit. To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Video Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.129). For information about video signals supported by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.154). The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications. If you want to play back contents that require HDCP 2.2-compatible devices, both the TV and playback device must support HDCP 2.2. The playback device that supports HDCP 2.2 is connected to the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack. To play back contents that require HDCP 2.2-compatible devices, connect the playback device to the HDMI (AV 1–7) jack (p.30). The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices. The TV is not connected to the unit via HDMI. You can display the menu of the unit on the TV only when they are connected with an HDMI cable. If necessary, use an HDMI cable to connect them (p.28). Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). (If you are using 2 TVs in the main zone) Another TV is turned off when “HDMI OUT 1+2” is selected. Select “HDMI OUT 1” or “HDMI OUT 2” to output the signals only to the TV you are using (p.56). (If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2) HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone operations due to internal circuitry switching. For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back videos/audio” (p.88). The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV. The video is interrupted. En 140 FM/AM radio Problem Cause Remedy There is multi-path interference. Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location. Set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio reception (p.100). FM radio reception is weak or noisy. Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter. Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna. AM radio reception is weak or noisy. The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats, or other electrical equipment. It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor AM antenna. Select the station manually (p.65). Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter. Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna. Adjust the AM antenna orientation. Radio stations cannot be selected automatically. Select the station manually (p.65). The AM radio signal is weak. Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with the supplied AM antenna. AM radio stations cannot be registered as presets. Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations only. Register AM radio stations manually (p.66). Auto Preset has been used. En 141 Bluetooth Problem A Bluetooth connection cannot be established. No sound is produced, or the sound is interrupted during playback. Cause Remedy The Bluetooth function of the unit is disabled. Enable the Bluetooth function (p.123). Another Bluetooth device is already connected to the unit. Terminate the current Bluetooth connection and then establish a new connection (p.69). The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart. Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit. There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby. Move the unit away from those devices. The Bluetooth device does not support A2DP. Use a Bluetooth device that supports A2DP. The connection information registered on the Bluetooth device is not working for some reason. Delete the connection information on the Bluetooth device, and then establish a connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again (p.69). The volume of the Bluetooth device is set too low. Turn up the volume of the Bluetooth device. The Bluetooth device is not set to send audio signals to the unit. Switch the audio output of the Bluetooth device to the unit. The Bluetooth connection has been terminated. Establish a Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again (p.69). The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart. Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit. There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby. Move the unit away from those devices. En 142 USB and network Problem Cause Remedy The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely. Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again. The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32. Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format. Folders and files in the USB device cannot be viewed. The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption. Use a USB device without an encryption function. The files in the USB device cannot be played back continuously. Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder. If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files in the playback folder. The network feature does not function. The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained properly. Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup” menu to “On” on the unit (p.121). If you want to configure the network parameters manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other network devices in your network (p.121). The wireless router (access point) is turned off. Turn on the wireless router. The unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart. Place the unit and the wireless router (access point) closer to each other. There is an obstacle between the unit and the wireless router (access point). Move the unit and the wireless router (access point) in a location where there are no obstacles between them. Microwave ovens or other wireless devices in your neighborhood might disturb the wireless communication. Turn off these devices. Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of the wireless router (access point). Check the firewall setting of the wireless router (access point). The media sharing setting is not correct. Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.76). Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access of the unit to your PC. Check the settings of security software installed on your PC. The unit and PC are not in the same network. Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and the PC to the same network. The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit. In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or specify the MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (p.122). The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played back. The files are not supported by the unit or the media server. Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.76). The files in the PC cannot be played back continuously. Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder. If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files in the playback folder. The unit does not detect the USB device. The unit cannot connect to the Internet via a wireless router (access point). Wireless network is not found. The unit does not detect the PC. En 143 Problem The Internet radio cannot be played. The iPod does not recognize the unit when using AirPlay. Cause Remedy The selected Internet radio station is currently not available. There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have been stopped. Try the station later or select another station. The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting silence. Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try the station later or select another station. Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your network devices (such as the router). Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station. The port number varies depending on the radio station. The unit is connected to a multiple SSID router. Access to the unit might be restricted by the network separation function on the router. Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit. The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network. Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and smartphone/tablet to the same network. The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit. In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or specify the MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the unit (p.122). It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network. Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.134). The application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER” does not detect the unit. Firmware update via the network is failed. En 144 Error indications on the front display Message Cause Remedy Access denied Access to the PC is denied. Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.76). The unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. The unit cannot access the iPod. Turn off the iPod and turn it on again. The connected iPod is not supported by the unit. Use an iPod supported by the unit (p.70). Access error Make sure your router and modem are turned on. There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit. Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.35). Check SP Wires The speaker cables short circuit. Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly. Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. No content There are no playable files in the selected folder. Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit. The unit cannot detect the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. The unit cannot detect the iPod. Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again. Please wait The unit is preparing for connecting to the network. Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn it on again. RemID Mismatch The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not identical. Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.132). Remote Off The unit cannot be operated from remote control because the remote control sensor on the main unit is turned off. Use the controls on the front panel. To use the remote control, set “REMOTE SENSOR” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “ON” (p.132). The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the USB device for some reasons. Check the song data. If it cannot be played on another device, the song data may be defective. The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some reason. Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be defective. The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some reason. Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.76). If the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with heavy traffic. USB Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. Version error Firmware update is failed. Update the firmware again. No device Unable to play En 145 Glossary Audio information Dolby Pro Logic IIx Dolby Pro Logic IIx enables 7-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for game sources (for 2-channel sources only). ■ Audio decoding format Dolby Surround Dolby Atmos Dolby surround is a next generation surround technology that intelligently up mixes stereo; 5.1 and 7.1 content for playback through your surround speaker system. Dolby surround is compatible with traditional speaker layouts, as well as Dolby Atmos enabled playback systems that employ in-ceiling speakers or products with Dolby speaker technology. Introduced first in the cinema, Dolby Atmos brings a revolutionary sense of dimension and immersion to the Home Theater experience. Dolby Atmos is an adaptable and scalable object based format that reproduces audio as independent sounds (or objects) that can be accurately positioned and move dynamically throughout the 3 dimensional listening space during playback. A key ingredient of Dolby Atmos is the introduction of a height plane of sound above the listener. Dolby TrueHD Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). Dolby Atmos Stream Dolby Atmos content will be delivered to your Dolby Atmos enabled AV receiver via Dolby Digital Plus or Dolby TrueHD on Blu-ray Disc, downloadable files and streaming media. A Dolby Atmos stream contains special metadata that describes the positioning of sounds within the room. This object audio data is decoded by a Dolby Atmos AV receiver and scaled for optimum playback through Home Theater speaker systems of every size and configuration. DSD (Direct Stream Digital) DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate (such as 2.8224 MHz and 5.6448 MHz). The highest frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology offers better audio quality than that used for CDs. Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs. DTS 96/24 Dolby Digital EX Dolby Digital EX creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc. Dolby Digital Plus DTS Digital Surround Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports 7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs. Dolby Enabled Speaker DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a discrete surround back channel is recorded. DTS-ES A convenient alternative to speakers built into the ceiling, products utilizing Dolby speaker technology employ the ceiling above you as a reflective surface for reproducing audio in the height plane above the listener. Dolby enabled speakers feature a unique upward firing driver and special signal processing that can be built into a conventional speaker, or a standalone speaker module, minimally impacting the overall speaker system footprint while providing an immersive listening experience during Dolby Atmos and Dolby surround playback. DTS Express DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports 7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). En 146 ■ Others DTS-HD Master Audio DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp) A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification connection, the unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a consequence, the tweeter and woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference. DTS Neo:6 LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound. This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio. FLAC Lip sync FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality. Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag between audio and video output. MP3 One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality. MPEG-4 AAC An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality than MP3. PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs). Sampling frequency/Quantization bit Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”. • Sampling frequency Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate. When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider. • Quantization bit The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more accurate. WAV Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other compression methods. WMA (Windows Media Audio) One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality. En 147 HDMI and video information Network information Component video signal SSID With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a particular wireless LAN access point. Wi-Fi With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined and transmitted with a single cable. Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) is a technology that allows an electronic device to exchange data or connect to the Internet wirelessly using radio waves. Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminating the complexity of making connections with network cables by using wireless connection. Only products that complete Wi-Fi Alliance interoperability tests can carry the “Wi-Fi Certified” trademark. Deep Color WPS Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors. WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy establishment of a wireless home network. Composite video signal HDCP HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) is a digital copy protection form that prevents copying of digital contents as it travels across connections (such as HDMI). HDMI HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”. x.v.Color “x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid, natural images. En 148 Yamaha technologies CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor) Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions (such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP, Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own home. CINEMA DSP 3D The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room. Compressed Music Enhancer The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound system. SILENT CINEMA Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound programs can be enjoyed on headphones. Virtual CINEMA DSP Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic sound field in a listening room. Virtual CINEMA FRONT Virtual CINEMA FRONT allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with front surround speakers. Even if the surround speakers placed in the front, the unit creates the realistic sound field in a listening room. Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without front presence speakers. Even if the front presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D sound field in your room. Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) Virtual Surround Back Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround back speakers. Even if the surround back speakers are not connected, the unit adds a sense of depth to the rear sound filed of CINEMA DSP. En 149 ■ File formats Supported devices and file formats ❑ USB/PC (NAS) ■ Supported devices Sampling frequency (kHz) Quantization bitrate (bit) Bitrate The number of channels Gapless playback WAV * 32/44.1/48/88.2/96/ 176.4/192 16/24 — 2 ✔ • A Bluetooth device may not be detected by the unit or some feature may not be compatible, depending on the model. MP3 32/44.1/48 — 8 to 320 2 — WMA 32/44.1/48 — 8 to 320 2 — ❑ USB devices MPEG-4 AAC 32/44.1/48 — 8 to 320 2 — • The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (e.g., flash memories or portable audio players) using FAT16 or FAT32 format. FLAC 32/44.1/48/88.2/96/ 176.4/192 16/24 — 2 ✔ ALAC 32/44.1/48/88.2/96 16/24 — 2 ✔ AIFF 32/44.1/48/88.2/96/ 176.4/192 16/24 — 2 ✔ DSD 2.8 MHz/5.6 MHz 1 — 2 — File ❑ Bluetooth device • The unit supports Bluetooth devices that support A2DP or AVRCP. • Do not connect devices other than USB mass storage class devices (such as USB chargers or USB hubs), PCs, card readers, an external HDD, etc. • USB devices with encryption cannot be used. • Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer of the USB storage device. * Linear PCM format only ❑ iPod • To play back FLAC files stored on a PC or NAS, you need to install server software that supports sharing of FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files. • Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back. Made for. iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6, iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, iPhone 4s, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G iPod touch (2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th generation) iPod nano (2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th and 7th generation) (as of May 2015) • An iPod may not be detected by the unit or some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or software version of the iPod. ❑ AirPlay AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac with OS X Mountain Lion or later and Mac and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later. (as of May 2015) En 150 Video signal flow Video signals input from a video device to the unit are output to a TV as shown below. ■ Video conversion table • You can select the resolution and the aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing in “Video Mode” (p.119) in the “Setup” menu. • The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably. Video device The unit HDMI out TV Resolution 480i/ 576i 480p/ 576p 720p 1080i 1080p 4K 480i/576i m m m m m m m m m m m 720p m m m m 1080i m m m m 1080p/ 50, 60 Hz m m m m m m 480p/576p HDMI in HDMI out HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI in 1080p/24 Hz COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO m m m m m m m m m m m COMPONENT 720p VIDEO in m m m m 1080i m m m m 480i/576i COMPONENT VIDEO out COMPONENT VIDEO PR PR PR PR PB PB PB PB Y Y Y Y 480p/576p VIDEO VIDEO 480p/ 576p 720p 1080i 1080p 480i/ 576i m m m m m 1080p VIDEO in 480i/ 576i m 4K COMPONENT VIDEO in VIDEO out COMPONENT VIDEO out VIDEO out VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO in m 480i/576i m m m m m m m: Available En 151 Multi-zone output Information on HDMI ■ Audio output Using the unit’s internal amplifier (p.25) HDMI Control Using an external amplifier (p.87) Zone2 Out HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with an HDMI cable. EXTRA SP jacks ZONE OUT jacks HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack (*1) Digital audio (HDMI) m (*2) m (*2) m (*3) Digital audio (COAXIAL/OPTICAL) m (*4) m (*4) Analog audio (AUDIO) m m Operations available from the TV’s remote control USB (including iPod) (*5) m m • Standby synchronization Network sources (*5) m m • Volume control including mute TUNER m m In For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV” (p.28) and “Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.30). • Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner m: Available • Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device *1 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.125) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” (Audio Output: On) *2 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input source selected in the main zone is selected) Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.125) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” *3 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input source selected in the main zone is selected) *4 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input *5 To play back DSD audio in Zone2, select “Main Zone Sync” as the Zone2 input with the web control (p.93) or use the party mode (p.91). • Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker) (Example) HDMI Control HDMI Control Playback device also turns off The unit turns off (standby) Turn off the TV ■ Video output Zone2 Out In MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks (*6) COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO Operations available from the unit’s remote control HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack (*7) m HDMI video Component video Composite video • Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene selection (p.57) • Switching the TV input to display the on-screen menu (when ON SCREEN is pressed) m • Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) using the external device operation keys m m: Available *6 Available when “Monitor Out Assign” (p.125) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” *7 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.125) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” En 152 d Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”. (Example) HDMI Control HDMI Control Turns on and displays video from the playback device Playback starts Press SCENE (BD/DVD) To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after connecting the TV and playback devices. e Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER. For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV. f Use the cursor keys to select “On”. g Press ON SCREEN. • This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system. 1 2 3 Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players). 4 Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and playback devices. 5 6 7 Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV. Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices. Configure the settings of the unit. a Switch the TV input to display video from the unit. b Press ON SCREEN. ON SCREEN OPTION ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit. Check the followings. On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not, select the input source manually. c Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed. 8 Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control. • If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 3 and plugging in the TV again in Step 4. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use. • If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on the TV. • We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works more effectively. • We do not assure the operation of all HDMI Control-compatible devices. En 153 Audio Return Channel (ARC) HDMI signal compatibility ARC allows you to input TV audio to the unit with the HDMI cable which transmits video signal to the TV. Audio signals Check the following after the HDMI Control settings. Audio signal type Audio signal format Compatible media (example) 1 2 2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio Multichannel Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD Select a TV program with the TV remote control. Check that the input source of the unit will be automatically switched to “AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit. If you cannot hear the TV audio, check the following: – “ARC” (p.120) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”. – The HDMI cable is connected to the ARC-compatible HDMI jack (HDMI jack marked “ARC”) on the TV. Some HDMI jack on the TV is not compatible with ARC. For details, refer to the instruction manual for the TV. DSD 2 to 5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video Bitstream (High definition audio) Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-HD Master Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express Video signals The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions: • If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.120) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use an audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable) to input TV audio to the unit (p.28). • When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC. • VGA • 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz • 480i/60 Hz • 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz • 576i/50 Hz • 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • 480p/60 Hz • 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • 576p/50 Hz • “AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1 jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.120) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the SCENE function (p.58), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE (TV). • When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending on the type of the DVD player. • The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction manual for each device. • To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device). For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device. En 154 Reference diagram (rear panel) HDMI (HDCP2.2) HDMI OUT (HDCP2.2) 2 (ZONE OUT) 1 AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 NETWORK AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 ( 3 NET ) WIRELESS AV 7 (1 BD/DVD) ARC AC IN AV 1 AV 2 (1 BD/DVD) AV 3 AV 4 MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT PB Y COMPONENT VIDEO Y PR AV 2 PB TRIGGER OUT PR B 1 REMOTE 12V 0.1A MAX. TOTAL PHONO AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 IN RS-232C OUT 2 (2 TV) A Y AV 1 PRE OUT ZONE OUT L PB C PR Y AV 3 (SINGLE) PR PB 1 2 R GND 1 OPTICAL 2 OPTICAL 3 COAXIAL 4 COAXIAL 5 COAXIAL 6 OPTICAL ZONE 2 FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER CENTER SPEAKERS R SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/ R BI–AMP EXTRA SP L CENTER R FRONT L ANTENNA (4 RADIO) 75Ω FM AM SINGLE (U.S.A. model) • The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections. En 155 Trademarks Bluetooth protocol stack (Blue SDK) Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Atmos, Dolby Surround, Pro Logic, Surround EX, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Copyright 1999-2014 OpenSynergy GmbH All rights reserved. All unpublished rights reserved. The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Logo is a certification mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance. The Wi-Fi Protected Setup Identifier Mark is a mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance. This receiver supports network connections. For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks, and DTS-HD Master Audio is a trademark of DTS, Inc. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation. HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries. x.v.Color™ “x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation. Google Noto Fonts Copyright © 2012 Google Inc. All rights reserved. Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the “License”); you may not use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software distributed under the License is distributed on an “AS IS” BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License. “Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance. DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of Digital Living Network Alliance. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited. iTunes, AirPlay, iPhone, iPod, iPod nano, iPod touch, and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Windows™ Explanations regarding GPL App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc. Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. This product utilizes GPL/LGPL open-source software in some sections. You have the right to obtain, duplicate, modify, and redistribute this open-source code only. For information on GPL/LGPL open source software, how to obtain it, and the GPL/LGPL license, refer to the Yamaha Corporation website (http://download.yamaha.com/sourcecodes/musiccast/). Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Yamaha Corporation is under license. Android™ Google Play™ Android and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc. Blu-ray is a trademark of the Blu-ray Disc Association. En 156 Specifications Input jacks Other jacks TUNER • Analog Audio • YPAO MIC x 1 • Analog Tuner Audio x 9 (AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–3, PHONO, V-AUX) [U.K. and Europe models] • REMOTE IN x 1 • Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz) FM/AM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER) • REMOTE OUT x 1 Optical x 3 (AV 3, AUDIO 1–2) [Other models] • TRIGGER OUT x 2 Coaxial x 3 (AV 1–2, AUDIO 3) FM/AM x 1 (TUNER) • RS-232C x 1 USB Composite x 5 (AV 1–4, V-AUX) HDMI • Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory Component x 3 (AV 1–3) • HDMI features: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync, ARC • Current Supply Capacity: 1 A • Video (Audio Return Channel), 3D, 4K Ultra HD • HDMI Input HDMI x 8 (AV 1–7, V-AUX) • Video Format (Repeater Mode) • Sink Function - VGA • Others Bluetooth Source Device to AVR (ex. Smartphone/Tablet) USB x 1 (USB2.0) - 480i/60 Hz NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T) - 576i/50 Hz • Capable of Play/Stop Operation from Sink Device - 480p/60 Hz • Bluetooth Version .................................................Ver. 2.1+EDR Output jacks - 576p/50 Hz • Analog Audio - 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz - Speaker Out x 9 (7 ch) (FRONT L/R, CENTER, • Supported Profile ................................................ A2DP, AVRCP • Supported Codec .....................................................SBC, AAC - 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz *1 SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R, EXTRA SP L/R ) - 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • Wireless Output............................................. Bluetooth Class 2 *1 Note: Assignment is possible [ZONE2, F.PRESENCE, - 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • Maximum Communication Distance .......................10 m (33 ft) BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)] - Pre Out x 7 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, • Audio Format Network - Dolby Atmos - Dolby TrueHD • PC Client Function - Subwoofer Out x 2 (SUBWOOFER 1–2, mono) - Dolby Digital Plus • Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5 - ZONE OUT x 1 (ZONE 2) - Dolby Digital - Headphone x 1 • AirPlay supported - DTS-HD Master Audio SURROUND BACK L/R) • Video - DTS-HD High Resolution Audio • Internet Radio • WiFi function MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT - DTS Express - Composite x 1 - DTS - Capable of WPS by PIN Method and Push-Button-Method - Component x 1 - DSD 2-ch to 6-ch - Capable of sharing with iOS devices by wireless connection • HDMI Output HDMI OUT x 2 (HDMI OUT 1–2*) * barter to ZONE OUT (ZONE2) - PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit) • Content Protection: HDCP compatible (HDMI [AV 1–7]: HDCP 2.2 compatible) • Link Function: CEC supported and USB connection - Capable of Direct Connection with Mobile Device - Available Security Method: WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode - Radio Frequency Band: 2.4GHz - Wireless Network Standard: IEEE 802.11 b/g/n En 157 Compatible Decoding Formats • Decoding Format - Dolby Atmos - Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus - Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX - DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express - DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 - DTS Digital Surround • Rated Output Power (1-channel driven) (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 ) PRE OUT Front L/R ..................................................................140 W/ch - Dolby Pro Logic - Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, Except SUBWOOFER (1 kHz)............................. 1.0 V/470 Surround L/R ...........................................................140 W/ch ZONE OUT ............................................................. 1.0 V/470 Surround Back L/R ..................................................140 W/ch • Headphone Impedance....................................... 16 or more (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 ) Front L/R ..................................................................135 W/ch Center .....................................................................135 W/ch Surround Back L/R ..................................................135 W/ch (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 ) Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game - Dolby Surround - DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema Audio Section • Rated Output Power (2-channel driven) (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 6 ) • Maximum Effective Output Power (1-channel driven) (1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 ) (1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 ) (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 ) Front L/R ..........................................................120 W+120 W Center .......................................................................... 120 W • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) AUDIO 2 etc..................................................... 110 dB or more • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front L/R ..................................................................165 W/ch Surround L/R....................................................120 W+120 W Surround Back L/R ..........................................110 W+110 W AUDIO 2 etc. to Speaker Out (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 55 W/ 8 ) PHONO .............................................................. 95 dB or more Surround Back L/R ..................................................170 W/ch Surround Back L/R ..................................................165 W/ch Surround L/R....................................................110 W+110 W PHONO to PreOut (1 kHz, 1 V) ........................... 0.04% or less (Pure Direct, Input 1 k Shorted, Speaker Out) Surround L/R ...........................................................165 W/ch Center .......................................................................... 110 W PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) ......................................... 0±0.5 dB Surround L/R ...........................................................170 W/ch Center .......................................................................... 120 W Front L/R ..........................................................110 W+110 W • RIAA Equalization Deviation Center......................................................................170 W/ch Center......................................................................165 W/ch Surround Back L/R ..........................................120 W+120 W AUDIO 2 etc. (10 Hz to 100 kHz)................................ +0/-3 dB ............................................................................ 0.04% or less Front L/R ..................................................................170 W/ch Front L/R ..........................................................120 W+120 W (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ) • Frequency Response • Total Harmonic Distortion Front L/R [U.K. and Europe models] .......................170 W/ch Dolby Pro Logic II Game - Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, SUBWOOFER (50 Hz)......................................... 1.0 V/470 Center......................................................................140 W/ch Surround L/R ...........................................................135 W/ch • Post Decoding Format • Output Level / Output Impedance Speaker Out ....................................................... 150 µV or less • Channel Separation (Input 1 k Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz) PHONO ....................................................75 dB/60 dB or more • Dynamic Power (IHF) Front L/R (8/6/4/2 )...................................135/165/210/280 W AUDIO 2 etc.............................................75 dB/60 dB or more • Volume Control • Damping Factor Front L/R, 1 kHz, 8 ............................................. 150 or more • Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance PHONO (1 kHz, 100 W/8 ) ................................ 3.5 mV/47 k AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 ) ...................... 200 mV/47 k • Maximum Input Signal Surround L/R....................................................120 W+120 W PHONO (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .............................. 60 mV or more Surround Back L/R ..........................................120 W+120 W AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ........................ 2.4 V or more En 158 Main Zone ................ MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step) Zone2 ....................... MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step) • Tone Control Characteristics Main Zone Bass Boost/Cut .........................±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step) Bass Turnover............................................................. 350 Hz Treble Boost/Cut ..................... ±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step) Treble Turnover .......................................................... 3.5 kHz Zone2 Bass Boost/Cut .........................±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step) • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) • Standby Power Consumption Mono/Stereo ..........................................................65 dB/64 dB • Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz) Mono/Stereo ............................................................ 0.5%/0.6% • Antenna Input................................................ 75 Ω unbalanced AM section Treble Boost/Cut ..................... ±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step) [Asia and General models] ..... 530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz) H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back: Small) [Other models] ........................................ 531 kHz to 1611 kHz Wireless (Wi-Fi) ............................................................. 2.1 W Wireless Direct .............................................................. 2.2 W HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby On (Wired), Bluetooth Standby On ......................................................................................... 1.9 W • Power Supply HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals), .................................................................................. 12 dB/oct. [U.S.A. and Canada models] ..........................AC 120 V, 60 Hz [General model] ............AC 110 to 120/220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz [China model]..................................................AC 220 V, 50 Hz Video Section [Korea model] .................................................AC 220 V, 60 Hz • Video Signal Type ....................................... NTSC/PAL/SECAM [Australia model] .............................................AC 240 V, 50 Hz • Video Signal Level [U.K. and Europe models] ..............................AC 230 V, 50 Hz Component HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby On, General L.P.F. (Subwoofer)..................................................... 24 dB/oct. Composite ............................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω Network Standby Off........................................................ 1.4 W Wired ............................................................................. 2.1 W [U.S.A. and Canada models] .................. 530 kHz to 1710 kHz • Filter Characteristics ......................................................................................... 0.1 W HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals), Bluetooth Standby Off • Tuning Range Bass Turnover............................................................. 350 Hz Treble Turnover .......................................................... 3.5 kHz HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby Off [Asia model] ....................................AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz • Power Consumption Network Standby On (Wireless Direct), Bluetooth Standby On ......................................................................................... 2.9 W • Maximum Power Consumption [Asia and General models] ........................................... 1190 W • Dimensions (W x H x D) ......................435 x 182 x 439 mm (17-1/8” x 7-1/8” x 17-1/4”) * Including legs and protrusions • Reference Dimensions (W x H x D) Y.......................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω [U.S.A. model].................................................................450 W Pb/Pr ................................................................ 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω [Canada and Korea models]...........................................380 W • Video Maximum Input Level .......................... 1.5 Vp-p or more [Other models] ................................................................420 W (with wireless antenna upright) ......................435 x 247 x 439 mm (17-1/8” x 9-3/4” x 17-1/4”) • Weight ........................................................... 14.9 kg (32.8 lbs) • Signal to Noise Ratio ..........................................60 dB or more • Monitor Out Frequency Response Component (MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT) * Specifications are subject to change without notice. ............................................................5 Hz to 100 MHz, ±3 dB FM Section • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ..............87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz [Asia and General models] .......................................87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz [Other models].................................87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz • 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.) Mono................................................................. 3 µV (20.8 dBf) En 159 Index Symbols Exclamation mark (!) Lock icon (o) 127 Dimmer (Front Display) 126 DLNA 76 DMC (Digital Media Controller) 102 Dolby Atmos 17, 38, 59, 118 DSP Program (front display information) 130, 135 Numerics 2.1-channel system 18 2ch Stereo 62 4K Ultra HD 154 5.1-channel system 18 7.1+2-channel system 17 7.1-channel system 17 7ch Stereo 62 E ECO 128 Error indication (front display) External power amplifier 26 Extra Bass 99 I Backup/recovery of the settings 133 Banana plug 21 Basic speaker configuration 17 Bluetooth 69 Bookmark 82 Initial Volume 118, 125 Input jack assignment 126 Input Trim 100 Internet radio 80 iPod content playback 70 iPod content playback (AirPlay) C L Lipsync 39 D Decoder Off (front display information) Dialogue 99, 129 96 147 M MAC Address Filter 122 Max Volume 117, 124 Memory Guard 127 Menu language selection 37 En 160 NAS content playback 77 Network Connection 121 Network information 130 Network Name 130 Network Standby 122 97 Parametric EQ 116 Party mode 91 Power Amp Assign 113 Preset station selection (FM/AM radio) Pure Direct 64 HDCP 139, 140 HDMI OUT2 Assign 125 HDMI output selection 56 HDMI signal compatibility 154 B 96 P H 96 N Option menu Firmware update 131, 134 FM radio 65 Frequency step setting 65, 132 Front display information 96 Adaptive DRC 98 ADVANCED SETUP 131 AirPlay 83 AM radio 65 ARC (Audio Return Channel) 154 Audio Decoder (front display information) Auto Power Standby 128 Auto Preset (FM radio) 68 85 O F A CINEMA DSP 60 CINEMA DSP 3D Mode 118 Compressed Music Enhancer 64 Crossover frequency setting (subwoofer) 145 Multiple room playback Muting 56, 91 66 R Radio Data System tuning 67 Remote control 14 Remote control ID 132 Rename 102, 105, 123 Repeat 72, 75, 79 Restoring the default settings 133 S 83 SCENE function 57 Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format Setup menu 109 Short Message 126 Shuffle 72, 75, 79 Signal information 129 Sleep timer 14, 91 Sound program 60, 61 Speaker impedance 16, 20, 131 Standby Through 111 133 Straight decode 63 Subwoofer Trim 99 Surround decoder 63 T Test Tone 116 Tone Control 98 Trigger function 36, 127 U USB storage device content playback 73 V Virtual CINEMA FRONT 18, 62 Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) 17 Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) 17, 118 W Wallpaper 126 Web control 93 Wireless (Wi-Fi) 48, 121 Wireless Direct 54, 121 WPS 50 Y YPAO (Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer) YPAO Volume 98 39 Z Zone2 85, 124 En 161 © 2015 Yamaha Corporation YH114B0/EN-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
-
79
-
80
-
81
-
82
-
83
-
84
-
85
-
86
-
87
-
88
-
89
-
90
-
91
-
92
-
93
-
94
-
95
-
96
-
97
-
98
-
99
-
100
-
101
-
102
-
103
-
104
-
105
-
106
-
107
-
108
-
109
-
110
-
111
-
112
-
113
-
114
-
115
-
116
-
117
-
118
-
119
-
120
-
121
-
122
-
123
-
124
-
125
-
126
-
127
-
128
-
129
-
130
-
131
-
132
-
133
-
134
-
135
-
136
-
137
-
138
-
139
-
140
-
141
-
142
-
143
-
144
-
145
-
146
-
147
-
148
-
149
-
150
-
151
-
152
-
153
-
154
-
155
-
156
-
157
-
158
-
159
-
160
-
161
-
162
Yamaha RX-A1050 El manual del propietario
- Categoría
- Receptores AV
- Tipo
- El manual del propietario
En otros idiomas
- français: Yamaha RX-A1050 Le manuel du propriétaire
- italiano: Yamaha RX-A1050 Manuale del proprietario
- English: Yamaha RX-A1050 Owner's manual
- Deutsch: Yamaha RX-A1050 Bedienungsanleitung
- русский: Yamaha RX-A1050 Инструкция по применению
- Nederlands: Yamaha RX-A1050 de handleiding
- dansk: Yamaha RX-A1050 Brugervejledning
- svenska: Yamaha RX-A1050 Bruksanvisning
- Türkçe: Yamaha RX-A1050 El kitabı
- suomi: Yamaha RX-A1050 Omistajan opas
Documentos relacionados
-
Yamaha CX-A5100 El manual del propietario
-
Yamaha RX-A860 El manual del propietario
-
Yamaha RX-A1070 El manual del propietario
-
-
Yamaha RX-A1080 El manual del propietario
-
Yamaha RX-A810 El manual del propietario
-
-
Yamaha Audio RX-V779 El manual del propietario
-
Yamaha Aventage RX-A3040 El manual del propietario
-